Home

CBK-HD01 - Krypton Film AS

1. OOOOO u U OOOOO O FILE 5 001 032 1 32 5 001 0324 1 32 LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the file selection display of the SCENE FILE display For details refer to the corresponding item of the SCENE FILE display 4 62 PDW 700 V1 E LENS FILE 2 Display Setting 2 the LENS file FO7OLENS FILE 2 M VMOD CENTER H CENTER V lt UJ ooo OUT SELECT ARE Item Setting Function LENS M VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts the lens file V SAW shading compensation LENS CENTER H 480 to 479 Sets the center marker position Horizontal direction LENS CENTER V 270 to 269 Sets the center marker position Vertical direction TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector LENS R FLARE 99 to 99 LENS G FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the R flare compensation level LENS B FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the B flare compensation level Adjusts the G flare compensation level LENS W R OFST 99 to 99 LENS W B OFST 99 to 99 Adjusts the R white gain offset value Adjusts the B white gain offset value In the LENS M VMOD LENS CENTER H LENS CENTER V LENS R G B FLARE and LENS W R W B the lens extender position is displayed in
2. dS i 10014 Dues iod LOOENO gp8 LIv gpzi lonuo2 1 napoo gpz 11 9 81 I SPPIIV gP9L MEME dM 2 2 Liv i i ngpor NI JIN dS YOLINOW 9 ngpos 2 02 4141 11 NI 3NH HO vid AAA naa sav 5856 i JoAIG90H zzy ngpsL LHO A 2451 Hv3u 8 INXV ved LNO cta LNO AUD ejeq Wave eunsn ved LNO eusa s ved LNO 210 181610 Scl 2 1 ved nv Nv ved 84 54 ous cL a naa sav uroy EE VO d V i 0zLO50SLVOOZEIALL zHWOZ L dsa Sr dAG 1 19 PDW 700 V1 E 1 3 Matching Connectors DC IN XLR 4 pin Male Use the following connectors at the ends of the cables when connecting the cables during installation and mainte nance or alternately use the following cables Panel indication GENLOCK IN TC IN TC OUT TEST OUT SDI IN SDI OUT 1 SDI OUT 2 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 AUDIO OUT DC IN DC OUT 12 V EARPHONE LIGHT MIC IN NETWORK REMOTE VF i LINK WIRELESS RECEIVER IN 1 4 Signal Inputs and Outputs Inputs GENLOCKIN TCIN SDI IN Option Outputs TEST OUT S
3. 4 95 4 10 16 SKEW 4 96 4 10 17 LENS CLEANING eene 4 97 4 10 18 SERVO NU 4 97 2 4 10 19 SKEW 4 97 4 1020 SERVO o Pr 4 97 4 10 21 ACCELERATION OFFSET 4 98 4 10 22 ERROR LOGGER eene 4 99 4 10 23 VERSION caspasasssaseanesdsmeiansancesdendsnaacraedsetsaanaseites 4 100 4 10 24 SERIAL NO eene nennen 4 100 4 10 25 CLEAR MEDIA LOG 4 100 4 10 26 UPLOAD TO EEPROM 4 100 4 11 AUDIO A D Error Correction eere 4 101 4 12 AUDIO D A Error Correction eee 4 102 4 13 AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation 4 102 4 14 Adjusting Battery End Detection Voltage 4 103 4 15 SERVICE SUPPORT Menu eren 4 104 Semp Meni LAGE etii nate Move 4 105 5 File System Del File y Stl arc osa 5 255 CN DEUS 5 2 5 3 Operating the Files and the Data Flow 5 3 5 3 1 USER FIDE T 5 3 5 3 2 ARMS 9 5 5 5 3 3 REFERENCE GE 5 7 5 3 4 Other FILE SCENE FILE and LENS FILE 5 9 5 3 5 SERV ICE EIL 5 10 5 3 6
4. F ILE Ol OOL SCENE STORE Function The display appears when inserting a Memory Stick or during saving data in a Memory Stick or during reading data from a Memory Stick Switches the attributes when displaying the following file ALL File ID and date are displayed 00000000 00 JAN 00 F ID File ID is displayed L1L1L1EI EI EJETEJ EIE EJ EI ET ET ET ET DATE Date and time of saving the file are displayed 00 00 00 00 00 00 MODEL Model name and format are displayed PDW 700 59 941 When the file does not exist the message NO FILE is displayed Select the target read file from which data is read or select the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored When saving the data in a new file select NEW FILE Reads the 5 files that are being displayed on screen into MEM1 5 inside the main unit Saves the contents of MEM1 5 of the main unit that are being displayed on screen into 5 files PDW 700 V1 E REFERENCE Display Operating the REFERENCE file FOSOREFERENCE TOP gt REFERENCE STORE EXEC REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC REFERENCE Item REFERENCE STORE REFERENCE CLEAR REFERENCE LOAD REFERENCE SAVE F ID SCENE WHITE DATA PDW 700 V1 E EXEC EXEC Setting Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob and select YES for the conf
5. 1 36 1 7 5 Front Pane 1 37 1 7 6 SW Guard Assembly 1 38 1 7 7 Shoulder Pad Connector Cover 1 38 1 7 8 Connector Panel Assembly 2 2 2 tente 1 39 1 7 9 Rear Panel Assembly 1 40 147410 Battery egi 1 40 1 8 Removing Installing LCD Block 1 41 1 8 1 12175100 1 41 1 8 2 1 43 1 8 3 LCD Backlight and LCD Panel 1 44 PDW 700 V1 E 1 9 Replacing the Flat Cables Flexible Card 1 45 1 10 Service Tools Measuring Equipment List 1 46 1 1051 Service DOO S 1 46 1 10 2 Measuring Equipment crcscesissressvserctsaversnreaoorsonsiees 1 47 1 11 Firmware Software IA IER 1 48 1 11 1 EEPROM FRAM List eene 1 48 1 11 2 Firmware Update Using the USB Memory 1 49 1 11 3 Software Option Registration Method by Using USB Memory 1 51 1 12 Other enni 1 52 1 12 1 Notes on Handling Optical Block Assembly 1 52 1 12 2 Standard Torque for Screws 1 53 1 12 9 Stop Washer 1 53 1 12 4 Description of CCD Block Number 1 54 1 12 5 Memory Backup Battery 2 tonos 1 54 112
6. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the two coaxial connectors CN11 CN12 on the DCP 44 board and detach the cables from the three hooks and the notch on the MB 1111 board 5 Remove the special screw M2 and remove the drop protection XLR 6 Disconnect the harnesses from the four connectors CN2 CN4 CN5 on the CNB 25 board 7 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN7 on the CNB 25 board 8 Remove the three screws B2 6 X 5 and disconnect the CNB 25 board from the connector on the MB 1111 board 9 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN116 on the MB 1111 board 10 Disconnect the harness from the connector on the CN 2948 board 11 Remove the two screws B3 X 8 and remove the connector panel assembly PDW 700 V1 E pty Gage oon board PE Coaxial cables Cw Drop protection Special screw M2 Harness Flexible card CN4 wire Harness 22 DA Harnesses CN3 CN7 CNB 25 board B2 6 x5 CN 2948 board MB 1111 board MB 1111 board 1 39 1 7 9 Rear Panel Assembly mo Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 Remove the connector panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 8 Disconnect the coaxial cables from the two coaxial connectors CN10 CN13 on the DCP
7. o0 0 0j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 J O0 0 0 0 O0jJOJO D i O N OPERATION Menu 3 5 No 13 14 15 16 17 18 4 108 Page MARKER 2 GAIN SW VF SETTING AUTO IRIS SHOT ID SHOT DISP Setup Item USER BOX USER BOX WIDTH USER BOX HEIGHT USER BOX H POS USER BOX V POS CENTER V POS ASPECT SAFE ZONE ASPECT SAFE AREA GAIN LOW GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND SHOCKLESS GAIN ZEBRA ZEBRA SELECT 1 DET LVL ZEBRA1 APT LVL ZEBRA2 DET LVL VF DETAIL LEVEL VF ASPECT SD IRIS OVERRIDE IRIS SPEED CLIP HIGH LIGHT IRIS WINDOW IRIS WINDOW IND IRIS VAR WIDTH IRIS VAR HEIGHT IRIS VAR H POS IRIS VAR V POS ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 SHOT DATE SHOT TIME SHOT MODEL NAME SHOT SERIAL NO SHOT ID SEL SHOT 16 9 CHARA SHOT BLINK CHARA F SET OFF 240 135 OFF 90 OdB 6dB 12dB 42dB OFF OFF OFF 70 10 100 240 135 Blank Blank Blank Blank OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ALL PRST x 0 01 0101010 01 010 010 01 10010 01010 01010109 10 010 01 10010 010 0 SCN XIX
8. 1 1 1 1 2 Locations of Mechanical Parts 1 3 l 2 Circon es Ci Oe occ 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 4 1 2 2 CECD 1 5 1 2 3 Video Sienal Syste 0 2 1 5 1 2 4 eye eio MICH 1 6 1 2 5 Digital Audio 5 1 12 1 2 6 1 12 1 2 7 Audio DSP Operation Processing 1 14 1 2 8 Optical Drive System 1 16 1 2 9 Power Supply 1 17 LCD System 1 18 2211 aE 1 18 1 3 Matching Connectors 1 20 1 4 Signal Inputs and Outputs 1 20 1 5 On Board Switch and LED Function 1 24 1 6 How to Take Cartridge Manually 1 34 1 6 1 Taking Out a Cartridge at Power off 1 34 1 6 2 When You Cannot Take Out a Cartridge Even If Pressing the EJECT Button at Power on 1 34 1 7 Removing Installing 1 35 1 7 1 Removing Outside Panel 1 35 1 7 2 Reinstalling Outside Panel 1 35 1 7 3 Inside PANE 2 442554626522145444244224054 6 1 35 1 7 4 Handle Assembly 5255
9. 7 33 T 1710 405233 BOAT 7 33 CHR Bond se censinssarensnciawassnaseraciacneatasasioanivnnanoznss 7 33 TAIND PS 7 34 7 7 13 38 Board CN 2948 Board SW 1352 Board and RM 216 Board 7 34 7 7 14 MS 86 Board nes Sade a ERE 7 34 7 7 15 25 Board and PS 708 Board 7 35 7 7 16 CN 3005 Board and SW 1426 Board 7 35 Jer 125006 7 36 7 7 18 RE 246 7 37 7 1 19 101 Board 7 37 7 7 20 MB 1111 7 38 PDW 700 V1 7 8 Service Action After Replacing or Repairing BOn PER 7 39 7 8 1 Optical Block Assembly 7 39 7 8 2 cou pectin 7 39 7 8 3 INE 300 gt Board SUUS 7 39 7 8 4 Board 7 39 7 8 5 PME 7 40 7 8 6 em 7 40 7 8 7 7 40 7 8 8 7 40 8 Optical Drive Alignment 8 1 Optical Drive Alignment Overview 8 1 8 1 1 E TE 8 1 8 1 2 Igor irs EEEE PCT A E 8 1 8 1 3 Preparations Before Adjustment 8 1 8 2 Procedures After Replacing the Optical Block Assembly and the Board incer rent rosae 8 1 8 2 1 Adjustment After Replacing the Optical Block Assembly 8
10. 9 11 9 2 10 S H DC Adjustment sxcassis 9 12 9 2 11 RPN Correction Procedure 9 13 4 PDW 700 V1 E Purpose of this manual Related manuals PDW 700 V1 E Manual Structure There are volume 1 and volume 2 in the Maintenance manual of PD W 700 The maintenance manuals volume 1 2 are intended for use by trained system and service engineers and provides the information of maintenance and detailed service The following manuals are available in this model If this manual is required please contact your local Sony Sales Office Service Center Operation Manual Supplied with the unit This manual is necessary for application and operation and installation of this unit Maintenance Manual Volume 1 Describes about maintenance information parts replacement and guideline for adjustment Part number 9 968 417 03 Volume 2 Describes about block diagrams schematic diagrams board layouts and detailed parts list required for parts level service Part number 9 968 435 03 Semiconductor Pin Assignments CD ROM This Semiconductor Pin Assignments CD ROM allows you to search for semiconductors used in Broadcast and Professional equipment This manual contains a complete list of semiconductors and their ID Nos and thus should be used together with the CD ROM Part number 9 968 546 06 Section 1 Se
11. within the predetermined time 117 lt Displacement of cartridge is detected in the loader during horizontal move of loading 118 lt An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during horizontal move of loading 211 lt Vertical move of loading did not end within the predetermined time 213 lt Cartridge cannot be detected after loading 217 lt Displacement of cartridge is detected in the loader during vertical move of loading 218 lt An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during vertical move loading 811 lt e Ejection operation did not end within the predetermined time 818 lt O O An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during the ejection operation 911 lt O Unchucking operation did not end within the predetermined time 918 lt An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during the unchucking 3 4 operation PDW 700 V1 E 3 2 4 Error 3X When errors related to the optical drive sensor system are detected the following error codes are dis played Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive Description code code display logger logger 34 500 lt e Loader position sensor SE 709 board is detects abnormal code 509 lt Sensor hole 5 857 858 board is detects abnormal code 35 500 ACC Sensor X Abnormality of acceleration sensor is detected 37 500 High TEMP 3C 500 HUMID The temperature
12. 6dBES _20 L 17dBFS Output level at OdBFS input 11 4dBFS 14 4dBF 40 4 8dBFS max 50 7 pod 7 8dBFS Ld 21 01 m _10 8dBFS max 60 o o 21 01 gt 13 8dBFS max 0 2 up 15 84 5 max 70 5 9 5 9 T ps en lil 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Max input level gt of the LINE input O Max input level of the MIC input AGC LIM SPECIFICATION 3 DIGITAL Out Put LIMITER characteristics Turn the LIMITER ON OFF from the menu ON Linear operation until approx 12 dBFS approx 11 dBFS at Max OFF Turn off LIMITER at 0 dBFS 4 Gaincontrol during MANUAL The A D converted VR value is converted into a DSP multiplication value at FP CPU and synchronized with the VIDEO frame then handed over to the CPU to set in the register of the DSP The maximum variable for volume is 12 dB ee to 12 dB 5 Recording error correction For error correction on the A D converter for audio the multiplication value is corrected in the range 0 to 2 dB Starts from the terminal with the standard signal level applied fully automatic 6 Playback error correction For error correction on the D A converter for audio the multiplication value is corrected in the range 0 to 2 dB The correction is performed after the playback error correction is completed Start
13. Refer to the Operation Manual PDW 700 V1 E Factory setting Factory setting OFF OFF Factory setting OFF OFF 1 31 SW 1391 board Ref No 51 52 53 54 55 56 VDR SAVE STBY GAIN L M H WHITE BAL B A PRESET ATW OUTPUT DCC ON_OFF BARS_CAM MENU ON OFF MENU ON OFF Refer to the Operation Manual SW 1425 board Ref No 51 52 53 Function Switches the VDR operation state SAVE STBY Switches gain L M H Switches the white balance memory PRST Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value Calls the saved white balance value ATW Switches the ATW operations Switches the output signal Turns on off the dynamic contrast control BARS Outputs the color bar signal CAM Turns on off the DCC function Turns on off the MENU switch Turns on off the MENU switch Name REC START AUTO_W B_BAL SHUTTER Refer to the Operation Manual 1 32 Function The button used to start stop recording The switch used to automatically adjust white balance black balance Turns on off the electronic shutter Turns on off the electronic shutter Factory setting SAVE L 0 dB M 6 dB 12 dB PRST 3200K OFF OFF Factory setting PDW 700 V1 E SW 1426 board EN Ref No Name Function 51 AUTO MANUAL AUTO Lights EXT LIGHT along with the REC operation MANUAL Turns ON OFF EXT LIGHT
14. Sets the color temperature of filter 3 Sets the color temperature of filter 4 2000 to 10000 100 1 step BATTERY INFO When the battery BP GL65 GL95 supporting Info is used gt 5200 INFO TYPE MFD DATE CYCLE COUNT CAPACITY VOLTAGE CURRENT REMAINI REMAINI MODE STATUS Item TYPE 25 Setting Display only Function Selecting battery types MFD DATE D M Y CYCLE COUNT Display only Date of manufacture Number of times of charge discharge CAPACITY Display only Display only Selecting the capacity when battery is fully charged VOLTAGE Indicating the battery voltage CURRENT REMAINING Display only Display only Indicating the battery current Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of REMAINING MIN Display only Display only Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of time minute MODE STATUS Display only Battery operating mode is displayed Battery status is displayed PDW 700 V1 E Display only 4 81 HOURS METER 2 S21OHOURS METER2 EXEC gt METER OPERATION LASER OPERATION rst SP I NDLE rst LOAD I NG rst SEEK rst Refer to 6 4 Digital Hours Meter for the description of HOURS METER 2 page Item Setting RESET METER Press the MENU knob to move
15. x JJ 7 XIX 0 LENS STD Power OFF SVC xK x X Dependson the VF switch setting Initial value X PDW 700 V1 OPERATION Menu 4 5 No Page 19 SET STATUS 20 WHITE SETTING 21 OFFSET WHT 22 SHT ENABLE 23 LENS FILE PDW 700 V1 E Setup Item STATUS ABNORMAL STATUS SYSTEM STATUS FUNCTION STATUS AUDIO WHITE SWITCH lt B gt SHOCKLESS WHITE ATW HOLD MEMORY ATW SPEED AWB FIXED AREA FILTER WHT MEM OFFSET WHITE lt A gt WARM COOL lt A gt WARM COOL BAL lt A gt OFFSET WHITE lt B gt WARM COOL lt B gt WARM COOL BAL lt B gt SHUTTER ECS SHUTTER SLS SHUTTER 1 32 SHUTTER 1 33 SHUTTER 1 40 SHUTTER 1 48 SHUTTER 1 50 SHUTTER 1 60 SHUTTER 1 96 SHUTTER 1 100 SHUTTER 1 120 SHUTTER 1 125 SHUTTER 1 250 SHUTTER 1 500 SHUTTER 1 1000 SHUTTER 1 2000 LENS FILE SELECT F ID S No L ID L MF F SET ON ON ON ON MEM OFF OFF OFF OFF 3200 OFF 3200 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1
16. ss 8228 PELAWD http 192168 1 10 HIGH resolution file LOW resolution file Clip NRT metadata Clip No Name Title Title2 Format TC Duration Created Modified Rec Device Frame Rate Aspect Ratio Back to Thumbnails 1 i PDW 700 V1 E 2 7 2 4 Maintenance Menu 2 4 1 Software Update In the Software Update page of the Maintenance menu the batched update using the firmware package file can be performed In this section the update method using the Web browser Internet Explorer 1 explained The figures shown in this page are the sample of display Due to the specification change the actual screen display may differ from the sample figures Tools Equipment Required Personal computer referred to as PC hereafter Firmware package file Network cable crossover or straight through For obtaining the firmware package contact your local Sony Sales Office Service Center Preparation 1 Eject the disc 2 Remove the 1 LINK cable the headphones and the audio cable 3 Set the VDR switch in inside panel to STBY 4 Connect the camcorder in either method mentioned below Refer to Connection Diagram Connect the camcorder and the host PC via other network device such as a hub Connect the camcorder and the PC directly using network crossover cable A Copy the obtained firmware package to an arbitrary directory
17. DRIVE MAINTE EXEC SERVICE SUPPORT EXEC 17 FAN FAN VOLT FIX OFF X A X X X X Initial value FAN ROTATION DET OK PDW 700 V1 4 125 SERVICE Menu 4 4 No 18 19 20 2 22 23 24 29 MEASURE FILTER CTEMP BATTERY INFO HOUSE METER2 FUNCTION LIMIT S H DC BOARD INFO SERVICE FILE Setup MEASUREMENT MODE MASTER BLACK MASTER GAIN TMP FILTER CTEMP 1 FILTER CTEMP 2 FILTER CTEMP 3 FILTER CTEMP 4 TYPE MFD DATE D M Y CYCLE COUNT CAPACITY VOLTAGE CURRENT REMAINING REMAINING MIN MODE STATUS RESET METER OPERATION LASER OPERATION rst SPINDLE rst LOADING rst SEEK rst AF DISPLAY S H DC ADJ MODE TEST OUT SELECT S H DC B Rch 1 S H DC B Gch 1 S H DC B Bch 1 SD REC amp PB DVP 24P REC amp PB DCPxx xx PROCYON V DCPxx xx TG VERSION SVC FILE LOAD SVC FILE SAVE F ID F SET OFF 0 Depends on the switch setting 3200 3200 3200 3200 000000H 000000 000000H 000000H 000000 000000H OFF OFF VBS 0 0 0 Depends the installed board Depends on the installed board ROM Version EXEC EXEC Blank ALL xX X X X PRST gt gt gt gt gt ri gt The board name to be displayed is the name of the board that is actually installed 4 126 SC
18. Item Setting DETAIL OFF ON APERTURE OFF ON DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 APERTURE LEVEL 99 to 99 DTL H V RATIO 99 to 99 CRISPENING 99 to 99 LEVEL DEPEND OFF ON LEVEL DEPEND LVL 99 to 99 DETAIL FREQUENCY 99 to 99 DETAIL 2 Display Adjusting 2 DETAIL POSODETAIL 2 gt KNEE APERTURE KNEE APT LVL DETAIL LIMIT DTL WHT LMT DTL BLK LMT DTL V BLK LMT V DTL CREATION R G H V CONTROL MODE Item Setting KNEE APERTURE OFF ON KNEE APT LVL 99 to 99 DETAIL LIMIT 99 to 99 DTL WHT LMT 99 to 99 DTL BLK LMT 99 to 99 DTL V BLK LMT 99 to 99 V DTL CREATION G R G Y H V CONTROL MODE H V V 4 32 Function Turns ON OFF the detail signal Turns ON OFF the aperture correction function Sets the overall detail signal level Sets the aperture correction level Sets the V detail signal level only Sets the range of video signal amplitude to which the detail signal is crispening Turns ON OFF the level depend function This function decreases the amount of detail signal when the video signal amplitude is small Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressed by the level depend Sets the frequency thickness of the H detail signal Function Turns ON OFF the knee aperture function This function controls the amount of the detail signal that is added to the highlight signal higher than the knee point Adjusts the amount of the detail signal that is added to the highlig
19. Continue to next page 4 19 Continued from previous page O220SHT O220SHT ENABLE gt SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER m gt SHUTTER ECS SHUTTER 1732 SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER FORMAT 59 SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER FORMAT 23 9P at et p 5 O O OUIN OOWW 48 4 50 4 60 96 12 12 5 50 co SCAN MODE 23 9 O220SHT ENABLE 2 gt SHUTTER 171000 SHUTTER 172000 FORMAT 23 9P 59 9P SCAN MODE 23 9P Item Setting Function SHUTTER ECS OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER SLS OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 32 2 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 33 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 40 2 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 48 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 50 2 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 60 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 96 2 OFF ON When s
20. Remove the RE knob and sleeve Disconnect the harness form the connector 113 and remove the ENC 118 board Open the jack cover and remove the fixing nut Disconnect the harness from the connector CN101 and remove the HP 148 board HP 148 board CN101 ENC 118 board Harness Inside panel Sleeve RE knob Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal 7 29 7 7 5 157 4 Remove the LCD harness holder 5 Disconnect the harnesses from the six connectors Note on removing FP 157 board CN700 CN701 CN702 CN703 CN802 CN850 on This unit is always energized to retain data even while the the FP 157 board POWER switch is off The data is also retained by the 6 Remove the nine screws PSW2 X 5 and remove the lithium battery on the FP 157 board For this reason if the FP 157 board board is repaired with power supplied ICs on the board may be broken Be sure to remove the lithium battery After removing the FP 157 board be careful not to before removing the FP 157 board drop the unfixed parts Removing the lithium battery with a screwdriver or a similar tool may cause short circuiting Remove the battery with a bamboo stick or a similar insulator Lithium battery 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the knobs two pieces 3 Open the switch door and remove the knobs B two pieces Harnesses CN703 CN700 CN701
21. X Communication error between system control CPU and PROXY AUDIO DSP IC900 DVP 45 board is detected Continue PDW 700 V1 E 3 7 Continued Main code 95 3 8 Sub code 503 507 508 509 50A 50C 50F 513 51 52 Time data display lt logger O Drive logger O Description Optical drive s BDC IC300 DR 606 board error is detected during initial check Adjustment data cannot be read from EEPROM in optical block assembly Hours meter data cannot be read from EEPROM in optical block assem bly Adjustment data cannot be read from optical drive s EEPROM 1 4 SE 857 board Hours meter data cannot be read from optical drive s EEPROM IC4 SE 857 board Optical drive s SYS PE IC700 DR 606 board configuration error is detected Cannot access SDRAM 1C301 DR 606 board for Optical drivers BDC IC300 DR 606 board Optical drive s BDC IC300 DR 606 board cannot set the SDRAM mode Optical drive s BDC IC300 DR 606 board cannot reset free run by SYS PE IC700 DR 606 board Auto setting by SYS PE IC700 DR 606 board is disabled with power control of optical drive s BDC IC300 DR 606 board PDW 700 V1 E Section 4 4 1 The PDW 700 has setup menus for making various settings and adjustments The setup menus of this unit include the USER menu USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu ALL menu O
22. 1 12 5 Memory Backup Battery The lithium battery is critical part to safe operation Replace the component with Sony part whose part number appears in the manual published by Sony If the component is replaced by any part other than the specified ones this may cause a fire or electric shock When replacing the lithium battery ensure that the battery is installed with and poles connected to the correct terminals An improper connection may cause an explosion or leakage of fluid result in physical damage in the surround ing materials The FP 157 board is equipped with the data backup battery When replacing it be sure to use the specified part Replacement part BT1 on the FP 157 board Part name CR 2032 lithium battery Part No AN 1 528 174 31 Recommended replacement period Every five years The memory IC stores the data such as date and time If the backup memory battery is dead or replaced these data are all cleared For re setting the data refer to Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock in Section 2 of the Operating Instruc tions 1 54 1 12 6 IC Link Replacement WARNING The IC link are critical parts to safe operation Replace the components with Sony parts whose part number appear in the manual published by Sony If the components are replaced by any parts other than the specified ones this may cause a fire or electric shock If a IC link 1s replaced while the main p
23. Internal clock Internal clock Internal clock Internal clock Internal clock Internal clock ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version ROM Version PRST SCN REF LENS STD Power OFF SVC 4 121 DIAGNOSIS Menu 2 2 No Page Setup Item F SET ALL PRST SCN REF LENS STD Power OFF SVC 06 DEV STATUS I O MS OK 5 CN OK 4 2 E DCP OK E VF OK B E B 2 2 2 CN OK OK z E DR OK E E E LSI DCP1 OK s 5 DCP2 OK E OK 5 DCP4 OK E TG OK E D A E 2 DCP1 OK E E E DCP2 OK s E OK a FRAM E E FAN OK 9 SCI E 5 SY OK x z E E 5 07 OPTIONBOARD HD SD SDIINPUT E a COMPOSITE INPUT 2 50 amp 24 amp 4 122 PDW 700 V1 6 1 4 01 MENU SET 02 SP FUNC 03 WHITE SHADING 04 BLACK SHADING 05 SHADING PDW 7
24. ON 0 45 VBS STD ALL PRST 0 0 0101010100 O O OOJ OjJO O O SCN 101010 09 0 1010101010 0 JJ m H LENS STD Power OFF SVC X xie X x Jx x xpx X X Y when R G B Y when R G B 1010 101010 01010 0101010100 4 111 PAINT Menu 2 4 No Page Setup Item F SET ALL PRST SCN REF LENS STD Power OFF SVC 05 BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA OFF X BLACK GAM RANGE HIGH X MASTER BLK 0 X BLACK GAMMA 0 X X BLACK GAMMA 0 X TEST OUT SELECT VBS X X Ywhen R G B 06 KNEE KNEE ON KNEE POINT 95 0 KNEE SLOPE 0 KNEE SATURATION ON KNEE SAT LEVEL 0 WHITE CLIP ON Initial value WHITE CLIP LEVEL 108 0 07 DETAIL 1 DETAIL ON APERTURE ON DETAIL LEVEL 0 APERTURE LEVEL DTL H V RATIO CRISPENING LEVEL DEPEND ON LEVEL DEPENDLVL 0 DETAIL FREQUENCY 0 08 DETAIL 2 KNEE APERTURE OFF KNEE APT LVL DETAIL LIM
25. PSW2x5 FP 157 board SW door Unfixed parts gt LCD 2 harness holder 7 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 6 of removal 7 30 PDW 700 V1 E 7 7 6 CN 2946 Board and CN 3026 Board 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the DCP 44 board Refer to Section 7 7 2 3 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN1300 on the SY 355 board 4 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1500 on the SY 355 board Flexible card wire Harness CN1300 Harness 92 Y NR 22 INA fp lt SSN CN101 MB 1111 board 177 board CN 2947 board DCP 44 board 5 Open the connector cover 6 Remove the three screws B2 X 5 and remove the tally cover 7 Remove the two screws B3 X 6 and remove the CN 2946 CN 3026 board block assembly 8 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN1 on the CN 3026 board 9 Remove the two screws PSW2 X 5 Note Be careful not to lose the drop protection on the CN 2946 board since it 1s not fixed PDW 700 V1 E B2x5 Lj c Protection CN 2946 00 board CN 2946 CN 3026 board block assembly Connector cover Tally cover S 10 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal 7 31 7 7 7 KY 623 Board Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the DCP 44 board Refer to Section 7 7 2
26. Protection Mode When this unit detects an error it enters a protection mode to prevent the cartridge disc optical drive and other components from damage or failure The protection mode depends on error status When a cartridge 18 inserted press the EJECT button and remove the cartridge The cartridge may not be ejected even after the EJECT command has been received depending on error status In this case turn the unit power OFF and ON 3 2 PDW 700 V1 E 3 2 2 Error OX When errors related to optical drive control or to devices are detected the following error codes are displayed Main Sub code code 02 020 2 F37 X25 X26 X27 X28 X37 03 060 X54 X57 X58 X67 X68 04 X7C X7D 06 049 E41 F41 08 091 095 292 992 Time data display lt TITITITI T lt lt lt logger O O 910940 X Drive Description logger Optical block assembly is recording at maximum laser output Perform the pickup lens cleaning Refer to Section 4 10 17 Laser of optical block assembly is determined to be deteriorated the laser deterioration assessment for optical block assembly No movement is detected in the ND filter initial operation check of optical block assembly The laser output of the optical block assembly is abnormal The laser output coefficient of the optical block assembly cannot be adjusted The l
27. Remove the DVP 45 board Refer to Section 7 7 3 Open the key switch door oe Se Remove the two screws key frame assembly and key switch cover Key switch door 8 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal 27 2 4 7 7 8 3025 Board and SW 1425 Board Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 6 Remove the harness holder rubber to release the Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 harness Remove the front panel Refer to Section 7 7 4 i us Remove the two screws B2 6 X 5 remove the SW 1425 board 5 Remove the two screws B2 6 X 5 remove the CN 3025 board qe N Harness Harness hold rubber VTR start button 7 Disconnect the harness from the connector and remove the KY 623 board LW2 6 2 6 5 8 6 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps to 5 of removal Align the position of the switch S1 on the SW 1425 board with the position of the VTR start button 7 32 PDW 700 V1 E 7 7 9 CN 3001 Board 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the two screws 3 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN2 and remove the CN 3001 board by turning it in the direction of the arrow Turn CN 3001 board 90 degrees 4 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 3 of removal 7 7 10 10 235 Board 1 Remove the outside
28. Sets the automatic lighting on when Manual Interval REC is operating The lighting time in second before the start of recording is specified x1 When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422 HD420 setting value is 2 6 12 and default setting value is 2 2 This does not appear when TRIGGER INTERVAL is set to M PDW 700 V1 E 4 ASSIGNABLE SW Display Setting the ASSIGN SW M SPEED URN VIDEO Item ASSIGN SW 1 3 4 COLOR TEMP SW Setting OFF FRONT MIC MONO STEREO PICTURE CACHE ON OFF SUPER VFDISP amp MENU MARKER RE TAKE ATW RETURN VIDEO LENS RET REC SWITCH TURBO SWITCH ZEBRA FREEZE MIX COLOR TEMP SW 3200K COLOR TEMP SW 4300K COLOR TEMP SW 5600K COLOR TEMP SW 6300K ELECTRICAL CC CC5600K ZOOM TELE WIDE ZOOM WIDE TELE SHOT MARK1 SHOT MARK2 CLIP FLAG OK CLIP FLAG NG CLIP FLAG KEEP Function Assigns no function Assigns the function to switch stereo and monaural when the stereo microphone is connected Assigns the function to execute picture cache recording Assigns the function to switch whether or not to combine the character information of the view finder and that of menu with the video signal that is output from the SDI OUT 2 connector or the TEST OUT connector when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER is set to ON in the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu Assigns the ON OFF function to display all markers Assigns the function to delete the last
29. i CN602 AT 177 board 5 Remove the four screws PSW2 X 5 and disconnect the AT 177 board from the connector CN4 on the DCP 44 board AT 177 board 9 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 7 3 DVP 45 Board and SY 355 Board 7 7 4 ENC 118 Board HP 148 Board and 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the CN 2947 board Refer to Section 7 7 1 l 3 Remove the DCP 44 board Refer to Section 7 7 2 24 4 Disconnect the harnesses from the two connectors 3 CN600 CN1500 on the SY 355 board 5 Disconnect the flexible card wire form the connector CN1300 on the SY 355 board 6 Disconnect the flexible card wire form the connector CN1700 on the DVP 45 board 7 Remove the four screws B2 6 X 5 8 Disconnect the DVP 45 board The SY 355 board is included from the connector CN101 on the MB 1111 board CN1300 73 2252 22 4 5 6 L MB 1111 board DVP 45 board 2 6 5 9 Remove the four screws PSW2 5 and disconnect the SY 355 board from the connector CN2300 on the DVP 45 board SY 355 board 8 10 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps to 9 of removal PDW 700 V1 E SW 1391 Board Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the two screws PSW2 X 5 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1 and remove the SW 1391 board SW 1391 board
30. 0 75 0 5 0 25 0 0 25 0 5 0 75 1 IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed 99 Slow lt gt 99 Fast CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRIS detection level to 100 when the video signal of higher than 100 is input IRIS WINDOW 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR Selects the IRIS WINDOW detection range When VAR is selected the iris window can be set by the IRIS VAR WIDTH HEIGHT H POS V POS as described below IRIS WINDOW IND OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that checks the iris window with the box cursor IRIS VAR WIDTH 20 to 479 Sets width of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 269 Sets height of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW IRIS VAR H POS 460 to 459 2 Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW IRIS VAR V POS 250 to 249 2 Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW 1 The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown below Setting 1 20203101 82 0 83 Jj 24 85 8 VF screen Shaded area IRIS WINDOW frame 2 Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH HEIGHT setting 4 16 PDW 700 V1 E SHOT ID Display Setting SHOT ID Item ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 Setting 12 characters alphanumeric characters symbols and sp
31. 5 1 REC TIME 5SEC PRE LIGHTING OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF Item Setting TAKE TOTAL TIME See the right column REC TIME See the right column PRE LIGHTING OFF 2SEC 5SEC 10SEC Function Sets the total recording time of Auto Interval REC MIN minute H hour Setting value 5MIN 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN A40MIN 50MIN 1H 2H 3H A4H 5H 7H 10H 15H 20H 30H 40H 50H 70H 100H Sets the actual recording time of Auto Interval REC SEC second Setting value 5 10 15 20 30 40 5OSEC 1 to 85MIN Sets the automatic lighting on when Auto Interval REC is operating The lighting time in second before the start of recording is specified When M INT is selected in CACHE INTVAL REC 5 FUNCTION TOP 23CACHE INTVAL INT NUMBER OF FRAME 1 TRIGGER INTERVAL 1SEC PRE LIGHTING OFF DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF Item Setting NUMBER OF FRAME 1 3 6 Function Sets the number of frames to be recorded by one REC operation of Manual Interval REC TRIGGER INTERVAL See the right column Sets the interval time PRE LIGHTING OFF 2SE 5SEC 10SEC When is selected by pressing the REC SW a specified number of frames will be recorded When a time value is set being triggered by REC SW recording of a specified number of frames will be made after every elapse of that time Setting value M 1SEC to 10SEC 15SEC 20SEC 30SEC 40SEC 50SEC 1MIN to 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 40MIN 50MIN 1H to 6H 12H 24H
32. CN2 MB 1111 board Flexible card wire Harness MS 86 board 9 Bo6x5 MS bracket 9 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 7 15 25 Board and PS 708 Board 7 7 16 CN 3005 Board and SW 1426 Board 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the handle assembly Refer to Section 1 7 4 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 3 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1 on 4 Disconnect the harnesses from the four connectors the SW 1426 board CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 on the CNB 25 board 4 Remove the two screws B2 6 X 5 and remove the 5 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector SW 1426 board CN7 on the CNB 25 board 6 Remove the three screws B2 6 X 5 and disconnect Be careful not to drop the drop protection rubber the CNB 25 board The PS 708 board is included attached on the switch 7 Remove the screw B2 6 X 3 and disconnect the PS 708 board from the connector CN6 the CNB 25 board SW 1426 board 26 3 Du PS 708 board B2 6x5 5 Disconnect the harness DDOUTLGT from the connector CN4 on the CN 3005 board 6 Disconnect the harnesses from the three connectors CN3 CN5 CN6 on the CN 3005 board 7 Remove the two screws PSW2 X 5 and remove the C
33. DF NDF Sets DF NDF DF Drop frame mode NDF Non drop frame mode EXT LK DF NDF INT EXT Selects either internal setting or external setting for DF NDF INT Internal EXT External EXT LK UBIT INT EXT Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to INT or EXT source when the time code is locked to an external source INT Internal lock EXT External lock LTC UBIT FIX TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U BIT of LTC FIX Records the data that is set by user TIME Records the present time UBIT SD FIX TIME Sets the data to be recorded in U BIT of VITC FIX Records the data that is set by the user TIME Records the present time WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function to match the built in watch with the actual time data contained in the U BIT of external time code data UBIT GROUP ID 000 101 Selects the UBIT GROUP ID INS LINE 1 12H to 19H NTSC AREA Selects the line into which VITC is to be inserted to 22H PAL AREA INS LINE 2 12H to 19H NTSC AREA 9H to 22H PAL AREA 1 Displayed only when COUNTRY is set to NTSC J AREA or NTSC AREA 2 Displayed only when the CBKZ MD01 SD Record and Playback Software is installed PDW 700 V1 E 4 45 ESSENCE MARK Display Setting on essence mark M110ESSENCE MARK gt RET SHOT MARK 1 RET SHOT MARK 2 INDEX PIC POS FIND MODE Item Setting Function SHOT MARK 1 OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that r
34. OLO DG EXT VIEW EXT VIEW Signal Specifications No Signal 1 TX RCP DATA X OUT SERIAL DATA OUT 1 USB VBUS 2 TX RCP DATA Y OUT SERIAL DATA OUT 2 USB D 3 RX RCP DATA X IN SERIAL DATA IN 3 USB 4 RX RCP DATA Y IN SERIAL DATA IN 4 GND 5 VIDEO G GND for VIDEO 6 UNREG 12 V OUT 11Vto17V 7 UNREG GND GND for UNREG Uu NETWORK 8 VIDEO X OUT 1 0 V p p 20 750 CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND 8 1 MIC IN XLR 5 pin Female EXT VIEW No Signal Specifications 5 1 1 I O Transmitted data 4 E 2 TX I O Transmitted data O 3 O O 3 RX I O Received data EXT VIEW 4 No connection 0 dBu 0 775 V rms 9 7 No connection 6 Received data No Signal Specification 7 No connection t OO UENION 8 No connection 2 MIC1 IN X impedance balance g MIC1 IN Y 4 MIC2 IN X 5 MIC2 IN Y PDW 700 V1 E 1 23 1 5 On Board Switch and LED Function AT 177 board Ref No 5400 5501 5402 1 24 Bit A JOJN IN Io 1 54015402 5400 E Name Function Turns ON OFF the function to display the TOP menu ON display the TOP menu OFF Not to display the TOP menu Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory use Service mode setting ON Service mode The SERVICE menu is displayed OFF Normal mode Disables displaying SERVICE menu by Method 2 in 4 1 2 How to
35. PD 118 board LCD cover LCD hinge Back hinge cover Harness 1 43 1 8 3 LCD Backlight and LCD Panel 1 Remove the LCD block Refer to Section 1 8 1 2 Remove the four screws a M2 X 3 and remove the LCD cover 3 Remove the two screws b M2 X 3 4 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1 on the PD 118 board and remove the LCD hinge 5 Disconnect the flexible card wire of the LCD panel from the connector on the PD 118 board 6 Release the six claws on the LCD bezel to remove the LCD frame 7 Remove the LCD panel from the LCD bezel 8 Disconnect the flexible card wire of the LCD backlight from the connector CN3 on the PD 118 board 9 Remove the two screws M2 X 3 10 Release the hooks on the PD 118 board from the LCD backlight to remove the PD 118 board 11 Remove the three screws d M1 7 X 2 5 12 Release the claws on the LCD backlight from the LCD frame to remove the LCD backlight 1 44 PD 118 board LCD frame LCD frame LCD frame LCD backlight PDW 700 V1 E 1 9 Replacing the Flat Cables Flexible Card Wires Boards The flat cables flexible card wires and boards are used to connect between the following boards Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if it is folded Be very careful not to fold the flat cables flexible card wires and boards The six types of different shape connectors are used in this unit Because the direction
36. SONY PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER PDW 700 HD SD SDI INPUT BOARD CBK HDO1 ANALOG COMPOSITE INPUT BOARD 02 Power lt str Professional Disc Memory STICK w MAINTENANCE MANUAL Volume 1 1st Edition Revised 2 serial No 10001 and Higher es Neh ERTS ERB PKR fal 2 SISTED CBAC ESV A WARNING This manual is intended for qualified service personnel only To reduce the risk of electric shock fire or injury do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel A WARNUNG Die Anleitung ist nur f r qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt Alle Wartungsarbeiten d rfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgef hrt werden Um die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden sind bei Wartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen Andere als die angegeben Wartungsarbeiten d rfen nur von Personen ausgef hrt werden die eine spezielle Bef higung dazu besitzen AVERTISSEMENT Ce manual est destin uniquement aux personnes comp tentes en charge de l entretien Afin de r duire les risques de d charge lectrique d incendie ou de blessure n effectuer que les r parations indiqu es dans le mode d emploi moins d tre qualifi pour en
37. gt lt L such as brightness and contrast can be set This informa tion is saved in the LCD PD 118 board nonvolatile memory and the FP 157 board IC913 nonvolatile memo ry Rotation is detected by the rotation sensor switch in DET 45 after passing through CN802 Opening and closing is detected from the hole terminal H801 on the FP 157 board and the field intensity from the permanent magnet neodymium Ne FeB 18 Nonvolatile memory control IC907 on the FP 157 board is nonvolatile memory that supports the I2C bus This memory stores system information such as the A D and D A error compensation values and color LCD settings During POWER ON this information is sent to ITRON CPU and the color LCD device 19 Monochrome LCD display circuit with backlight FP CPU and IC806 UPD7225GB are connected by 500 KHz serial communication port IC806 is an LCD controller driver that is programmable with software 800 displays the BATTERY value DISC capacity time and counter value on the monochrome LCD at three hour intervals FP H AUOUT ON FP H AUIN ON B3 B4 CNB 25 board Monitor OUT 34 board _ lt REAR 1 3 0 4 dB standard ATT RX 101 board Audio Power Save Block PDW 700 V1 E 041405 Wa sAs oipny ein N opiny H299 QXO QXL M2S 33O NO d31 qo Tuo 109 oejesguiooHpeeH j ejegjeuDis o3u02 Olanv goseccz adn aoi wa AS
38. the 100 effective picture elements area 1 The CENTER MARKER is displayed as shown below Setting 4 VF screen 2 This item is ignored when the recording format is 1 50 40 30 or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4 3 3 The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to the viewfinder When or B is selected for the TEST OUT SELECT item in the menu the masked video signal is output to the TEST OUT connector ASPECT MASK is ignored for displays in the viewfinder when the following are true e TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to HD Y and cable is connected to the TEST OUT connector e TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page is set to HD Y and TEST OUT SAVE on the POWER SAVE page is set to OFF PDW 700 V1 E 4 13 MARKER 2 Display Setting the MARKER related items O130MARKER 2 gt USER BOX 4 O 70 OAT F 0 5 O 0 O OO Setting Function USER BOX OFF ON Turns ON OFF the BOX cursor display USER BOX WIDTH 3 to 479 Sets the horizontal width of the BOX cursor USER BOX HEIGHT 3 to 269 Sets the vertical width of the BOX cursor USER BOX H POS 477 to 476 Sets the BOX cursor center position horizontal position USER BOX V POS 267 to 266 Sets the BOX cursor center position vertical position CENTER POS 480 to 479 Sets the CENTER MARKER position horizontal position CENTER V POS 270 to 269 Sets the CENTER MARKER position
39. 1 2 H Driver On the other hand the CCD output signals are amplified approximately two times and input to IC10 The video signal is drawn by the co rel ated dual sampling inside 1 10 and GAIN UP of 0 to 12 dB is performed by the internal GAIN AMP In addition the differences in the CCD sensitivity are adjusted by adjusting GAIN In addition to the above operations the temperature that is detected by the temperature sensor 1 4 is converted to the voltage data and is sent to the AT 177 board via the DCP 44 board TG 260 board The pulses that drive the CCD imagers and the pulses that are used for sample and hold of the CCD output signals PDW 700 V1 E are generated by IC8 and are sent to the DR 617 board These pulses are generated from the 74 MHz clock in synchronization with the HD VD signal input from the DCP 44 board In addition the TG 260 board has an interface circuit with the optical filter DR 617 board The CCD drive pulses input from the TG 260 board and the sample and hold pulse are latched and output to the PA 342 PA 342A PA 343 PA 343A PA 344 boards In addition the DR 617 board has the V driver of CCD The CCD V sub voltage and CCD sensitivity adjustment data are recorded in the EEPROM IC20 1 2 3 Video Signal System DVP 45 board 1 Baseband Video signal processing system Recording system The component parallel digital video signal supplied from the video circuit of the DCP 44 board is input to L
40. Do not turn the two screws that secure the sub shaft 5 Pull out the parallel pin 6 Press the die casting part or the connector of the optical block assembly and check the following The optical block assembly moves smoothly The OP rack assembly and the No 3 gear assembly are not disengaged 7 Install the OP position sensor with three screws in the order of the numbers in the figure Tightening torque 10 x 10 0 01 Nem 1 0 0 1 kgf cm 8 Connect the flexible card wire to the connec tor on the optical block assembly 9 Perform the optical drive adjustment Refer to Section 8 10 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 1 7 1 6 Replacing No 2 No 3 Gear Assemblies To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed Fixtures Parallel pin 2 X 20 2 Stopper washer 2 Removal 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Sect
41. LNO var 1 c 596 VOd JOHGAUOQ VICI 1 SOLIMS ASt LNO L GSG6 VOd 29969 8 L691 1 1 2 066 608 281 85901L009M L o6so 5 uedo c LAY MS NI oipny a V LS3ud HOIH N MO1 44 I JAVS A8IS NNAW OF t JOUOD MG 12995 UI 1 1 saa 1 L6EL MS 2 10 1 E CERAS sng NU EE MS MRH po9S6Ovd ZL60l 8 cdv90H prem is Msuoluy L TOHLNOO fido c8 ON3 we 2 066 sna ol PEEL SEEMS _ 0 1 1 INOHd33 JON 1 10130 81 9211 ws i Lvy L3d g8Sc08xd I yoo gewl P9H T A O euluJe jouueyd N L343 SOMW ih 4 E MS 133 LOOE NO 1 1 04409 NIVO dIAV OIIN c9 L VIN A t Sngs oel vy S8S86 vOd Att A t LNO 8886 VOd 1 11 PDW 700 V1 E 1 2 5 Digital Audio System DVP 45 board 1 Audio signal processing system lt Recording system gt The analog audio signal input from the AUDIO IN connector is converted into a serial digital audio signal two channels with the AUDIO A D converter on the FP 157 board The digital audio signal enters CAVA 1 200 of the DVP 45 board through the MB 1111 board The serial d
42. No Offset Depends on the Lens Depends on the Lens Depends on the Lens O 2 E x o0j0lo000 Jo0j 000 0 O0jO 0 0 0 0 O 0 O JOJO OJ O O OJO O O OJ O O OJ 9 0 SCN X 2 a LENS STD Power OFF SVC KT KL KEK LK LK X X o 0 4 109 OPERATION Menu 5 5 No 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 4 110 Page FORMAT SOURCE SEL UMID SET CLIP TITLE FILE NAMING SELECT FUNCTION MEMORY REC Setup Item SYSTEM LINE F SET ALL Default setting X SYSTEM FREQUENCY Default setting X SCAN MODE REC FORMAT ASPECT RATIO SD AU DATA LEN IMX COUNTRY FRONT MIC SELECT REC VIDEO SOURCE EXT VIDEO SOURCE WIDE MODE EXT SETUP REMOVE COUNTRY CODE ORGANIZATION USER CODE TIME ZONE TITLE SELECT PREFIX CLEAR MUNERIC LOAD PREFIX DATA PREFIX NUMERIC NAMING FORM AUTO NAMING LETTER BOX FOCUS MAG MEMORY REC COPY CURRENT CLP COPY ALL CLIPS ABORT COPY DEL ALL MEM CLP FORMAT MEMORY This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to
43. PRST e OUTPUT DCC switch inside panel CAM ON e MENU VF DISP display Adjustment Procedure 1 AUTO W B BAL switch front panel BLK Hold this switch in BLK state until the message BLACK SET on the viewfinder is displayed twice 2 Afew seconds later after releasing the switch check that the message OK is displayed on the viewfinder PDW 700 V1 E 9 2 3 VA Gain Adjustment 4 Set the waveform monitor to the CHROMA mode 5 Equipment Waveform monitor Test point TEST OUT connector Use an 89 9 reflective chart in this adjustment as Adj point MENU SERVICE possible For details refer to 9 1 5 Gray Scale Chart PAGE CCD ADJUST and its Maintenance ITEM R CCD GAIN e f the 16 9 chart is not available shoot a 4 3 chart so ITEM B CCD GAIN that the chart width is aligned with the underscanned Spec Minimize carrier leakage C by using the monitor frame variable resistors alternately Fixtures and Equipment Oscilloscope SD waveform monitor e Grayscale chart 16 9 Preparation L Connect an SD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector OUTPUT DCC switch inside panel gt gt WHITE BAL switch inside panel PRST x Shoot a grayscale chart 16 9 in the full underscanned monitor frame Setting after Adjustment On the menu set as follows Adjustment Procedure MENU PAINT 1 AUTO W B BAL switch front panel gt BLK PAGE SW STATUS Perfor
44. Refer to Section 7 1 9 Disconnect the connector CN1 on the SW 1385 board Remove the screw and disengage the SW B2 x 4 GE SW 1385 board 1385 board from the claws of the release lock assembly base Remove the two screws and remove the LD motor sub assembly LD motor assembly Release lock assembly Screw B2 x 4 Tightening torque 15 x 10 2 0 01 Nem 1 5 0 1 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 10 Release lock assembly base Align the protruded portion of the release d Helease gear gear with the claw on the release lock assembly base to install the LD motor sub assembly Protrude LD motor sub assembly 7 2 Removing Reinstalling Mounted Circuit Board of the Optical Drive 7 2 1 SE 709 Board Removal 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Disengage the two claws and remove the harness cover 7 Turn the gear A in the arrow direction to move the SE 709 board fixing screw to under the hole of the loader assembly Note This step is not necessary when the cartridge has been ejected normally 8
45. Status Display only Success Displayed when the user password is changed Error Displayed when an unusable character is used in the password or the verify password is conflict Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished Procedure 1 Enter the new password in the Password box and Verify Password box Pressing Reset clears the Input window 2 Press Execute to change the password PDW 700 V1 E 2 13 2 4 3 Network The network related settings can be changed on the Network page of the Maintenance menu The function is the same as that of the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu on the camcorder E Sony XDCAM Microso ft Internet Explorer Zr4M D 8350 RTV YMD APH O O RAO komm 62 3 m Lf as PELAGO http 192168 1 10 index cei o Google G vGo 6 Q Bookmarksv 57 Check X AutoLink v GA v Send tow Settings v L7 XDCAM Status Network Device Information Hours Meter Hostname PDW 700 5N10001 Domain Software Version IP Address 192 168 1 10 Disc Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Disc Properties E Default Gateway Thumbnails DNS1 DNS2 Maintenance DHCP Disable Disable v MAC Address 00 13 49 68 08 Account Software Update Link Speed 100 Mbps Auto
46. and press the MENU knob 14 The tangential skew adjustment result appears When ERROR appears press the MENU knob to make adjustment from step 6 TAN ADJUST CHECKING OK PDW 700 V1 E 8 4 2 Radial Skew Adjustment This adjustment is made automatically You need not adjust radial skew using the adjustment screw as shown in the previous adjustment item 1 Perform steps 1 to 5 in 8 4 1 Tangential Skew Adjustment 2 Select RAD ADJUST by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob DRIVE MAINTENANCE ADJUST SKE A confirmation screen appears 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob RAD ADJUST ADJUST START YES NO The result appears RAD ADJUST ADJUSTING COMPLETED In case of error The defect in the optical block assembly is thought RAD ADJUST ADJUSTING FAILED PDW 700 V1 E When OK appears press the MENU switch Note If failed the optical block assembly may be defective Press the MENU switch again The ADJUST screen appears Remove the cartridge and the weight Apply locking compound to the screw shown in the figure Note Apply the locking compound to the screw as shown in the figure being careful not to put it over the head of the screw Tangential IN adjustment screw Locking compound 8 5 8 5 Servo2 Automatic Adjustment This adjustment is not available when the loader
47. by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob SA ACTUATOR CHECK START YES NO The result appears SA ACTUATOR CHECKING If failed The following screen appears The harness may be connected improperly or the optical block may be defective SA ACTUATOR CHECKING ERROR PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 14 LASER 4 10 15 ND FILTER This menu allows to check the laser This menu allows you to check the ND filter Menu hierarchy Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK CHECK OPTICAL BLOCK OPTICAL BLOCK LASER ND FILTER 1 confirmation screen appears 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob the MENU knob ND FILTER CHECK START CHECK START YES YES NO NO A screen to insert a cartridge appears The result appears LASER ND FILTER INSERT DISC CHECKING OK 3 Insert a cartridge If failed The result appears The following screen appears LASER ND FILTER CHECKING CHECKING ERROR If failed The following screen appears LASER CHECKING ERROR PDW 700 V1 E 4 95 4 10 16 SKEW 4 Insert the alignment disc 5 Press the MENU knob This menu allows you to check the skew The result appears SKEW Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKING OK CHECK SK
48. coal U knob Note When NO is selected the data adjusted this time becomes invalid and the previous adjustment value becomes valid Press down the MENU ESCAPE switch when the adjustment is complete Turn off the power of this equipment once and back on again The error is corrected 4 102 4 13 AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation Before starting adjustment refer to 9 1 Preparation Fixtures and Equipment For more details refer to 1 10 2 Measuring Equipment Signal generator Adjustment Procedure L Input the sine wave of 4 dBu of 1 kHz to the AUDIO IN CHI connector and CH2 connector the rear Align the LEVEL knobs of CH1 and CH2 to the position one scale left of the mechanical center position Execute AU SIDE VOL ADJ of the VDR MAINTE NANCE page of the SERVICE menu AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJUST ADJUST START YES NO Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJUST ADJUST COMPLETE DATA DATA CH1 OK CH2 OK Press down the MENU ESCAPE switch when the adjustment is complete Turn off the power of this equipment once and back on again The error is corrected Note If the adjustment result screen shows execute the adjustment from step 3 again When reap pears replace the variable resister RV1 or RV2 on the FP 157 board of the LEVEL knob PDW 700 V1 E 4 14 Adjusting Battery End Detection
49. or in the stereo mode or to turn it off AU AGC SPEC 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB Sets the AGC characteristics saturation level 15 dB 17 dB AU LIMITER MODE OFF 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB Sets the limiter characteristics saturation level for large 15 dB 17 dB input signals during the manual adjustment of the audio input level AU OUT LIMITER OFF ON Turns ON OFF the audio output limiter Displayed only when REC FORMAT is set to IMX50 40 30 4 42 PDW 700 V1 E AUDIO 3 Display Setting 3 on audio 10 3 1 2 gt AU SG Item AU SG 1 KHz MIC CH1 LEVEL MIC CH2 LEVEL REAR1 WRR LEVEL REAR2 WRR LEVEL AUDIO CH3 LEVEL AUDIO CH4 LEVEL PDW 700 V1 E Setting ON OFF AUTO SIDE1 FRONT F S1 SIDE2 FRONT F S2 SIDE1 FRONT F S1 SIDE2 FRONT F S2 FIX FRONT FIX FRONT Function Sets whether to output the 1 kHz test tone during the COLOR BAR mode or ON 1 kHz test tone is output during the COLOR BAR mode OFF 1 kHz test tone is not output during the COLOR BAR mode AUTO 1 kHz test tone is output only when the CH1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position Selects any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone L CH SIDE1 Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob left side on the side panel FRONT Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel 1 Itcan be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob left side or the MIC LEVEL knob Select
50. symbols and space Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item ALL PRESET STORE ALL PRESET CLEAR ALL PRESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item 3SEC CLR PRESET OFF ON NETWORK DATA OFF ON File selection display 001 002 003 004 005 ALL FILE LOAD Function Reads the ALL file from a Memory Stick For the description of the file selection display see below Saves the ALL file in a Memory Stick For the description of the file selection display see below Sets the file ID When ALL FILE SAVE is execute this name is saved Returns all the data of all menu items to the standard settings Saves all the data that are set by all of the menu items in the PRESET ESCAPE layer and uses them as the standard setups Returns the settings of all menu items to the default setting when shipped from the factory Turns ON OFF the function that returns the data in the PRESET layer to its factory set value when the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch is pressed for 3 seconds It returns to OFF at power on even when having been turned ON Selects whether or not to read in the network related data O lt Dr OOOOO U OOOOO mr O ALL FILE SAVE Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the fil
51. 09 22 13 38 39 C 95 503 PDW 700 V1 E Clearing Error Log L 2 2 Display the error log list Select CLEAR ERROR LOG by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob ERROR LOGGER EAR ERROR LOG A confirmation screen appears Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob CLEAR ERROR LOG ARE YOU SURE YES NO The result appears CLEAR ERROR LOG EXECUTING COMPLETED If failed The following screen appears CLEAR ERROR LOG EXECUTING FAILED 4 99 4 10 23 VERSION This menu displays the version of optical drive Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE OTHERS VERSION VERSION 4 10 24 SERIAL NO This menu displays the serial number of the optical drive Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE OTHERS SERIAL NO SERIAL NO NO 0000106 4 10 25 CLEAR MEDIA LOG This menu allows you to delete the log of media Refer to 8 6 Cleaning Media Log for details Once deleted the deleted log cannot be restored Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE OTHERS CLEAR MEDIA LOG 4 100 4 10 26 UPLOAD TO EEPROM This menu allows you to update the EEPROM IC4 information backed up on the SE 857 board when only C4 A Note When replacing the SE 857 board remove the EEPROM IC4 from the board and then mount it on the new board This menu is not necessary Execute this menu only when IC
52. 1 803 353 21 0 14 20 CNB 25 THP1 B1 B side A 1 802 063 21 1 10 20 THP2 1 side A 1 802 063 21 1 10 20 PDW 700 V1 E 1 12 8 Precautions for Use of Condensation Sensor Due to the foreign substances adhering to the condensation sensor chip see figure below the sensor fails to measure the correct value of residence to humidity This prevents the unit from functioning properly If any foreign sub stance gets adhered to the chip replace the condensation sensor with a new one Do not touch the chip with bare hands Do not clean the chip with alcohol or other similar agents Solders Connector Bracket Condensation Leads sensor chip 1 12 9 Precautions for the Battery Connector The battery connector in this unit is consumable parts Replace every about 5 years If the terminal of connector is deformed or bends due to vibrations or shock or if the surface of the terminal corrodes due to long term outside use or other similar use the unit may malfunction Replace the battery connector immediately if the terminal is deformed or bends or if the surface color changes Refer to Section 1 7 10 PDW 700 V1 E 1 12 10 Notes on Repair Parts 1 Safety Related Components Warning Components marked are critical to safe operation Therefore specified parts should be used in the case of replacement 2 Standardization of Parts Some repair parts supplied by Sony differ from those us
53. 2 connector OFF No output signal HDSDI HD SDI signal SDSDI SD SDI signal Turns ON OFF the superimposed information output from the SDI OUT 2 connector Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector When R G B is selected turning the power ON OFF changes the setting to Y Turns ON OFF the superimposed information output from the TEST OUT connector When R G B 15 selected turning the power of the unit off and on changes the setting to Y e When TEST OUT SELECT is set to Y R G B the character information is displayed regardless of the setting The character information can be hidden by switching this item from ON to OFF while the character information 1 displayed The view finder is also hidden When TEST OUT SELECT is set to LCD the character information is displayed or hidden according to the display mode selected with the DISPSEL EXPAND button 4 4 PDW 700 V1 E OUTPUT 2 Display Setting the Output signal 200UTPUT2 gt LIVE amp PLAY DOWN CON MODE WIDE ID Item LIVE amp PLAY DOWN CON MODE WIDE ID Setting OFF ON CROP LETTR SQEZE THROU AUTO Function Enables to view camera video in the viewfinder during playback from the disc OFF Do not display camera video in the viewfinder during disc playback ON Output camera video to the viewfinder even during disc playback Selects the aspect ratio for down conversion SQEZE Squeeze Converting the 16 9 HD video sign
54. 44 board and detach the cables from the three hooks and the notch on the MB 1111 board Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN3 on the CI 37 board Remove the six screws B3 X 8 and remove the rear panel assembly 1 7 10 Battery Connector oS Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 Remove the connector panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 8 Remove the rear panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 9 Remove the four precision screws B2 6 X 5 and remove the battery harness assembly Note Be careful that the harness should not be caught or damaged by any other part 1 40 Z oy dp Ne 2 all DCP 44 board CN13 J Coaxial cables Hooks Notch MB 1111 board Rear panel assembly Flexible card wire Precision screws P2 6 x 5 TYPE1 PDW 700 V1 E 1 8 Removing Installing LCD Block 1 8 1 LCD Block 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the two knobs A 3 Open the SW door and remove the two knobs 4 Remove the LCD harness holder 5 Disconnect the harness from the six connectors CN700 CN701 CN702 CN703 CN802 CN850 on the FP 157 board 6 Remove the nine screws PSW2 5 and remove the FP 157 board Note After removing the FP 157 board be careful not to drop the unfi
55. 45 board s IC1000 1 1200 IC1400 version stored in the ROM 1C505 IC506 on the SY 355 Displays the DVP 45 board s IC1000 IC1200 IC1400 version stored in the ROM 1C505 IC506 on the SY 355 Displays the IC209 version stored the ROM IC302 IC303 on the AT 177 Displays the ROM version of the IC921 on the FP 157 Displays the ROM version of the IC1000 on the DCP 44 board Displays the SY 355 board s IC600 version stored the ROM IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the ROM version of the IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 board PDW 700 V1 E 2 3 Disc Menu 2 3 1 Disc Properties The information on the disc inserted in the camcorder can be checked on the Disc Properties page of the Disc menu For details refer to Operation manual Sony XDCAM Microsoft Internet Explorer Leni ERDO RTD BAIANA 9 0 Os O AAO 8 5 18 PELAWD http 192168110 Disc Properties User Disc ID Total DUR Remain Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation 2 3 2 Thumbnails The thumbnails and properties of the clips on the disc inserted in the camcorder can be checked on the Thumbnails page of the Disc menu For details refer to Operation manual A Sony XDCAM Microsoft Internet Explorer im 2 Sony XDCAM Microsoft Internet Explorer REO RTA BALAN 97 10 APH REO RTA BALANGA Y I APH O O
56. 5 86 1 2 157 1 107 3005 1 1 DCP 44 1C1119 VF IO in each VF OK NG message is displayed OK Normal NG Abnormal The state is not defined D A Status display of DCP1 DCP2 DCP3 DCP 44 1C 1524 DCP 44 1C 1518 DCP 44 1C1525 EEPROM Status display of CN DCP DR CN 3005 IC2 DCP 44 1C8 DR 617 1C20 FRAM Status display of AT 177 1 308 FAN Status display of MB LSI Status display of DCP1 DCP2 DCP3 DCP4 TG DCP 44 1C600 DCP 44 IC800 DCP 44 1C221 DCP 44 IC 1000 TG 260 1C8 SCI Status display of SY RM 4 67 OPTION Display Displaying the option feature gt DO7OOPTION HD SD SD O COMPOSITE O SD REC amp 24 REC amp P Item HD SD SDI INPUT COMPOSITE INPUT SD REC amp PB 24P REC amp PB 4 68 Setting Display only Display only Display only Display only Function appears when the optional 01 HD SD SDI Input Board is installed appears when the optional 5 02 Analog Composite Input Board is installed appears when the optional 7 1 SD Record and Playback Software is installed appears when the optional 7 1 23 98P Record and Playback Software is installed PDW 700 V1 E 4 9 SERVICE Menu When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis in the setting column the setup value is the relative value The range of setting in parenthesis can be different from what shown in
57. 5 pin XLR connector The output level can be selected as 3 dBu 0 dBu or 4 dBu from the menu 6 Monitor amp Composed of the monaural amp for the front earphone and stereo amp for the rear earphone the volume control is A D OUT CH384 24bit A D OUT CH1 amp 2 24bit Left Justified 24bit Data D A IN CH384 24bit D A IN CH1 amp 2 24bit Left Justified 24bit Data l l E 32bit performed with the operational amp with electronic volume NJM2172 7 Rearinput The rear input is composed of the following a switch for Line In AES EBU and MIC IN 48 ON OFF SW automatic detection circuit DET 47 board for the 3 pin input XLR connector and the microphone amp 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB Gain switching can be performed from the menu 60 dBu 50 dBu 40 dBu Line In input level setting can be switched to 4 dBu dBu or 3 dBu with the slide switch on the AXM 38 board Open the inside panel Operation description After the power to the device is turned on each port in the FP 157 board CPU is initialized the necessary resistor data is set and MUTE is cancelled After approximately 3 seconds the digital EE sound can be monitored The front mic signal passes through the MA 162 board and MB 1111 board before entering the input signal selector analog switch to ICA of the FP157 board The rear input signal passes through the AXM 38 board CNB 25 board and MB 1
58. ALL FILE Refer to 4 16 Setup Menu List for the items of object ALL ALL FILE object items PRESET ALL PRESET object items 1 Returning the items in the ALL file to the preset value ALL PRESET When executing ALL PRESET on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 the ALL FILE items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE and FILE are returned to the default values OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION po NANCE USER layer PRESET layer FACTORY layer Executing ALL PRESET Copy the data stored in the PRESET layer of the ALL PRESET object items to the USER layer Setting the preset values of the ALL PRESET object items STORE ALL PRESET When executing STORE ALL PRESET on the ALL FILE page under FILE menu page 3 the ALL FILE items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE and FILE are saved as the default values d OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION PAINT NANCE USER layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing STORE ALL PRESET Copy the data stored in the USER layer of the ALL PRESET object items to the PRESET layer PDW 700 V1 E 5 5 3 5 6 Clearing the preset value of ALL PRESET object items CLEAR ALL PRESET When executing CLEAR ALL PRESET on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 the value of the ALL FILE items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT MAINTE
59. B output signal BRIGHT with reference to the G output signal Adjusts the color LCD contrast displayed in normal position Function Adjusts the R flare compensation level Adjusts the G flare compensation level Adjusts the B flare compensation level Turns ON OFF the flare compensation circuit Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector PDW 700 V1 E GAMMA DETAIL S130GAMMA DETAIL R GAMMA gt G GAMMA B GAMMA DETAIL LEVEL Item R GAMMA G GAMMA B GAMMA DETAIL LEVEL MANUAL RPN 140MANUAL RPN TEST OUT SELECT Item TEST OUT SELECT RPN CURSOR SUPER MENU RPN WIDTH CURSOR H POS CURSOR V POS CURSOR JUMP RECORD RPN DELETE RPN PDW 700 V1 E Setting 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 4 O 5 1 0 O R C C VB OF OF 96 54 UR XE XE Setting VBS Y R G B LCD OFF ON OFF ON 0 1 2 3 4 37 to 1966 34 to 1118 PREV CURR NEXT Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Function Offsets PAINT GAMMA R Offsets PAINT GAMMA G Offsets PAINT GAMMA B Offsets PAINT DETAIL1 DETAIL LEVEL Function Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector Controls ON OFF of the RPN cursor Turns ON OFF the character information output Superimpose of the TEST OUT connector Sets the RPN correction width Sets position of the RPN cursor horizontal Sets position of the RP
60. Cleaner Assembly The Cleaner assembly requires periodic check Refer to 6 1 Periodic Check Replacement Parts List for details To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Remove the screw and remove the cleaner assembly e Be careful not to deform the loader assem Special screw bly 2 2 Cleaner assembly Take care so that the CL spring does not Loader assembly come off 7 While pressing portion A on the back of the loader assembly with fingers remove the screw to remove the cleaner assembly When installing take care so that the CL Support
61. Clip continuous rec function ON OFF Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu Assigns no function Assigns the function to switch stereo and monaural when the stereo microphone is connected Assigns the function to execute picture cache recording Assigns the function of a switch to select mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT connector when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON Assigns the ON OFF function to display all markers Switches the recording target video between the video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device VBS or SD SDI HD SDI Assigns the zebra pattern display function to the switch Assigns the function that mixes a still picture monochrome and camera video color effective for framing shots Assigns the function that electronically magnifies the central part of the picture All video output is magnified including recorded video Clip continuous rec function ON OFF Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu ZOOM SPEED function ON OFF RETURN VIDEO function ON OFF 2 Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers 3 The optional 5 02 Analog Composite Input Board is required for VBS signal input The optional CB
62. E Setup Item VF DISP VF DISP MODE DISP EXTENDER DISP FILTER DISP WHITE DISP GAIN DISP SHUTTER DISP AUDIO DISP DISC DISP IRIS DISP ZOOM DISP COLOR TEMP DISP BATT REMAIN DISP DC IN DISP 16 9 4 3 ID DISP WRR RF LVL DISP REC FORMAT DISP CLIP NO PB DISP TIME CODE DISP ALAC LOW LIGHT LOW LIGHT LEVEL VF BATT WARNING ABSOLUTE VALUE GAIN lt gt SHUTTER lt gt WHT PRESET lt gt ATW RUN lt gt EXTENDER lt FILTER lt gt OVERRIDE lt MARKER CENTER CENTER MARK SAFETY ZONE SAFETY AREA ASPECT ASPECT SELECT ASPECT MASK ASPECT MASK LVL 100 MARKER gt gt F SET ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF INT OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 10 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 90 OFF 4 3 ON 12 OFF ALL PRST 0 10 10 010 010 0 10 10 01010 01 10 10 0 0 010 0 010 010 10 010 1010 0 01010 01 10 0 0 010 SCN KEK LK LK LK LK EK LK KT K X JJ H X LENS STD Power OFF SVC X X KEK EK LK
63. FAN MOTOR 1 A confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob FAN MOTOR CHECK START YES NO The result appears FAN MOTOR CHECKING OK If failed The following screen appears FAN MOTOR CHECKING ERROR PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 5 ACCELERATION SENSOR A confirmation screen appears 3 Check that the unit is placed horizontally and press This menu allows you to check the acceleration sensor on the MENU knob the optical drive Be sure to place the unit horizontally with the outside ACCELERATION SENSOR PLACE DRIVE panel facing upward as shown in the figure when checking HORIZONTALLY ARE YOU SURE The check may be failed if the optical drive is incorrectly YES placed NO Preparation When the optical drive is detected as horizontal the 1 Place the unit with the outside panel facing upward as following screen appears shown in the figure 2 Connect the component cable to the TEST OUT connector and the monitor CHECKING 3 Select VIDEO OUT MENU from VIDEO OUT A page in the OPERATION menu The menu appears on the connected monitor ACCELERATION SENSOR Component cable If failed TEST OUT Outside panel The following screen appears Check optical drive posture and sensor installation Note CHECKING Disconnection check result SENSOR POSTURE SENSOR POSTURE check result If the disconnection check
64. Lens mount 6 Attach the filter knob with the setscrew while adjusting the knob using the following steps Front panel 1 Shift the lens mount holder to the position shown WP3 x 3 H in the figure 2 Move the lever in the arrow direction and remove Knob shaft the mount cap Do not touch the filter while the mount cap is removed 7 Attach the front panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 5 8 Attach the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 9 Attach the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Filter knob When a new CCD unit is installed camera adjustment is required Refer to Section 7 6 7 26 PDW 700 V1 E 7 6 Service Action After Replacing the 7 Confirm that the screen returns to the ALL FILE CCD Unit display and the message COMPLETE appears indicating that the saving is complete This section describes the required actions for replacing the CCD unit Service Action after replacement 1 Reset them using the SERVICE menu Refer to 4 9 SERVICE Menu for the details on Save the settings of the menu contents in the Memory SERVICE menus Stick before performing the actions after replacement 1 Open the switch cover with the power of the main unit Saving menu settings turned on and turn on the MENU ON OFF switch Save the menu settings in a Memory Stick The menu appears on the viewfinder screen regardless Pp 5 OPERA MAINTE of the ON OFF state o
65. MATRIX USER 99 to 99 99 to 99 Sets the B R user set matrix coefficients Sets the B G user set matrix coefficients MTX MULTI Display Setting multi matrix Function Turns ON OFF the linear matrix and multi matrix correction functions 2 MULTI TOP gt MATRIX OFF MATRIX MULT I OFF MATRIX AREA IND OFF MATRIX COLOR DET EXEC MTX MULTI PRESET EXEC MTX MULTI AXIS B MTX MULTI HUE 0 MTX MULTI SAT O Item Setting MATRIX OFF ON MATRIX MULTI OFF ON MTRIX AREA IND OFF ON Turns ON OFF the multi matrix function Turns ON OFF the function that shows the zebra pattern indicating the detecting region of the multi matrix correction inside VF MTRIX COLOR DET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob Automatic color detection function Move the cursor to the desired object color and press the MENU knob Then the MTX MULTI AXIS will be set automatically Return MTX MULTI HUE and MTX MULTI SAT values to preset values MTX MULTI PRESET MTX MULTI AXIS to execute this menu item B B MG MG MG for each of the 16 axes Sets the chroma phase for the sixteen axes that are the target of the multi MTX MULTI HUE R R YL YL G G G CY CY B 99 to 99 matrix correction function Adjusts the chroma phase HUE of the multi matrix correction MTX MULTI SAT 99 to 99 every sixteen a
66. NANCE and FILE are initialized to the factory default value OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION i222 NANCE PILE USER layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing CLEAR ALL PRESET Copy the data stored in the SERVICE layer of the ALL PRESET object items to the USER and PRESET layers 1 As the users will use the values set in the service mode as the factory default value be sure to handle the setup values with care in the service mode Saving the setups of the ALL FILE object items in the memory stick ALL FILE SAVE When executing ALL FILE SAVE on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 F03 the data of the USER and PRESET layers of ALL FILE object items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE and FILE are saved to the memory stick as ALL FILE OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION 12 i USER layer mee PRESET layer Memory stick SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing ALL FILE SAVE Save the data of the USER and PRESET layers of the ALL FILE object items in the memory stick Calling the ALL FILE saved in the memory stick ALL FILE LOAD When executing ALL FILE LOAD on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 ALL FILE stored in the memory stick are called to the USER layer and the PRESET layer of the ALL FILE object items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE and FILE OPERA MAINTE D
67. Noise of CCD is usually corrected automatically APR during automatic black balance adjustment ABB When there exists RPN that is not corrected by APR perform this adjustment This adjustment is performed on the MANUAL RPN screen or the MANUAL RPN SLS page in the SERVICE menu Adjustment is performed using the MANUAL RPN page usually but perform the RPN adjustment using the MANUAL RPN SLS page for the RPN that appears only in slow shutter mode when SLS 2 FRAME or more is selected Procedure is the same as that when using the MANUAL RPN page Fixtures and Equipment Color monitor Preparation Connect an HD color monitor to the TEST OUT connec tor This is the setting for the RPN adjustment that appears only in slow shutter mode SHUTTER switch front panel SLS 2 FRAME more On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE MANUAL RPN Standard adjustment Or PAGE MANUAL RPN SLS For the RPN adjustment that appears only in slow shutter mode PDW 700 V1 E Adjustment Procedure the adjustments are to be performed using the MANUAL RPN page or the MANUAL RPN SLS page on the SERVICE menu 1 AUTO W B BAL switch front panel gt gt BLK Perform the automatic black balance adjustment 2 Choose the channel R G or B to be corrected ITEM TEST OUT SELECT 5 B This sets TEST OUT to output R G or B in HD 3 Adjust the values of H and V Then move the center of the cros
68. PCI bus as the MXF file data 3 Sync signal system The reference signal is always the 24 576 MHz clock entered from the DCP 44 board whether recording or playing back This reference clock is divided and timing signal for 256 FS 64 FS and FS audio processing is generated 1 2 6 Audio System Block structure Front microphone amp MA 162 board Input signal selector FP 157 board A D circuit CH1 amp 2 FP 157 board A D circuit CH3 amp 4 FP 157 board D A circuit FP 157 board Final amp CNB 25 board FP 157 board AXM 38 board DVP 45 board Monitor amp Rear input DPS operation processing PDW 700 V1 E 1 Front microphone amp The front microphone amp on the MA 162 board comes with a gain switch 30 dB 20 dB 10 dB Gain switching can be performed from the menu 60 dBu 50 dBu 40 dBu 2 Input signal selector The audio signal can be selected with the analog switch to IC4 based on the side panel switch information 3 A D circuit A D uses 24 bit AK 5383 The sampling frequency is 48 KHz The first has an ATT circuit for head room level adjustment 4 D A circuit D A uses 24 bit AK 4382A The sampling frequency is 48 KHz The latter has a differential LPF circuit and an output level amp circuit 5 Final amp The final amp is located on the CNB 25 board and is connected to the AXM 38 board with the connector to connector The CH1 and CH2 output signals are output from the
69. PDW 700 V1 E 4 8 DIAGNOSIS Menu HOURS METER Display Confirming and resetting hours meter DO1OHOURS METER gt OPERATION LASER OPERATION SPINDLE LOADING SEEK Item OPERATION LASER OPERATION rst SPINDLE rst LOADING rst SEEK rst rs t rst rst rs t OOOOOOo OOOOOOo OOOOOOo OOOOOOo Setting Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only OOOOOOo OOOOOOo IIIIII Function Displays the total operation time Calculates and displays the total optical output parameter of the optical head Displays the total operation time Can be reset Displays the total time of SPINDLE rotation Can be reset Displays the total count of disc insertion Can be reset Displays the total seek time of the optical head Can be reset TIME DATE Display Confirming and setting date and hour 2 3ADJUST Item ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY PDW 700 V1 E Setting Press the MENU knob Then the TIME ADJUST display appears Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Function Sets date and time For more details refer to Setting the Date Time of Internal Clock of Operation Manual Hour Minute Second Year Month Day 4 65 ROM VERSION 1 Display Displaying the ROM version DO3OROM VERSION 1 PACKAGE SY 1 SY2K oy 2U DRV AT FP Item P
70. Remove the two screws and remove the SE 709 board 9 Disconnect the harnesses from the connectors CN2 Reinstallation 1 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps to 9 of removal Special screw M2 Harness cover SE 709 board SE 709 board PDW 700 V1 E 7 2 2 SE 857 Board To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded Flexible board is easily cut Be very careful not to fold them Removal 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 Screws M1 7 Shield plate 8 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 Screws 1 7 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assem
71. STANDARD EXEC EXEC Blank ALL PRST SCN REF LENS STD Power OFF SVC PDW 700 V1 E 3 MAINTENANCE Menu 1 4 No Page 01 WHITE SHADING 02 BLACK SHADING O3 LEVEL ADJUST 04 BATTERY 1 05 BATTERY 2 PDW 700 V1 E Setup Item WHT SHAD CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT R G B WHT H SAW R G B WHT H PARA R G B WHT V SAW R G B WHT V PARA WHITE SAW PARA BLK SHAD CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT R G B BLK H SAW R G B BLK H PARA R G B BLK V SAW R G B BLK V PARA BLACK SAW PARA MASTER BLACK MASTER GAIN TMP VBS VIDEO LEVEL HD Y LEVEL TEST OUT SELECT Info BEFORE END Info END Sony BEFORE END Sony END Other BEFORE END Other END DC IN BEFORE END DC IN END DETECTED BATTERY TYPE DETECTION SEGMENT No 7 SEGMENT No 6 SEGMENT No 5 SEGMENT No 4 SEGMENT No 3 SEGMENT No 2 SEGMENT No 1 F SET VBS 0 ON 0 Depends on the switch setting 0 0 VBS 5 0 11 5V 11 0V 11 8V 11 0V 11 8V 11 0V AUTO 17 0V 16 0V 15 0V 14 0V 13 0V 12 0V 11 0V ALL PRST x O x O x O x O x A OQ x O X O x O X X A x x O x O OQ OQ OQ OQ OQ OQ OQ OQ OQ SCN Q Q X X IX IX gt IX IX LENS STD Power OFF SVC X
72. SYSTEM screen display Turns ON OFF the FUNCTION screen display Turns ON OFF the AUDIO STATUS screen display WHITE SETTING Display Indicating the setup status of the various function that are set by the FUNCTION display O200WHITE SETTING WHITE SWITCH lt B gt SHOCKLESS WHITE ATW HOLD MEMORY ATW SPEED AWB FIXED AREA FILTER WHT MEM Item Setting WHITE SWITCH lt B gt MEM ATW SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF 1 2 3 ATW HOLD MEMORY OFF ON ATW SPEED 1 2 3 4 5 AWB FIXED AREA OFF ON FILTER WHT MEM OFF ON 4 18 Function Sets the operating mode when the WHITE BAL switch is set to the B side MEM Auto white balance ATW Auto tracking white balance Sets the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch is changed to a new setting 1 is fastest Sets whether or not to save the white balance adjustment value in the memory A B C that corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch position during ATW The value cannot be saved in the PRESET layer Switches the transition speed of auto tracking white balance ATW 1 is slowest Executes the AWB auto white balance at the center of the screen Sets the memory area for white balance for each position number of the FILTER knob PDW 700 V1 E OFFSET WHT Display Setting on the offset white function O2100FFSET WHT gt OFFSET WHITE lt gt WARM COOL lt A gt WARM COOL BAL A OFFSET WHITE B WARM COOL B WARM COOL BAL B Item OFFSET WHI
73. Take Out a Cartridge Even If Pressing the EJECT Button at Power on 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the four screws and remove the laser caution sheet 3 Push the release pin in the direction arrow A and pull out the cartridge from the unit in the direction of the arrow B Be careful not to touch the disc surface in the cartridge B26 x5 Laser caution sheet 1 34 PDW 700 V1 E 1 7 Removing Installing 1 7 1 Removing Outside Panel 1 Open the cover in the direction of the arrow A 2 Pushthe lock lever in the direction of the arrow B with a screwdriver The cartridge lid assembly is opened in Fiat blade seria the direction of the arrow C 3 Open the BNC cover in the direction of the arrow D Fully loosen the five screws with drop safe of the Cartridge lid assembl outside panel and remove the outside panel in the y direction of the arrow E Screws with drop safe Close the cover securely after use 1 7 2 Reinstalling Outside Panel lt N NA EX 1 Reinstall the outside panel to the unit with its cartridge lid assembly opened by tightening the five screws Do not tighten the screws with the cartridge inside Be sure to take out the cartridge before installing the outside panel Refer to Section 1 6 BNC cover Close the cartridge lid assembly 3 Close the BNC cover 1 7 3 Inside Panel 1 Fully loosen the four screws with
74. V1 E 4 16 Setup Menu List The data that is set by the Setup menu can be saved in files Refer to Section 5 for the details of the file system This section shows the list covering all the items of the setup menu The following list shows the respec tive default settings when the unit was shipped from the factory and the destination files to which the respective menu items can be saved F SET Indicates the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory ALL Indicates the items that can be saved when the ALL FILE SAVE 18 executed The items are indicated by the symbols PRST Indicates the items that can be preset when the ALL PRESET is executed The items are indicated by the symbols SCN Indicates the items that can be saved in the SCENE file when the SCENE STORE is executed The items are indicated by the symbols REF Indicates the items that can be saved in the REFERENCE file when the REFERENCE SAVE STORE 1 executed The items are indicated by the symbols LENS Indicates the items that can be saved in the LENS file when the LENS FILE STORE is executed The items are indicated by the symbols STD The items that are returned to the standard setup PRESET value when the STANDARD submenu is clicked Power OFF Indicates the items that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory at power off SVC Indicates the item that can be saved in the service when the SVC FILE SAVE 1 execut
75. X Ix IX IX LS HO HOO OA IX Y when R G B X X X X ON x X Dependson X the GAIN switch setting Y when R G B 4 115 MAINTENANCE Menu 2 4 No Page Setup Item F SET ALL PRST SCN REF LENS STD Power OFF SVC 06 AUDIO 1 FRONT MIC SELECT STREO X X X X AUDIO CH3 4 MODE SW X X X X REAR XLR AUTO OFF X X X X FRONT MIC REF 50dB X X X X REAR MIC REF 60dB X X X X MIN ALARM VOL OFF X X X X SP ATT LEVEL OFF X X X HEADPHONE OUT MONO X X X X 07 AUDIO 2 AU DATA LEN IMX 16bit X X X X AU REF LEVEL 20dB X X X X AU REF OUT OdB Q X X X X Q AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO X X AU CH34 AGC MODE MONO X X X X AU AGC SPEC 6dB X X X X AU LIMITER MODE OFF X X X X AU OUT LIMITER ON X X X X 08 AUDIO 3 AU SG 1 OFF X X X MIC CH1 LEVEL FRONT X X X X MIC CH2 LEVEL FRONT X X X REAR1 WRRLEVEL SIDE1 X X X REAR2 WRRLEVEL SIDE2 X X X X AUDIO CH3 LEVEL FIX X X X X Q AUDIO CH4 LEVEL FIX X X X X 09 WRR SETTING WRR VALID CH SEL ALL X X WRR CH SELECT T
76. X 4 Send to Software Update Package file po Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation PDW 700 V1 E 6 The current version firmware and new version firmware appears When the firmware update is click Step 3 Sony Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 RRO RTV BALAVA YD APD 9 earm e 2 B m wa 3 http 192 168 1 10 frame_set_t4 htm Bookmarks W Check X Autolink Sendtow Settinesv Software Update Step 2 Update version Current version New version Click the right button to proceed Professional Disc License Registration 2008 Sony Corporation SEE AWD REO RT YMD WIW SCC O O HAG D kaa OBB HAS http 1921681 10 frame set htm AV Check v X AutoLink QA Send tov Software Update Step 3 Software Update execution Status updating ib License Registration Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation 8 When the status turns to Finished check that each firmware program is properly updated or not OK or NG If no change is observed on the download menu for 20 minutes or any firmware program is marked the update is failed In this case return to step 2 in Preparation If the update is failed again contact your local Sony Sales Office Servi
77. are used for daily routine operations such as MONITOR OUT setting This menu appears when the MENU ON OFF switch is set to ON normally Use this menu to add or delete the pages that are required for the USER menu to suit operators needs depending on applications For more details refer to Editing the USER Menu of Operation Manual The ALL menu contains all pages of each category of the USER 1 to USER 19 pages edited by USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ASSIGN ITEM SEL page OPERA TION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE and DIAGNOSIS It means that you can move to any page from the ALL menu without returning to the TOP menu Usually the camera operator is expected to use the OPERATION menu to set or change the preference setups to suit the shooting conditions of each object Use this menu to implement fine adjustment of pictures by monitoring the camera output waveform on a waveform monitor etc This is the camera maintenance menu Use this menu to set the PAINT items of lower operating frequency or to alter the system configuration This is the file operation menu Use this menu to save data in the REFERENCE file etc Use this menu to check the optical drive status or to diagnose the circuit boards that are suspected to have an error Use this menu for service and maintenance This menu is enabled when the switch S402 1 AT 177 board is set to ON PDW 700 V1 E 4 3 USER Menu The USER menu enables the user to use the selecte
78. assembly is removed Be sure to install the loader assembly before making this adjustment Clean the loader assembly Refer to Section 6 2 2 Install the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 Display the adjustment item referring to Section 8 1 3 Select SERVO_2 by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob A confirmation screen appears 5 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob ADJUST START YES NO A confirmation screen appears 6 Setthe alignment disc The result appears SERVO 2 ADJUSTING COMPLETED 7 Press the MENU switch The alignment disc is ejected 8 6 Clearing Media Log This menu is used to clear acquired media log Once this menu is executed the cleared log data can no longer be restored The adjustment value is stored for each media If the optical drive is replaced the adjustment value differs from the one that is stored so the media log needs to be cleared 1 Select OTHERS ADJUST by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob 2 Select CLEAR MEDIA LOG by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob A confirmation screen appears 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob press the MENU knob CLEAR MEDIA LOG ARE YOU SURE YES NO The result appears EXECUTING COMPLETED 4 Perform the procedure after adjustment Refer to Section 8 7 In case of error The de
79. can be saved in the SCENE FILE When the PDW 700 is used in a standalone manner the value of the ECS frequency and SHUT TER SEL can be read The values are retained until a change is made The values are retained even after the power is turned off The hardware switches are prioritized for SHUTTER ON OFF so the saved value cannot be read out When the PDW 700 is connected to the remote controller the value of SHUTTER SEL can be read out The value is retained until a change is made The values are retained even after the power is turned off PDW 700 V1 E 5 13 6 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 Periodic Check Replacement Parts List This table does not describe the guarantee period of each part The replacement period of each part is changed according to the environment and condition Part to Be Replaced Optical block assembly Seek motor Cleaner assembly PS 708 board Lithium battery Loader assembly Battery connector This count differs from the actual disc insertion times because the loader up down count is made by the normal loading operation PDW 700V1 E Hours Meter Menu item Laser parameter LASER PARAMETER Seek running hours SEEK RUNNING Laser parameter LASER PARAMETER Laser parameter LASER PARAMETER Current carrying hours OPERATION Disc loading count LOADING Current carrying hours OPERATION Check Replacement Period Repla
80. checkbox 12 Click OK Local Area Network LAN Settings Automatic configuration Automatic configuration may override manual settings To ensure the use of manual settings disable automatic configuration Use automatic configuration script Proxy server 1 Use proxy server for your LAN These settings will not apply to dial fb or VPN connections 13 Click OK on the Internet Options window PDW 700 V1 E Update Procedure 1 Start up the Internet Explorer and enter http 192 168 1 10 in the Address bar Where the under lined part is the IP address of the camcorder 2 Enter admin for User name and pdw 700 for Password Then click The XDCAM top page appears Connect to 192 168 1 10 User name admin v Remember my password 3 Sony XDCAM Microso ft Internet Explorer PHD RRO YID AFH O O FAG 8 PEVAC http 192 168 1 10 index cei Product Information Model Name Serial No 4 System Information Disc Propertie g Thu nbnails System Frequency video Format Audio Format E Other Information License Registratio Option 3 Click Software Update on the Maintenance menu in the left frame 4 Click Browse and select the firmware package file copied in step 5 of Preparation 5 Click Step 2 RTV YL ALI HAG kan a FY AutoLink
81. default value irrespective of the BAL switch Status after execution The current value of the white gain at the time of execution is saved in the SCENE FILE When the WHITE BAL switch is A the saved value is A When B the saved value is B When PRST the saved value is PRST The current value of the WHITE GAIN at the time execution is overwritten to that of the SCENE file only when SCENE WHITE DATA is set to ON in the FILE menu REFERENCE page When the WHITE BAL switch is A the value of A is overwritten When it is B the value of B is overwritten However the value of the preset WHITE GAIN is retained when the WHITE BAL switch is PRST The current value of the WHITE GAIN at the time of execution is overwritten to that of the REFERENCE file only when SCENE WHITE DATA is set to ON in the FILE menu REFERENCE page PDW 700 V1 E 5 4 2 Master Gain The Master Gain value can be saved in the REFERENCE FILE and in the SCENE FILE When the PDW 700 is used in a standalone manner the hardware switches are prioritized so the saved value cannot be read out When the PDW 700 is connected to the remote controller the value of the master gain can be read from each file and is retained until a change is made The value is retained even after the power is turned off When the RM B150 1 connected the hardware switches of the RM B150 take precedence 5 4 3 Shutter The values of SHUTTER ON OFF ECS frequency and SHUTTER SEL
82. drop safe of the inside panel and open the inside panel 2 Disconnect the flexible card wires from the four connectors CN105 CN106 CN107 CN801 on the 2 2 FP 157 board Bais P PSW 5 3 Remove the five screws of the FP cover and remove N LY the inside panel PSW2 x5 FP cover with drop safe with drop safe FP 157 board Inside panel PDW 700 V1 E 1 35 1 7 4 Handle Assembly 10 11 12 13 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the screw B2 6 X 5 and remove the connector retainer Disconnect the CN 2947 board from the connector CN2 on the DCP 44 board Remove the two screws B2 6 X 5 Disconnect the coaxial cables from the five coaxial connectors CN10 CN11 CN12 CN13 CN14 on the DCP 44 board Disconnect the harness from the connector CN3 on the DCP 44 board Disconnect the harness from the connector CN602 on the AT 177 board Disconnect the DCP 44 board The AT 177 board is included from the connector on the MB 1111 board Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN1300 on the SY 355 board Disconnect the harness form the connector CN1500 on the SY 355 board Open the connector cover Remove the three screws B2 X 5 and remove the tally cover Remove the two screws B3 X 8 and remove the CN 2946 CN 3026 boards block assembly Note Be careful not to lose drop protection on the CN 294
83. effectuer d autres Pour toute r paration faire appel une personne comp tente uniquement PDW 700 V1 E 259 gt lt RAI Ed gt CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Vorsicht Explosionsgefahr bei Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen ahnlichen Typ Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers ATTENTION Il y a danger d explosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie Hemplacer uniquement avec une batterie du type ou d un type quivalent recommand par le constructeur Mettre au rebut les batteries usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant PDW 700 V1 E ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leveranderen ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosjonsfare Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten Brukt batteri returneres apparatleveranderen VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en likv rdig typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren
84. file selection display see below to the following descriptions Saves the USER file to a Memory Stick For the description of the file selection display see below to the following descriptions Sets the file ID When the USER FILE SAVE is executed this ID is saved Returns all the items of the USER menu to the standard setup USER FILE SAVE Function The display appears when inserting a Memory Stick or during saving data in a Memory Stick or during reading data from a Memory Stick Switches the attributes when displaying the following file ALL File ID and date are displayed QOOO0O0000 00 JAN 00 F ID File ID is displayed QOOOOOOOOOOOOOOL DATA Date and time of saving the file are displayed 00 00 00 00 00 00 MODEL Model name and format are displayed PDW 700 59 941 When the file does not exist the message NO FILE is displayed Select the target read file from which data is read or select the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored When saving the data in a new file select NEW FILE PDW 700 V1 E USER FILE 2 Display Operating the USER file FO2OUSER FILE 2 gt STORE USR EXEC CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF LOAD OUT OF USER OFF BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF USER LOAD WHITE OFF Item Setting STORE USR PRESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item CLEAR USR
85. for servo error detection Refer to Section 8 Optical Drive Alignment for details Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE ADJUST SERVO_1 4 10 19 SKEW This menu allows you to skew adjustment Remove the loader assembly before executing this menu Refer to Section 8 Optical Drive Alignment for details Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE ADJUST SKEW 4 10 20 SERVO 2 This menu allows you to adjust TE CE BLOCK and SV LOOP GAIN necessary for servo operation Refer to Section 8 Optical Drive Alignment for details Be sure to install the loader The adjustments are not available if the loader is not installed Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE ADJUST SERVO_2 4 97 4 10 21 ACCELERATION OFFSET The result appears 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press This menu allows you to perform the offset adjustment of the MENU knob the acceleration sensor Be sure to place the unit horizontally with the outside ACCELERATION OFFSET PLACE DRIVE panel facing upward as shown in the figure when checking HORIZONTALLY the sensor ARE YOU SURE The servo operation is not ensured if the optical drive is YES incorrectly placed NO Preparation A confirmation screen appears 1 Place the unit with the outside panel facing upward as ACCELERATION OFFSET shown in the figure 2 Connect the component cable to the TEST OUT connector and the monitor 3 Selec
86. gt AWB ENABLE lt P gt ND FILTER CTEMP ND FLT CTEMP lt 1 gt ND FLT CTEMP 2 4 ELECTRICAL CC lt A gt ELECTRICAL CC lt B gt ELECTRICAL CC lt C gt ELECTRICAL CC lt D gt DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC D RANGE DCC POINT DCC GAIN DCC DELAY TIME DCC PEAK FILTER F SET ON ON OSEC R ST ON OFF TIMER 1H OFF DSABL DSABL OFF KEEP SAW ARIB OFF OFF RM SEC ASPEC CTRL AUTO MTRY AUTO 3200 0 0 0 OFF OFF 3200K 5600K 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K DCC 600 ALL PRST 10 0 010 0 0 0 0 01 01 OlO Oo OOJOjJO JOJOJOO O O O OjJOJOXO OJOJO O OJOJOJ JOJO O O OjOjOj OJ OJIOJIO 0 0 0 0 01 01 010101010 0 0 0 Oo O O0j O JOXO OJOJO O OJO JO OJO O 9 SCN XIX X LK x OIOOIOIJIOIOJ X X X X XX xXXXIXIXIXDXDXXIXxX JJ m H X XIX X X X x 1 1 10 010101 x x x x LENS STD Power OFF SVC X x X X XIX X Initial value 10 0 010 0 0 0 0 01 01 0 0 0 010101 010 0 0 0 0 0 010 01010100 01 010 0101 010 9 T 117 MAINTENANCE Menu 4 4 No 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 This does appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYST
87. has been loaded SEEK RUN HOURS a Resets the seek operation time for the optical head ALL METERS a Resets all the hour meters PDW 700V1 E 6 5 This section describes the recommended replacement parts and recommended replacement time 6 5 Recommended Replacement Parts G I et v AEG 9 7 7 29 22 7 A 34227 s E lt Y FX GCS 222 BV SNK OUS 2255 4 W tae 7 A D 22 LAT NY ONY Sir z NS 7 Y 2D L 46 XK l S WS S AN 7 57 6 AAS gt 19 p S 2 5 f 76 9 SKM A Aly QS AZ PDW 700 V1 E 6 6 Recommended replacement parts ID O JAIO 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Part name Cover BNC PH3 Eye cup kit RP Wind screen Filter unit optical Cover handle connector Protector Cover headphone jack Cover XLR drop protection Cap ME Foot rubber Pad assembly shoulder GEL MIC Tape A Light connector cover Holder lens mount Battery connector Ring mount Collar suspension Cover bottom handle VTR start button Sony part No 3 870 160 01 A 8319 943 B A 1096 362 A 1 788 765 11 3 870 237 01 3 870 158 01 3 870 140 01 3 870 246 02 3 870 253 02 3 723 097 01 A 8279 878 G 3 854 132 01 3 941 343 01 3 877 892 01 3 796 982 02 1 820 459 21 3 186 442 01 3 654 615 02 3 796 975 02 3 986 632 02 Recommended repl
88. hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Remove the drive sub assembly Refer to Section 7 1 2 7 Remove the tape A and disconnect harness from the connector 8 Remove the three step screws and remove the fan plate lower 9 Remove the screw and remove the fan plate upper while rotating it in the arrow direc tion 10 Remove the fan motor 11 Place a new fan motor with its label side up oriented as shown in the figure 12 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal Note Arrange the harness as shown in the figure PDW 700 V1 E Screw 1 7 Fan plate upper Fan motor Step screws Screw 1 7 Tightening torque 10 x 10 2 0 02 1 0 0 2 7 23 7 4 Replacing Fan Motor Rear 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the DCP 44 board assembly Refer to Section 7 7 4 3 Remove the DVP 45 board assembly Refer to Section 7 7 6 4 Disconnect the har
89. item SCENE STORE FILE menu SCENE FILE page SCENE RECALL FILE menu SCENE FILE page SCENE STANDARD FILE menu SCENE FILE page 5 12 Status after execution All the values of the white gain are saved in the ALL FILE Filter A B C D WHITE BAL A B All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of ALL FILE Filter A B C D WHITE BAL A B The value of the preset white gain specified on the MAINTENANCE menu PRESET WHT page is saved as the value of the PRESET layer identical to the value of the REFERENCE FILE All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the factory default value Filter A B C D WHITE BAL A B The PRESET WHITE R B GAIN is also changed to the factory default value All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of PRESET layer Status after execution The current value of the white gain at the time of execution is saved in REFERENCE FILE When the WHITE BAL switch is A the saved value is A When B the saved value is B When PRST the saved value is PRST If REFERENCE STORE is executed when the WHITE BAL switch is A or B the preset WHITE GAIN to be specified in the MAINTENANCE menu PRESET WHT page is also overwritten to the value of the saved WHITE GAIN When the WHITE BAL switch is A at the time of execution R B GAIN of A becomes the default value When the WHITE BAL switch is B R B GAIN of B becomes the factory default value PRESET WHITE R B GAIN becomes the
90. menu item to set the color temperature of a WHITE preset value by adjusting R GAIN B GAIN lt P gt 99 to 99 Uses this menu item to set the color temperature of a WHITE preset value by adjusting B GAIN AWB ENABLE lt P gt OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that sets the white balance adjustment value as the preset value when the white balance automatic adjustment is executed with the WHITE BAL switch being set in PRST PDW 700 V1 E 4 49 WHITE FILTER Display Setting the color temperatures to assign to the electrical color correction CC filters M16OWHITE FILTER FILTER CTEMP T CTEMP 1 Item Setting Function ND FILTER CTEMP OFF ON Selects whether to assign electrical CC filters to neutral density ND filters or to switch by using the COLOR TEMP button ND FLT CTEMP 1 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K Select the color temperatures when the electrical CC filters are assigned to the ND filters ND FLT CTEMP 2 4 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K ELECTRICAL CC 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K Select the color temperatures selected by electrical CC filter switching A B C D when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to ASSIGN switch At the C and D items the positions to which the dash marks are set can be selected When the dash marks is selected the filter position cannot be selected These items are skipped C and D items when operated from the ASSIGNABLE switch DCC ADJUST Displ
91. modification mode Operating procedure 1 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON 2 To move to another page rotate the MENU knob Press the MENU knob to set it 3 To move to another item rotate the MENU knob Note Pressing the MENU knob enters the setup value modification mode 4 To modify a setup value rotate the MENU knob 5 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF to exit the setup menu 4 1 2 How to Display the SERVICE Menu Method 1 Set the switch S402 1 AT 177 board to the ON position 3 3 3 J 2 2 I 5 177 000 0 Method 2 Select the DIAGNOSIS menu DOO CONTENTS page While pressing the MENU knob and the ASSIGNI switch simultaneously set the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON However if the switch S402 2 AT 177 board is set to ON or if the switch S400 AT 177 board is OFF this method is disabled 4 2 While pressing the MENU knob set MENU ON OFF switch to ON Then TOP menu appears However the TOP menu is not displayed when the switch S400 TOP MENU selection AT 177 board 1 in the OFF position TOP MENU Display 5 lt MENU gt gt USER USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT USER MENU CUSTOMIZE ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS SERVICE 4 2 Function Use the USER menu to set the functions that
92. noise that occurs when the read power light is emitted for the single layer disc Spindle Motor The FG generated by the spindle motor is amplified and shaped on the SE 857 board and is then input into the SV DSP IC400 on the DR 606 board The SV DSP compares the FG frequency with the target frequency and then controls the spindle motor via the driver 1 500 System Control The SY CPU IC600 on the DR 606 board performs system control It controls ATA interface Data Manager RF related ICs servo ICs and loader It also carries out interlocking control maintenance and error log management of each device including the optical block Firmware programs of the SY CPU and DSP as well as sources of each PLD are stored in the flash memory IC602 and the CPU loads them to each device when the power is turned on The BDC IC300 and SV DSP IC400 are controlled by the parallel CPU bus while RF related ICs are controlled by the serial port through SYS PE IC700 Adjustment values and hours meter data are stored in the EEPROM IC4 on the SE 857 board PDW 700 V1 E 1 2 9 Power Supply Systems CNB 25 board The board checks the input voltage 12 V and controls distribution of the input power to each circuit board Power ON OFF Control The ON OFF control is performed in IC1 and IC5 The IC1 input signals include PWR SW ON signal H POWERW HOLD signal EXTDC detection signal battery detection excess voltage detection and low vo
93. on the host PC 6 Start up the Internet Explorer of host Use the Internet Explorer for updating If other browser is used the update may not be properly done 7 Select Tool Internet Options 8 Click Delete Files on the General page to delete the Temporary Internet files Home page 5E Y ou can change which page to use for your home page Address about blank Use Default Use Blank Temporary Internet files Delete Cookies Delete Files History The History folder contains links to pages you ve visited for quick access to recently viewed pages Days to keep pages in history Clear History 2 8 PDW 700 V1 E 9 The confirmation message appears Click 10 Click LAN Settings on the Connections page Internet Options Security Privacy Conte Ea i To set up an Internet connection Setup Dial up and Virtual Private Network settings move Choose Settings if you need to configure a proxy Settings server for connection Never dial a connection Dial whenever network connection is not present Always dial my default connection Current None Set Default Local Area Network LAN settings LAN Settings do not apply to dial up connections f Settings Choose Settings above for dial up settings E 11 Confirm that the checkbox of Use a proxy server for your LAN is not checked If checked uncheck the
94. panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 4 Remove the two screws 5 Remove the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector and coaxial cable hold washer 6 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1 and remove the IO 235 board Mees Coaxial cable 4 hold washer ess A Gif lij 221 S Coaxial cable B2 6x5 IO 235 board 7 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 6 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 7 11 ve 8 9 1 37 Board Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 Remove the connector panel Refer to Section 1 7 8 Remove the rear panel Refer to Section 1 7 9 Disconnect the two coaxial cables from connectors CN1 CN2 on the CI 37 board lt W 4 2 8 S A LOS 6 0 A at T2 S Z LO Coaxial cables Loosen the screw and remove the 50P cover assembly Remove the two screws and remove the CI 37 board 50P cover assembly Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal 7 33 7 7 12 PS 731 Board 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1 on the PS 731 board 3 Remove the s
95. selected in SYSTEM LINE O240FORMAT TOP gt SYSTEM LINE 1080 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 91 REG FORMAT HD422 50 COUNTRY NTSC J AREA Item Setting SYSTEM LINE 1080 720 SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 9i 29 9P 23 9P NTSC AREA 50i 25P PAL AREA HEC FORMAT See the right column COUNTRY NTSC JJAREA NTSC AREA PAL AREA x1 The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting Function Sets the format when the power is turned on next time Sets the format when the power is turned on next time Sets the recording format Setting value HD422 50 HD420 HQ HD420 SP IMX 50 IMX 40 IMX 30 DVCAM Setting value in can be selected when CBKZ MD0O1 SD Record and Playback Software is installed NTSC J AREA NTSC area Japan NTSC AREA NTSC area for areas other than Japan PAL AREA PAL area 2 Setting value in can be selected when CBKZ FCO1 23 98P Record and Playback Software is installed PDW 700 V1 E 4 21 When IMX50 40 30 DVCAM is selected REC FORMAT FORMAT IMX 50 ASPECT RATIO 50 16 9 AU DATA LEN IMX 16bit COUNTRY NTSC 9 AREA Item Setting Function ASPECT RATIO SD 16 9 4 3 Sets the aspect ratio AU DATA LEN IMX 16bit 24bit Sets the record format of audio Displayed only when REC FORMAT is set to IMX50 40 30 When 720 is selected in SYSTEM LINE O240FORMAT gt SYSTEM LINE SYSTEM FREQUENCY SCAN MODE REG FORMAT HD4 COUNTRY NTSC J AR
96. sensor of the optical block assembly is abnormal COE EA Dew condensation is detected 3 2 5 Error 5X When read data errors are detected the following error codes are displayed Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive Description code code display logger logger 50 010 Not displayed X BCA area data cannot be read 011 Not displayed O BCA area data is abnormal 51 020 DI read err X PIC area data cannot read 021 DI read err x area data is abnormal 52 Read err X Address cannot be read from disc in optical block assembly 3 2 6 Error 6X When errors related to startup operation are detected the following error codes are displayed Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive Description code code display logger logger 60 Not displayed O Optical block assembly cannot seek to target position during startup 6F DRV X Optical block assembly startup adjustment cannot be completed PDW 700 V1 E 3 5 3 2 7 Error 91 When interface errors between CPU and peripheral devices are detected the following error codes are displayed System control CPU C200 on the SY 355 board Main Sub code code 91 125 130 13B 13C 13D 155 165 185 101 215 239 23E 275 285 2 5 430 551 595 596 3 6 Time data display lt logger O O Drive logger X Description System control CP
97. service mode E nd OPERA MAINTE Data Structure USER TION PAINT NANCE FILE SERVICE USER layer PRESET layer NU d SERVICE layer FACTORY layer The USER layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer and FACTORY layer contain absolute values The data in the USER layer which is at the top is used as the actual setup value Regarding the items that change continuously such as DETAIL LEVEL hereafter referred to as analog data in the MENU display when the data in the PRESET layer are changed by performing REFERENCE LOAD refer to step 4 in 5 3 3 or a similar process that displays the differential values between the USER layer and the PRESET layer USER mode the MENU display changes according to the data in the PRESET layer However the values actually set do not change In the Service mode the MENU display for the analog data shows the differential values between the SERVICE layer and the FACTORY layer Location where the data of each layer is saved USER PRESET and SERVICE layers FRAM AT 177 board FACTORY layer EEPROM CN 3005 DCP 44 and DR 617 boards and ROM fixed value PDW 700 V1 E 5 3 Operating the Files and the Data Flow 5 3 1 USER FILE lx Initializing all the items in the USER menu to the default values USER PRESET When executing USER PRESET in the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 1 lt 01 gt all the items in the USER menu is initialized to the default values Executing USER PRESE
98. setting to ASSIGN 4 Assigns the function to record a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark Assigns the function to record a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark Assign the functions that set or clear OK NG KEEP flags during recording or playback 1 Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu the ASSIGN 1 3 4 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers 2 Cannot be assigned to the RET button of the lens 3 Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder 4 Only the Assign SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear 4 8 PDW 700 V1 E Item Setting ASSIGN SW 1 3 4 FOCUS MAG COLOR TEMP SW DIGITAL EXTENDER CLIP CONT REC UAO1 to 10 ASSIGN SW 2 OFF FRONT MIC MONO STEREO PICTURE CACHE ON OFF SUPER VFDISP amp MENU MARKER REC VIDEO SOURCE ZEBRA FREEZE MIX DIGITAL EXTENDER CLIP CONT REC UAO1 to UA10 ZOOM SPEED 0 to 99 RETURN VIDEO OFF ON x1 This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu Function Assigns the function that magnifies the central part of the viewfinder picture for easier focus adjustment This function does not affect recorded video or other signal output Assigns the function that electronically magnifies the central part of the picture All video output is magnified including recorded video
99. shading adjustment 1 On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE SHADING ITEM AUTO WHT SHADING EXEC 2 Push the MENU knob 3 When adjustment ends successfully the message COMPLETE appears The auto adjustment takes about 30 seconds 2 Manual white shading adjustment When performing fine adjustment after executing the black shading auto adjustment or when performing manual adjustment without executing the auto adjust ment proceed as follows 1 On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE WHITE SHADING ITEM WHT SHAD CH SEL G ITEM TEST OUT SELECT gt G Note The HD signal is output when TEST OUT SELECT is set to a signal other than VBS PDW 700 V1 E 2 On the menu perform the G channel adjustment as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE WHITE SHADING ITEM GWHTHSAW ITEM GWHT V SAW ITEM G WHT H PARA ITEM G WHT V Spec Make the waveform of the G channel flat H SAW H PARA AN 3 On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE WHITE SHADING ITEM WHT SHAD CH SEL R ITEM TEST OUT SELECT R 4 Adjust the shading for the R channel in the same procedure as the G channel adjustment 5 On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE WHITE SHADING ITEM WHT SHAD CH SEL B ITEM TEST OUT SELECT B 6 Adjust the shading for the B channel in the same procedure as the G channel adjustment Setting after Adjustment On the menu set as follows MENU SER
100. shipped from the factory Excluding the black balance automatic adjustment value Function Turns ON OFF the function that sets the GAIN value in the ISO indication ON ISO indication OFF Decibel dB indication Correspondence between the ISO and decibel dB indications is shown below Values in parenthesis indicate the decibel dB indication 400 6 570 3 800 0 1100 3 1600 6 2300 9 3200 12 6400 18 13000 24 26000 50 51000 36 100000 42 The setting whether or not to enable the knee 2nd point when compressing a high luminance signal ON The knee 2nd point is enabled to allow operator to compress the high luminance part in wide range OFF The knee 2nd point is disabled and only the knee 1st point is enabled PDW 700 V1 E WHITE SHADING SOSOWHITE SHADING WHT SHAD CH SEL uae WHT WHT PARA WHT V SAW R WHT V PARA WHITE SAW PARA Item WHT SHAD CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT R WHT H SAW R G B R WHT H PARA R G B R WHT V SAW R G B R WHT V PARA R G B WHITE SAW PARA PDW 700 V1 E Setting R G B TEST VBS Y R G B LCD 99 to 99 799 to 99 799 to 99 799 to 99 OFF ON Function Selects the channel of shading correction Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector Adjusts the H SAW correction The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL Adjusts the H PARA c
101. the SHUTTER switch is ON OFF Does not turn on Turns on when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST OFF Does not turn on Turns on when ATW is used OFF Does not turn on Turns on when the lens extender is used OFF Does not turn on ON Turns on when the filter knob is set to the setting other than ND 1 OFF Does not turn on ON Turns on when the reference value of the auto iris is other than the standard value PDW 700 V1 E MARKER 1 Display Setting the MARKER O120MARKER 1 gt MARKER CENTER CENTER ETY SAF SAF ASP ASP ASP ASP 100 CT CT CT CT Item Setting Function MARKER OFF ON Turns ON OFF all the MARKER display functions CENTER OFF ON Turns ON OFF the CENTER MARKER display CENTER MARK 1 2 3 4 Selects the types of CENTER MARKER when the above CENTER MARKER display is SAFETY ZONE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display SAFETY AREA 80 90 92 5 95 Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display 80 90 92 5 95 ASPECT OFF ON Turns ON OFF the ASPECT MARKER display ASPECT SELECT 15 9 14 9 13 9 4 3 1 85 2 35 Selects the aspect ratio ASPECT MASK OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function to darken the outside 4 ges of the specified aspect ASPECT MASKLVL 15 Selects the darkness level of the outside of the specified aspect when ASPECT MASK is ON 100 MARKER OFF ON Selects the MARKER display function to display
102. the handle switch signal are included Handle switch relay Input and output the handle switch signal CN2 Light switch relay Relays the light switch signal CN3 EEPROM The system information is written to the EEPROM IC2 by the I2C communication to control MS 86 board The MS 86 board is the connector board for the memory stick connection When a memory stick 15 inserted the INS signal is set to LOW so that the camera microprocessor checks capacity and types of the memory stick inserted VCC is supplied to a memory stick only when a memory stick is inserted or only when accessing a file on a memory stick When VCC is supplied the INS LED and ACTIVE LED D1 is turned ON Access to the memory stick data is processed in the following order VCC IN SCLK ON BS Pulse gt DATA IN OUT 5 SCLK OFF gt SCLK ON gt BS ON gt DATA IN OUT gt SCLK OFF gt gt VCC OFF PDW 700 V1 E M9IAJ9AQ 20 Olpny O4 Olanv SSS6VOd sna ozi SSS6VOd jonuo2 SJgPOr 90941 llv aoe Ja depy T voS6vOd ANOL WHV1V 033053 MS dicc O Jo LLY gPpsr i LIV 09 15 HuVvad 043002 6 oipny HS 1 depy lt peouejequ peouejeg penueJeyiq
103. the main frame Note The GND sheet can be broken during removal Handle it with care 9 Remove the four screws B3 X 8 10 Take off the front panel disconnect the harness from the two connectors CN2 CN3 on the MS 86 board and remove the front panel PDW 700 V1 E Harness CN2 Tapes B2 6 x 5 Connector retainer B2 6 5 Harnesses TG 260 board MS 86 board 1 37 1 7 6 SW Guard Assembly 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the two screws to remove the SW guard assembly Note If the loader has already been moved to the up posi tion the SW guard assembly may be difficult to remove in some cases Move down the loader by rotating the gear in clockwise direction with crosshead screwdriver Installation Install the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 2 of removal 1 7 7 Shoulder Pad Connector Cover 1 Loosen the two pad screws and remove the shoulder pad 2 Remove the four screws and remove the connector cover Note on installation After the shoulder pad is reinstalled check the slide operation Check that it slides smoothly with the screws fastened 1 38 Cross head screwdriver SW guard assembly PSW2 x5 PDW 700 V1 E 1 7 8 Connector Panel Assembly Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7
104. the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu Display method 1 1 Open the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 step 1 2 Set the S402 1 AT 177 board to the ON position 3b 3 3E JE 2B JE 2L AT 177 board 3 Close the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 step 1 4 Turn on the power and flip the MENU switch to ON 5 Enter SERVICE mode to display the SERVICE menu Indicate SERVICE mode TOP MENU CUSTOMIZE TION ENANCE The SERVICE menu can be selected PDW 700 V1 E 6 The following contents are available in the SERVICE menu SOOOCONTENTS lt 0 0 7 Keep turning the MENU knob to display the next page 11 20 SOOOCONTENTS LCD ADJUST FLARE GAMMA DETAIL MANUAL RPN MANAGE VDR MAINTENANCE FAN MEASURE FILTER CTEMP BATTERY INFO 8 Keep turning the MENU knob further to display the next page 21 25 SOOOCONTENTS V VDR MAINTENANCE FAN 6 7 8 9 O 1 2 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 After servicing is completed make sure to set the S402 1 AT 177 board to the OFF position and exit from SERVICE mode When parameters are changed while the SERVICE menu is displayed run ALL PRESET from the RESET menu after exiting from SERVICE mode to activate the changed parameters Display method 2 Se
105. the rightmost end of the menu items Blank Extender OFF EX Extender ON 0 8 5 ON PDW 700 V1 E 4 63 LENS FILE 3 Display Setting 3 the LENS file FOSOLENS FILE 3 gt SHADING CH SEL TEST OUI SELECT LENS SAW LENS T R H LENS R H R V LENS R V Item Setting Function SHADING CH SEL Y R G B TEST Selects the channel of shading adjustment TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector LENS SAW 99 to 99 Adjusts the H SAW correction value LENS RH PARA 99 to 99 Adjusts the H PARA correction value LENS R V SAW 99 to 99 Adjusts the V SAW correction value LENS V PARA 99 to 99 Adjusts the V PARA correction value In the LENS R G B V H SAW and LENS R G B V H PARA the lens extender position is displayed in the rightmost end of the menu items Blank Extender OFF EX Extender ON 0 8 Shrinker ON MEMORY STICK Display Function on Memory Stick FO9OMEMORY STICK TOP gt M S FORMAT EXEC M S IN gt JUMP TO OFF Item Setting Function FORMAT Press the MENU knob Implements formatting of a Memory Stick to execute this menu item All of the data is erased S IN gt JUMP TO OFF USER ALL SCENE Sets the function that opens the file setup page LENS REFER USER1 automatically as a Memory Stick is inserted when this menu is set to ON This function is disabled when the file related page is opened already 4 64
106. to ITRON CPU Measurement interval time 60 s Current is prevented from running through FET S W Q836 in order to prevent power from being lost during measurement Furthermore reverse current above 3 V is prevented with FET SW Q829 thus extending the life of the lithium battery The battery life is guaranteed for about 5 years 14 FP CPU independent operations When the POWER SW is set to power off power is supplied from the UNSW 12 V power circuit to display the counter and other information on the monochrome LCD Power is supplied to each power regulator with IC830 hyposaturation regulator 8 V and independent operations can be performed The operations can be turned on or off from the menu 15 REAR input control The serial communication bus SDA SCL for IC917 Parallel bus to 12 bus Controller connected to the FP CPU bus sends control for the AXM 38 board through the motherboard with IC202 PCA 9555 I2C PORT on the CNB 25 board and acquires the following information REAR XLR automatic insertion detection 3 V IC805 Q829 Port Vcc FET SW AN15 D15 Lithium Coin Battery 3 V D8 Port 1 921 HD64F2378 CPU Port 1 time 60 sec IC908 Real Time Clock CLOCK 16 MHz RX 8025NB AN11 O 3 V Voltage measurement CH 1 RV1 O 3 V Voltage measurement CH 2 RV2 FRONT REA WRR SW1 2 3 4 CTL TC U_BIT SW FREE SET REC_RUN SW PRESET REGENE CLOCK SW Monitor SW 3 digitize level
107. to iTRON_CPU J Voltage Measurement Block Overview PDW 700 V1 E 1 9 circuit control microphone amplifier gain control tional amplifier power control and digital analog input switching switch information 16 REAR XLR automatic insertion detection circuit control DET 47 board and sensor holder Combine the DET 47 board on the sensor holder and connect with the harness to the AXM 38 board The infrared light emitter uses one LED that connects to the and CH2 receivers positioned in the middle of the sensor holder on the left and right sides When Detection ON is set from the menu and the XLR connector is inserted into the 3P XLR connector the infrared light is blocked the output from the receivers changes from L to and insertion is detected At this time and CH2 operate automatically and the XLR input on the REAR area 1s selected CH3 and CH4 are not switched automatically Detection interval time is 200 ms 17 Color LCD monitor drive control and opening rotation detection circuit The CN108 connector is connected to the power supply and the RGB signal for video the passes through CN802 to connect directly into the LCD driver FP CPU and LCD driver are connected with synchronous serial communication During POWER ON parameters H AMP12CH ON L A D PD12CH ON 4 45 157 4 L A D PD34CH ON FrontMIC 1 gt FrontMIC 2
108. to the operation amp NJM2172 with electronic volume The rear earphone can be switched between stereo and mono from the menu The monitor speaker output level can be lowered from the volume Select one of the following for the ATT value 0 3 dB 6 dB or 9 dB 1 2 7 Audio DSP Operation Processing Main functions 1 AUTO AMP Two to four types of characteristics can be selected depending on each headroom 20dBFS AES EBU Reference OUT 20dBFS XLR OUT 9dBu IN 24dBu Limiter ON 4dBu 0dBu IN 4dBu AGC ON 3dBu 4dBu ALARM TONE CPU_OUT 2 7dBu HeadPhone 8Q loded HeadRoom 12dB ATT8dB 16dB ATT4dB 18dB ATT2dB 20dB ATTOdB ALARM Max VR Max 48dBu 62dBu ALARM Min Faint On ALARM VR Min Faint On 90dBu ALARM Min Faint Off ALARM VR Min Faint Audio Level Chart PDW 700 V1 E 2 LIMITER characteristics Two to four types of characteristics can be selected depending on each headroom 3 OUT_PUT_LIMITER characteristics Performs LIMITER processing on the PB and EE_OUT ON OFF 4 Turns on and off the HPF 67 Hz and LPF 15 KHz 24 dB Runs automatically during front microphone selection 5 Performs gain control when and CH2 are MANUAL status VR MAX 12 dB 6 CH3 and CH4 turn on and off the AUTO operation 7 Internal SG Four types of 1 KHz 12 16 18 20 dBFS 8 Recording err
109. to the RESET METER display OPERATION Display only LASER Display only OPERATION rst Display only SPINDLE rst Display only LOADING rst Display only SEEK rst Display only 4 82 Function Resets the hours meters OPERATION operation time display mode Accumulates the time during which the power is turned on and displays the value by an hour LASER PARAMETER optical block assembly light output time display mode Accumulates the time laser illuminated hours during which the light is being emitted and displays the value by an hour Resettable The value can be used as a reference to when the next periodical replacement should be OPERATION operation time display mode resettable This is the same function as the OPERATION mode above but is resettable By resetting it after replacing a part the value can be used as a reference to when the next periodical replacement should be SPINDLE RUNNING spindle motor rotation time display mode resettable Accumulates the time during which the spindle is rotating and displays the value by an hour Resettable By resetting it after replacing a spindle the value can be used as a reference to when the next replacement should be LOADING COUNTER number of times of disc insertion display mode resettable Accumulates and displays the number of times of disc insertion Resettable By resetting it after replacing a loader assembly the value can be used as a reference to when
110. until the update 1s complete 4 The tally changes from flashing to lighting It indicates that update 15 complete 5 Turn OFF the power and reboot the Camcorder It boots up with new version PDW 700 V1 E Copy the firmware package file extension pkg to the USB memory of the root and plug it into the USB connector of the unit Move the arrow to the DIAGNOSIS category page named ROM VERSION 1 and press and hold the MENU knob SEARCHING PACKAGE FILE blinks about 10 seconds DOSeROM VERSION 1 TOP CKAGE FILE SEARCHING PACKAGE 1 SY 1 SY2K SY2U DRV AT FP When the firmware package file exists in the root the following display appears DOSeROM VERSION 1 TOP gt PACKAGE 1 00 gt 1 10 Press the MENU knob while the arrow is pointing at PACKAGE The YES NO confirmation menu appears PACKAGE UPDATE VERSION UP OK YES NO UPDATING Total time When YES is selected the firmware update starts During the firmware update the tally blinks at 1 Hz UPDATING indicates the firmware being updated and Total time indicates the elapsed time PACKAGE UPDATE CURRENT VERSION 1 00 UPDATING Total time 1 49 7 When the update is completed normally the following message that prompts you to turn on off the power appears Tally changes from blinking to light on PACKAGE UPDATE Valid after power off CURRENT NEW VERSION dz 1 00 COMPLETED To
111. vertical position ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display with respect to the ASPECT MARKER ASPECT SAFE AREA 80 90 92 5 95 Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display with respect to the ASPECT MARKER Range of this setting is different depending upon the above USER BOX WIDTH HEIGHT setting GAIN SW Display Setting GAIN O140GAIN SW gt GAIN LOW GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO TURBO SW IND SHOCKLESS GAIN Item Setting Function GAIN LOW 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set to the L position GAIN MID 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set to the M position GAIN HIGH 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set to the H position GAIN TURBO 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB Sets the gain value of the TURBO GAIN switch TURBO SW IND OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that disables L M H of the GAIN switch while the TURBO GAIN is being selected SHOCKLESS GAIN OFF ON Turns ON OFF the shockless gain This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59 9P and SCAN MODE is set to 23 9P 4 14 PDW 700 V1 E VF SETTING display Setting VF O150VF SETTING gt ZEBRA l OFF ZEBRA SELECT 1 ZEBRA1 DET LVL 10 ZEBRA1 LVL 10 ZEBRA2 DET LVL 100 VF DETAIL LEVEL 0 VF ASPECT
112. white shading value to the default value when shipped from the factory SAW PARA Starts to the auto black shading adjustment Returns the black shading value to the default value when shipped from the factory SAW PARA or 2D Turns ON OFF the function that sets whether to apply 2D black shading area shading Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector Temporarily adjusts the master gain value Function Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector Outputs the clock from the TEST OUT connector Adjusts the transmitting frequency of HD Adjusts the HDCK N output to be 37 0879 MHz Adjusts the transmitting frequency of HD Adjusts the HDCK P output to be 37 125 MHz Adjusts the transmitting frequency of SD Adjusts the SDCK output to be 27 MHz 4 73 CCD ADJUST 1 SO70CCD ADJUST 1 R CCD GAIN gt lt CCD GAIN B CCD GAIN SAW R G B CCD G CCD GAIN B CCD GAIN R TEST SAW GAIN G TEST SAW GAIN B TEST SAW GAIN TEST SAW TEST OUT SELECT CCD ADJUST 2 TEST SAW GAIN TEST SAW GAIN TEST SAW GAIN S 5 EST ES OUT SELECT oooooo Setting 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 OFF ON VBS Y R G B LCD SO80CCD ADJUST 2 R VSUB gt G VSUB B VSUB VSUB OFST VSUB OFST CD H DRIVER D CLOCK PHASE H G B VSUB OFST C A TEST OUT SELECT Item VSUB G VSUB VSUB R VSUB OFST P G VSUB OFST P B
113. 0 1 41 1 54 1 12 7 Circuit Protection Element sii crsscessscsseesseasanenaees 1 54 1 12 8 Precautions for Use of Condensation Sensor 1 55 1 12 9 Precautions for the Battery Connector 1 55 1 12 10 Notes on Repult Parts 1 55 1 12 11 Uileaded Solder siscciccicisrnanicacesnebsoarsaranaariennesanns 1 55 2 Web Site 2 1 XDCAM Web Site Overview seen 2 1 SAS MENU 2 3 2 2 1 Device Information 2 3 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 3 Software 2 5 22 35 Dise 1 0 2 7 2 3 1 Dise Properti 2 7 2 3 2 Thumbnails seasea 2 7 2 4 Maintenance Menu 2 8 2 4 1 2 8 2 4 2 2 13 2 4 3 E E 2 14 2 4 4 2 15 1 3 Error Messages 3 1 Error Messages Overview 3 1 Du eee 3 2 3 2 1 Code and Sub Code 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 Error 3 4 3 2 4 EDOL ob NR 3 5 3 2 5 i 3 5 3 2 6 3 5 3 2 7 DEHODOT A 3 6 3 2 8 3 7 3 2 9 ETIOEDS geen Tenn Les errs 3 7 4 Setup Menu dele
114. 00 V1 E Setup Item RE ROTATION REV RE SPEED DIRECT VALUE SERVICE RESET FACTORY PRESET GAIN DISP MODE KNEE 2ND POINT WHT SHAD CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT R G B WHT H SAW R G B WHT H PARA R G B WHT V SAW R G B WHT V PARA WHITE SAW PARA BLK SHAD CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT R G B BLK H SAW R G B BLK H PARA R G B BLK V SAW R G B BLK V PARA BLACK SAW PARA MASTER BLACK MASTER GAIN TMP AUTO WHT SHADING RESET WHT SHD AUTO BLK SHADING RESET BLK SHD 2D BLACK SHADING TEST OUT SELECT MASTER GAIN TMP F SET OFF OFF EXEC EXEC dB ON VBS VBS 0 0 0 0 ON 0 Depends on the switch setting EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC OFF VBS Depends on the switch setting ALL PRST 010 gt gt gt SCN x X X BIB x x OIOID LENS STD Power OFF SVC X X X X X X OIO X X OIOJOIXIXIX X OIOI OIXIXIX X Initial value Y when R G B ON Y when R G B ON Depends on the GAIN switch setting Y when R G B Depends on the GAIN switch setting 1 101010 X X 4 123 SERVICE Menu 2 4 No 06 07 08 09 4 124 Page VCO ADJUST CCD ADJUST 1 CCD AD
115. 0F AN gt FAN VOLT FIX FAN ROTATION Item Setting FAN VOLT FIX OFF ON FAN ROTATION DET OK NG MEASURE S18OMEASURE TOP MEASUREMENT MODE OFF 5 BLACK 0 MASTER GAIN TMP OdB Item Setting MEASUREMENT OFF S N MODU RESO MODE SENSE REGI DRANG MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 MASTER GAIN TMP 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 4 80 Function Sets the fan mode Normally set this to OFF and use the automatic control OFF Temperature increase inside the unit is detected and the fan is automatically controlled ON The fan is controlled by the fixed voltage 8 V For the operation check of the fan Display only Function Selects the measurement mode OFF It returns to OFF when the main power is turned on S N S N ratio measurement mode MODU Modulation degree measurement mode RESO Resolution power measurement mode SENSE Sensitivity measurement mode Registration measurement mode DRANG Dynamic range measurement mode Adjusts the master black level All of the R G and B signal black levels are adjusted Sets the tentative gain value PDW 700 V1 E FILTER S19o0FILTER CTEMP Item FILTER CTEMP 1 FILTER CTEMP 2 Setting 2000 to 10000 100 1 step Function Sets the color temperature of filter 1 Sets the color temperature of filter 2 FILTER CTEMP 3 FILTER CTEMP 4 2000 to 10000 2000 to 10000 100 1 step 100 1 step
116. 1 8 2 2 Adjustment After Replacing DR 606 c 8 1 8 2 3 Adjustment After Replacing SE 857 Board 8 1 8 3 servol Automatic druide need concio 8 2 8 4 Skew Adjustment 05967 8 3 8 4 1 Tangential Skew Adjustment 8 3 8 4 2 Radial Skew Adjustment zuo 8 5 8 5 Servo2 Automatic Adjustment 8 6 8D Clears Modia rota 8 6 8 7 After Adjustment enseseeeseseseeesesesssesseesseesseeseseseeesses 8 6 3 9 Electrical Alignment Bag 9 1 9 1 1 Fixtures and Equipment 9 1 9 1 2 TMS COUN 9 1 9 1 3 Switch Setting before Adjustment 9 2 9 4 Notes Of Adjustment iocos idiot dou 9 2 9 5 Gray Scale Chart and its Maintenance 9 3 110102 e 9 4 9 2 1 Confirming VCO CONT Frequency 9 4 9 2 2 Modulator Balance Adjustment 9 4 9 2 3 VA Gain AGUS 9 5 9 2 4 Black Shading Adjustment 9 6 9 2 5 White Shading Adjustment 9 7 9 2 6 Black Set AdJ USUIETIL 9 8 9 2 7 9 9 9 2 8 Auto Iris idee Port orit 9 10 9 2 0 RPN Adjustment
117. 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23 9 59 9P HD422 50 16 9 16bit X Default setting X STREO CAM HDSDI AUTO 7 5 Blank 00 DSABL EXEC EXEC EXEC TITLE 00001 C kkk DISABLE DISABLE DSABL EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC 01010101 60 0 01010 010101010 PRST 1 10 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 X 10 101010 SCN KEK x JJ Tl LENS STD Power OFF SVC KEK xk x x x KEK X X O OJOI OIJOJ X OIOJO 010101010 PDW 700 V1 2 PAINT Menu 1 4 No Page 01 SW STATUS 02 WHITE 03 BLACK FLARE 04 GAMMA PDW 700 V1 E Setup Item GAMMA BLACK GAMMA MATRIX KNEE WHITE CLIP DETAIL APERTURE FLARE TEST SAW COLOR TEMP lt A gt C TEMP BAL lt A gt GAIN lt gt lt gt COLOR TEMP lt B gt C TEMP BAL lt B gt R GAIN lt B gt B GAIN lt B gt MASTER BLACK R BLACK B BLACK MASTER FLARE R FLARE G FLARE B FLARE FLARE TEST OUT SELECT GAMMA STEP GAMMA MASTER GAMMA R GAMMA G GAMMA B GAMMA TEST OUT SELECT GAMMA TABLE GAM TABLE STD GAM TABLE HG F SET ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF 3200 3200 Z VBS
118. 111 board before entering the input signal selector analog switch to IC4 of the FP 157 board The information from the FRONT REAR WIRELSS switch position can be obtained by loading the three A D amp D A Signal Format Diagram PDW 700 V1 E signals from the switch connected to each A D terminal in the FP_CPU S1 to S4 FP_CPU sends the switch position information to ITORN_CPU of the SY 355 board and then selects the audio signal by receiving the audio mode information from the ITORN_CPU The selected CH1 and CH2 system signals enter the differential amp IC5 balance to unbalance converter and pass through the head room level switching circuit and balance to unbalance conversion amp for A D Then the signals are applied to the A D converter IC 1 102 24 bit The serial digital audio signal 2 channels converted to digital is entered to VAX IC200 of the DVP 45 board via the MB 1111 board VAX 1 400 selects the entered digital audio signal and sends it as the recorded audio data to AUDIO REC DSP IC800 DSP for audio performs high speed processing for operations such as gain processing during manual operations AUTO processing LIMITER processing 67 Hz notch filter while using the front mic LPF 15 KHz ON OFF internal SG and audio level detection On the other hand the front volume and side volume are connected to the A D terminal in the CPU and the volume voltage is converted into digital with the in
119. 380 A J 6323 430 A J 6325 400 A J 6252 510 A J 6252 520 A 3 184 527 01 3 703 358 08 7 432 114 11 7 600 000 48 9 919 573 01 Commercially available on market Commercially available on market Commercially available on market Name Multiburst chart Grayscale chart Pattern box PTB 500 Stop washer fastening tool Alignment disc PFD23A RS Bit for torque driver M1 4 Bit for torque driver M2 Bit for torque driver M3 Torque driver 3 kg cm 0 3N m Torque driver 6 kg cm 0 6N m Torque driver 10 kg cm 1 0N m Cleaning cloth Parallel pin 2 x 20 Locking compound Sony bond SC608LVZ 180ML Cleaning liquid Memory Stick Flat blade screwdriver 2 3 mm Weight 50 to 100 g Usage Note Camera adjustment Reflective type 4 3 16 9 Camera adjustment on market Transparent type 4 3 Camera adjustment Transparent type 16 9 Camera adjustment Camera adjustment Stop washer installation Servo adjustment and Skew adjustment For tightening screw For tightening screw For tightening screw For tightening screw For tightening screw For tightening screw For cleaning For gear replacement two pins required For preventing screw from being loosened For bonding For cleaning Saving data Up to 4 0 GB Skew adjustment Servo adjustment and Skew adjustment PDW 700 V1 E 1 10 2 Measuring Equipment Use the calibrated equipment or equivalen
120. 3845 G F Function Warning light Lights FP CPU is abnormal Displays thumbnails Lights during the clip playback Lights during the FP CPU initialization Lights when the disc drive is being accessed FRONT REAR WRR Selects the adjustment method of the audio level for audio channel 1 Selects the adjustment method of the audio level for audio channel 2 Audio monitor select switch Turns on when 5P XLR of the AUDIO output of the AXM 38 board is changed to 3P Turns ON OFF the assigned function Changes the color temperature Allocates the switch functions Audio monitor select switch Resets the CPU Brightness adjustment Thumbnail Factory setting FRONT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PDW 700 V1 E Ref No 833 834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5891 Bit 3 4 Name SUB CLIP HOLD CHAPTER RESET SHIFT DISPLAY CTL TC U BIT F RUN SET R RUN RESET REGEN CLOCK DISP SEL EXPAND UP LEFT SET S SEL RIGHT DOWN CLIP MENU Refer to the Operation Manual PDW 700 V1 E Function Plays the clip list Displays the display hold chapter function Resets the time counter display Shift Switches the counter display COUNTER Displays the counter for the elapsed record playback time TC Displays time code U BIT Displays user bit F RUN Continuous time c
121. 4 is replaced solely Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE OTHERS MEMORY SUPPORT UPLOAD TO 1 Aconfirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob UPLOAD TO EEPROM FLASH gt gt gt EEPROM LOAD BACKUP DATA ARE YOU SURE YES NO The result appears UPLOAD TO EEPROM FLASH gt gt gt EEPROM LOAD BACKUP DATA LOADING COMPLETED If failed The following screen appears UPLOAD TO EEPROM FLASH gt gt gt EEPROM LOAD BACKUP DATA LOADING FAILED PDW 700 V1 E 4 11 AUDIO A D Error Correction Before starting adjustment refer to 9 1 Preparation Fixtures and Equipment For more details refer to 1 10 2 Measuring Equipment Signal generator Adjustment Procedure 1 Input the sine wave of 4 dBu of 1 kHz to the AUDIO IN connector and CH2 connector on the rear 5 2 Execute AUDIO A D ADJUST of the VDR MAINTE NANCE page of the SERVICE menu Screen displayed when all CH is are finished AUDIO A D ADJUST Press down the MENU ESCAPE switch when the adjustment is complete Turn off the power of this equipment once and back on again The error is corrected AUDIO A D ADJUST ADJUST START YES 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob The auto adjustment starts The following screens are displayed during the adjustment e Scre
122. 5 1 4 MHz 5 0M 5 0 0 7 MHz 4 0M 4 0 2 0 MHz UC DTL H V RATIO 3 to 4 Sets the horizontal vertical ratio of edge enhancement by the upconverter PDW 700 V1 E 4 55 4 7 FILE Menu For details of the file structure and the method to save the files refer to Section 5 File System When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis in the setting column the setup value is the relative value The range of setting in parenthesis can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu USER FILE Display Operating the USER files FO1OUSER FILE gt USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE USER TOP EXEC PRESET Item USER FILE LOAD Setting Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display USER FILE SAVE Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display F ID symbols and spaces Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item USER PRESET File selection display O STICK ES ES P D O O O O O OOOOO USER FILE LOAD Item MEMORY STICK ACCESS Setting Display only DISPLAY MODE ALL F ID DATA MODEL Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item 001 to 005 4 56 16 characters alphanumeric characters Function Reads the USER file from a Memory Stick For the description of the
123. 5 I O port IC923 924 2 AUDIO level indication The digital signal applied on the DSP is converted to 16 bits and set in the register in DSP ITRON CPU reads and displays it on the color LCD monitor The peak hold time is approx 1400 ms 3 STOP PLAY keys control Each switch on the KY 623 board is connected to PCA 9555 for 12 bus to read the ON OFF information of the switch and turn on the LED The switch information is transferred to ITORON CPU At POWER ON the LED of EJECT REV PLAY FWD are turned on initialized and turned off 4 CTL TC UBIT control The switch information of the three positions 1s connected to the AD terminal of the CPU and processed as the AD signal of the three valued data The ON OFF information of the switches are transferred to the ITRON CPU and displayed on the color LCD monitor 5 Real Time Clock control The Real Time Clock IC IC908 RX 8025NB uses nonadjustable clock for the I2C bus The accuracy is 15 seconds per month When the power is turned on the CPU reads data and send it to ITRON CPU The ITRON CPU sends the time data to the Camera CPU 1 7 of the AT 177 board The viewfinder uses the time data for displaying the time The data for year month day and time of the clock can be changed using the menu The settings for year month day and time are sent to the FP_CPU and the year month day and time are written to the Real Time Clock IC 6 WARNI
124. 6 board since it is not fixed 1 36 Flexible card wire CN1300 X SY 355 board Harness CN1500 A as 22 2 2 m A SY 52 SU hS 1 f 42 1111 boar 4 CN 2947 board Tally cover Protection CN 2946 Moser board CN 2946 CN 3026 board block assembly UN NS IN A Wy Coaxial cable DCP 44 board CN13 CN10 B2 6 x 5 CN14 177 board Connector retainer s ES 215 X ta 2 7 2 s 7 2 s wt 2 ey 7 75 2 27 d lt P N602 x5 Connector cover PDW 700 V1 E 14 Remove the six screws B3 X 8 15 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN2 on the CN 3005 board while slightly lifting up the handle assembly and remove the handle assembly 1 7 5 Front Panel Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the screw and remove the connector retainer Disconnect the CN 2947 board from the connector CN3 on the TG 260 board Note The CN 2947 board is fragile and can be easily broken Handle it with care BONS 5 Disconnect the harnesses from the three connectors CN2 CN4 CN6 of the TG 260 board 6 Remove the four screws B2 6 X 5 and remove the TG 260 board 7 Remove the two screws and remove the stay OUT 8 Remove the tape and peel the GND sheet OUT from
125. 7 Board and TG 260 Board 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the screw B2 6 X 5 and remove the connector retainer 3 Dusconnect the CN 2947 board from the connector CN3 on the TG 260 board and the connector CN2 on the DCP 44 board 4 Dusconnect the harness from the connectors CN2 CN4 CN6 on the TG 260 board 5 Remove the four screws B2 6 X 5 6 Disconnect the TG 260 board from the connector CN1 on the DR 617 board Connector lt 20 a e gt 2 252 j retainer 2 26 5 CN 2947 board DCP 44 board CN1 eg DR 617 board TG 260 board B2 6 x5 7 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 6 of removal 7 28 7 7 2 AT 177 Board and DCP 44 Board 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 2 Remove the CN 2947 board Refer to Section 7 7 1 3 Disconnect the harness form the connector CN602 on the AT 177 board 4 Disconnect the harness form the connector CN3 on the DCP 44 board 5 Disconnect the coaxial cables form the five coaxial connectors 10 CN11 CN12 CN13 and CN14 on the DCP 44 board 6 Remove the two screws B2 6 X 5 7 Disconnect the DCP 44 board The AT 177 board is included from the connector CN101 on the MB 1111 board Yellow CN10 Green CN11 B Blue CN12 QWs White CN13 Red CN14 Coaxial cable DCP 44 board CN13 CN10 B2 6 x5 Au CN11 CN12 CN14 11 board 1252
126. 99 Adjusts the master black level All of the R G and B signal black levels are adjusted MASTER GAIN TMP 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 Sets the temporary master gain 24 30 36 42 dB x When TEST is set the channels switch in relation with TEST OUT SELECT PDW 700 V1 E 4 39 LEVEL ADJUST Display Adjusting output signal level MOSOLEVEL ADJUST VBS VIDEO LEVEL HD Y LEVEL TEST OUT SELECT Item VBS VIDEO LEVEL HD Y LEVEL TEST OUT SELECT Setting 99 to 99 99 to 99 VBS Y R G B LCD Function Adjusts the composite signal video level Adjusts the Y level of the HD component signal Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector BATTERY 1 Display Setting 1 the battery related items 4 1 gt EUM END Item Info BEFORE END Info END Sony BEFORE END Sony END Other BEFORE END Other END DC IN BEFORE END DC IN END DETECTED BATTERY Setting 5 to 100 5 steps 0 1 2 3 4 5 11 5 to 17 0 V 0 1V steps 11 0 to 11 5 V 0 1V steps 11 5 to 17 0 V 0 1V steps 11 0 to 14 0 V 0 1V steps 11 5 to 17 0 V 0 1V steps 11 0 to 14 0 V 0 1V steps Info Sony Other DC IN Function Used when a BP GL65 GL95 Battery Pack is used Sets the remaining power 96 value of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when a BP GL65 GL95 Battery Pack is used Sets the remaining power 96 value of the batte
127. ACKAGE SY1 SY2K SY2U DRV AT FP Setting Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Function Displays the firmware package version Displays the 1 200 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 the SY 355 board Displays the 1 1300 version stored in the 1 1405 and IC 1406 on the SY 355 board Displays the 1 1300 version stored in the 1 1405 and IC 1406 on the SY 355 board Displays the IC600 version stored in the ROM IC602 on the DR 606 board Displays the 1 209 version stored the ROM IC302 IC303 on the AT 177 board Displays the ROM version of the 1 921 on the FP 157 board Can be upgraded with the firmware package file from MENU ROM VERSION 2 Display Displaying the ROM version 4 VERSION 2 LVIS TSYS FAM Item LVIS T5YS TMBP FAM LABY BRDG PIER CAVA Setting Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Function Displays the DVP 45 board s IC400 version stored the ROM IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 Displays the DVP 45 board s IC1000 IC1200 IC1400 version stored in the ROM IC505 1 506 on the SY 355 board Displays the DVP 45 board s IC1000 IC1200 IC1400 version stored in the ROM IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the SY 355 board s IC600 version stored in the RO
128. Assembly 7 9 7 1 6 Replacing No 2 No 3 Gear Assemblies 7 12 7 1 7 Replacing Seek Motor Assembly 7 14 7 1 8 Replacing Spindle 7 15 7 1 9 Removing Reinstalling Lock Release 7 16 7 1 10 Removing Reinstalling LD Motor 7 17 7 2 Removing Reinstalling Mounted Circuit Board of the NN 7 18 7 2 1 dE 7 18 7 2 2 7 19 7 2 3 7 21 7 3 Replacing Fan Motor Drive 7 23 7 4 Replacing Fan Motor 7 24 7 5 Removing Reinstalling CCD Unit 7 25 7 5 1 Removine CCD UG 7 25 7 5 2 Reinstalling CCD Unit 7 26 7 6 Service Action After Replacing the CCD Unit 7 27 7 7 Removing Installing Boards 7 28 7 7 1 CN 2947 Board and TG 260 Board 7 28 7 7 2 AT 177 Board and DCP 44 Board 7 28 7 7 3 DVP 45 Board and SY 355 Board 7 29 7 7 4 ENC 118 Board HP 148 Board and oS muU 7 29 7 7 5 7 30 7 7 6 CN 2946 Board and CN 3026 Board 7 31 7 7 7 K Y 023 Board 8526654463525 8 52250052 7 32 7 7 8 CN 3025 Board and SW 1425 Board 7 32 7 7 9 S OG 09210
129. DI OUT TC OUT EARPHONE 1 20 Matching connectors cables EXT VIEW 1 569 370 12 No Signal Specifications Plug BNC 1 GND GND for BATT OUT 2 connection 3 connection 1 508 084 00 3 pin male 4 IN 11 to 17 V dc Audio cable XLR 5 pin XLR 3 pin 2 m 53 made by Sony or equivalent AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 XLR 3 pin Female 1 508 362 00 XLR 4 pin female 1 566 425 11 round type 4 pin male Mini jack commercially available on market Power tap OE Made by ANTONBAUER Inc 0 dBu 0 775 V rms Specifications 60 dBu 4 dBu selectable High impedance Balanced 33710 or equivalent EXT VIEW 1 508 370 11 XLR 5 pin male 100 BASE TX MIC LINE INPUT 1 766 848 11 round type 8 pin male No Signal Connector 20 pin male 1 MIC LINE G Hirose HR 12 14PA 20PC or equivalent a 2 MIC LINE X IN DV cable 6 pin 4 pin CCFD 3L DV cable 6 pin 6 pin CCF 3L 3 MIC LINE Y IN WRR 855A DWR S01D by Sony only connectable AES EBU INPUT Do not connect with a connector No Signal cable other than above 1 AES EBU 3 AES EBU Y IN BNC type 1 0 V p p 75 Q unbalanced BNC type 0 5 V to 18 V p p 10 kQ BNC type BNC type 1 0 V p p 75 Q unbalanced BNC type SDI 0 8 V 75 Q 270 Mbps 1 5 Gbps BNC type 1 0 V p p 75 Q 8 or more ee to 18 dBu variable 2 AES EBU X IN Specifi
130. Display the SERVICE Menu ON Disable OFF Enable Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory use FRAM initialization Initializes the FRAM AT 177 board OFF Normal mode Factory setting ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PDW 700 V1 E 38 board Ref No Name 101 AUDIO IN CH1 5201 AUDIO IN CH2 5203 INPUT REFERENCE Refer to the Operation Manual DET 45 board Ref No Name S1 SW DR 606 board S600 Ref No Name S600 System reset PDW 700 V1 E Function LINE AES EBU MIC CH1 select switch LINE AES EBU MIC CH2 select switch Sets the input reference level 4 dB Sets the input reference level to 4 dB OdB Sets the input reference level to 0 dB 3 dB Sets the input reference level to 3 dB Function Color LCD turn switch Function Factory use Factory setting 4 dB Factory setting Factory setting 1 25 DVP 45 board Each LED is used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process 5900 1900 and 1901 are used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process They are all set to off when shipped from the factory 1 26 PDW 700 V1 E CN 2946 board Ref No Name Function Factory setting D1 TALLY Back tally indicator Lights during recording when the TALLY switch is turned 51 TALLY switch Turns ON OFF the TALLY indicator ON Refer to the Op
131. Displays the audio level DISP DISC OFF ON Displays the remaining amount of disc DISP IRIS OFF ON Displays the lens iris value 1 The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY ASPECT switch on the viewfinder 2 Regarding the messages that indicate the contents of setup change and the messages that indicate progress result of adjustments only a part of the display items can be selected or no display at all can also be selected by setting the display mode Correspondence between the conditions of the unit when the message is displayed and the display modes are shown as follows Message is displayed X Message is not displayed The conditions that necessitate Message Display mode showing of the message setting 1 2 3 When FILTER selection is changed FILTER ns 1 2 3 4 X X When GAIN setting is changed GAIN n n 3dB 0dB 3dB 6dB 9dB X X 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB 30 dB 36 dB 42 dB When the WHITE BAL switch setting WHITE n n A CH CH PRESET X X is changed or ATW Auto Tracking White balance RUN When the OUTPUT DCC switch is DCC ON or OFF X set DCC ON or DCC OFF When the shutter speed shutter SS 1 100 or 1 125 1 250 1 500 X mode setting is changed 1 1000 1 2000 ECS EVS When BLACK balance WHITE balance example WHITE OK X adjustment is in progress 3 It is also displayed for about seconds when the SHUTTER switch is set t
132. Duplex Full Auto v License Registration UPnP Disable Disable v Execute Item Setting Default Function Hostname Character string Serial No of PDW 700 Sets a host name Domain Character string Sets a domain name IP Address 192 168 1 10 Sets an IP address See below Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 255 0 Sets a subnet mask See below Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Sets a default gateway See below DNS1 Sets a DNS server 1 DNS2 Sets a DNS server 2 DHCP Enable Disable Disable Sets whether to automatically acquire an IP address on the DHCP server Enable Enables automatic acquisition If the server does not respond in 30 seconds the IP address is set by Auto IP Disable Disables automatic acquisition MAC Address Display only Displays MAC address Link Speed AUTO 10Mbps 100Mbps Auto Sets a communication speed Duplex AUTO Full Duplex Auto Sets a communication mode Half Duplex Auto Full Duplex Full duplex communication Half Duplex Half duplex communication UPnP Enable Disable Disable Sets whether to use a UPnP Enable Use Disable Not use Procedure 1 Enter the IP address or the subnet mask or the default gateway Pressing Reset clears the Input window 2 Press Execute to change the setting 2 14 PDW 700 V1 E 2 4 4 License Registration License registration of sof
133. E page as the clip name PLAN Assigns the title that is described in the readout planning Metadata as the clip name 1 user defined name can be given to the clip list via FAM FTP 2 The title display on the VF DISP screen can be switched from Settings of the Disc Menu Planning Clip Name in Clip Info Area setting 4 24 PDW 700 V1 E SELECT FUNCTION Display LETTER BOX FOCUS MAG function ENABLE DISABLE O29OSELECT FUNCTION TOP gt LETTER BOX SABLE FOCUS MAG DISABLE HD2SD PHASE OH SYNCRO This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23 9P Item Setting Function LETTER BOX DISABLE ENABLE Enable the selection of LETTR LETTER BOX in the DOWN CON MODE item on the OUTPUT 2 page Breakup may occur in output signals and in the video and audio of this unit for about 5 to 10 seconds immediately after this setting is changed FOCUS MAG DISABLE ENABLE Enable the assignment of the FOCUS MAG function to the ASSIGN switches Breakup may occur in output signals and in the video and audio of this unit for about 5 to 10 seconds immediately after this setting is changed HD SD PHASE OH Display only Displayed only when LETTER BOX and FOCUS MAG is set to SYNCRO DISABLE When ENABLE is selected in LETTER BOX or FOCUS MAG O29OSELECT FUNCTION TOP gt LETTER BOX SABLE FOCUS MAG ENABLE HD2SD PHASE DELAYED REFOHD Y PHASE DELAYED Item Setting F
134. EA Item Setting Function SYSTEM FREQUENCY 59 9P NTSC AREA Sets the format when the power is turned on next 50P PAL AREA time SCAN MODE 59 9P 23 9P Sets the camera shooting frequency When SCAN MODE is set to 23 9P the video output signals and video recording signals of this unit are 59 9 Hz signals after 2 3 pulldown HEC FORMAT See the right column Sets the recording format Setting value HD422 50 HD420 HQ HD420 SP IMX 50 IMX 40 IMX 30 DVCAM Setting value in can be selected when CBKZ MDO1 SD Record and Playback Software is installed Cannot be selected when SYSTEM LIE is set to 720 and SCAN MODE is set to 23 9P COUNTRY NTSC JJAREA NTSC AREA NTSC J AREA NTSC area Japan PAL AREA NTSC AREA NTSC area for areas other than Japan PAL AREA PAL area 1 The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting 2 Displayed only when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59 9P 4 22 PDW 700 V1 E SOURCE SEL Display Setting to make the front microphone monaural or stereo O250SOURCE SEL gt FRONT MIC SELECT VIDEO SOURCE EXT VIDEO SOURCE WIDE MODE EXT SETUP REMOVE Item Setting FRONT MIC SELECT MONO STREO REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM EXT EXT VIDEO SOURCE VBS HDSDI SDSDI WIDE MODE EXT AUTO 16 9 SETUP REMOVE 0 0 7 5 Function Selects MONO STEREO when stereo microphone is connected Switches the recording target video between the
135. EGMENT gt tery Sca OV 6 4 3 2 1 gt 010 0 SEGMENT NO NO NO NO Item Setting TYPE DETECTION AUTO OTHER SEGMENT 7 to NO 1 11 0 to 17 0 V 0 1 V steps Function AUTO Automatically detects the type of the battery OTHER Always judges the battery to be of the OTHER type regardless of the actual battery type When the battery type judgment is OTHER sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No 7 should turn off When TYPE DETECTION the BATTERY 2 page is set to AUTO any batteries other than Sony BP series batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery systems are classified as Others AUDIO 1 Display Setting 1 on audio MOGOAUDIO 1 TOP gt FRONT MIC SELECT eSTREO AUDIO 4 MODE SW REAR XLR AUTO OFF FRONT MIC REF v 900dB HEAR MIC REF 6048 MIN ALARM VOL SP ATT LEVEL HEADPHONE OUT Item Setting FRONT MIC SELECT MONO STREO AUDIO CH3 4 MODE CH1 2 SW REAR XLR AUTO OFF ON FRONT MIC REF 60 50 40 dB REAR MIC REF 60 50 40 dB MIN ALARM VOL OFF SET SP ATT LEVEL OFF 3 6 9 dB HEADPHONE OUT STREO MONO PDW 700 V1 E Function Selects whether to make the front microphone monaural or stereo Selects the input signal to be recorded on CH3 4 1 2 Same signals as CH1 and CH2 SW The input signals that are selecte
136. EKSELET ER APENT OG LASENE UTE AV FUNKSJON IKKE STIRR INN STRALEN RNING KLASS 2 LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD OCH SPARRMEKANISMER AR FRIGJORDA TITTA INTE IN LASERSTRALEN VARO LUOKAN 2 LASERSATEILYA AVATTUNA JA SISAISET LUKITUKSET POISTETTUINA ALA KATSO SATEESEEN a FTF BASES DEMAR CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure X RAY RADIATION WARNING Be sure that parts replacement in the high voltage block and adjustments made to the high voltage circuits are carried out precisely in accordance with the procedures given in this manual JWR 9 2 3 AKEE 2 Rrouf etE23d5 5 aZ AXE FOM 7 USCS cu URpSLRU ZAUmTZ5 EROT TS ESV For safety do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to the following port s Network connector Follow the instructions for the above port s PDW 700 V1 E Table of Contents Manual Structure Putcposc or this mantal n Pa o Fo ER REOR C ERN RS e Td 5 Related YPEUEEIE 5 1 Service Overview l 1 Locations of Main Parts seccccssssescsantonuenscnetnnoedanierenssuaneateds 1 1 1 1 1 Locations of the Printed Wiring Boards
137. EM B FLARE Spec Minimize the carrier leakage at portion C B ch Repeat steps 4 and 5 several times and minimize the carrier leakage at portion C 9 2 8 Auto Iris Adjustment Fixtures and Equipment SD waveform monitor Black and white monitor Grayscale chart Preparation Connect an SD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector Lens IRIS AUTO e OUTPUT DCC switch inside panel CAM ON Shoot a grayscale chart in the full underscanned monitor frame Adjustment Procedure L On the menu adjust as follows MENU MAINTENANCE PAGE AUTO IRIS 2 ITEM IRIS APL RATIO Spec Set AUTO iris operation depending on the application Automatic iris operation mode setting can be set in the range of the average level operation to peak to peak level operation of the video signal IRIS APL RATIO MIN gt peak to peak level only IRIS APL RATIO gt average level only On the menu adjust as follows MENU MAINTENANCE PAGE AUTO IRIS 2 ITEM IRIS LEVEL Spec A 100 2 IRE NTSC 700 14 mV PAL the menu adjust as follows MENU MAINTENANCE PAGE AUTO IRIS 2 ITEM IRIS SPEED Spec Adjust to the desired operation speed of auto Iris On the menu set as follows MENU MAINTENANCE PAGE AUTO IRIS 2 ITEM CLIP HIGH LIGHT ON or OFF Spec Set the level to the desired AUTO iris PDW 700 V1 E 9 2 9 RPN Adjustment Residual Point
138. EM FREQUENCY is set to 23 9 2 These items can be loaded when NETWORK DATA is set to ON on the ALL FILE page 4 118 Page AUTO IRIS 2 GENLOCK ND COMP AUTO SHADING APR NETWORK UP CONVERTER Setup IRIS WINDOW IRIS WINDOW IND IRIS LEVEL IRIS APL RATIO IRIS VAR WIDTH IRIS VAR HEIGHT IRIS VAR H POS IRIS VAR V POS IRIS SPEED CLIP HIGH LIGHT GENLOCK GL HD PHASE GL SD PHASE REFERENCE ND OFFSET ADJUST CLEAR ND OFFSET AUTO BLK SHADING RESET BLK SHD TEST OUT SELECT MASTER GAIN TMP APR APR SLS APR PRESET DHCP IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK DEF GATEWAY LINK SPEED DUPLEX 0 51 2 DNS2 UPnP NET CFG RESET UP CON PROCESS UC DETAIL LEVEL UC CRISPENING UC DETAIL LIMIT UC LV DEPEND LVL F SET OFF 240 135 OFF ON 0 0 INTERNAL OFF EXEC EXEC EXEC VBS Depends on the switch setting EXEC EXEC EXEC DSABL 192 168 1 10 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 AUTO AUTO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DSABL EXEC ADPT 0 0 0 0 UC DTL FREQUENCY 5 0 UC DTL H V RATIO 0 1010 0 0 010 0 0 01 10 12 E X 0101010 1010101010 01010101010 0 JJ o OJjO O0 OO OO0 OoOlO0 OoO O OTOOTO 09 SCN xX x O O x IX X X JJ 7 X LENS STD Powe
139. ENS FILE 1 LENS FILE 2 LENS FILE 3 MEMORY STICK Setup Item LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE F ID SOURCE LENS NO OFFSET LENS AUTO RECALL S No L ID L MF LENS M VMOD LENS CENTER LENS CENTER V TEST OUT SELECT LENS R FLARE LENS G FLARE LENS B FLARE LENS W R OFST LENS W B OFST SHADING CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT LENS R G B H SAW LENS R G B H PARA LENS R G B V SAW LENS R G B V PARA M S FORMAT M S IN gt JUMP TO F SET EXEC EXEC No Offset MEMORY 1 EXEC OFF Depends on the Lens Depends on the Lens Depends on the Lens ALL Q OQJ X PRST SCN XIX X REF X LENS STD Power OFF SVC X X OjO OJIOJIO x OOJ O OJO 10 X OJ X X xX Xxx OI XIX X x X Y when R G B Y when R G B Q OQJ X xXx PDW 700 V1 5 DIAGNOSIS Menu 1 2 No Page 01 HOURS METER 02 TIME DATE 03 ROM VERSION 1 04 VERSION 2 05 ROM VERSION 3 PDW 700 V1 E Setup Item OPERATION LASER OPERATION rst SPINDLE rst LOADING rst SEEK rst ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY PACKAGE SY1 SY2K SY2U DRV AT FP LVIS TSYS TMBP FAM LABY BRDG PIER CAVA DSPO DSP2 PRXA F SET 000000H 000000 000000H 000000H 000000 000000H EXEC ALL
140. EST OUT connector 4 5 LCD Display Setting the LCD monitor OO040LCD gt LCD COLOR LCD MARKER amp ZEBRA Item LCD COLOR LCD MARKER amp ZEBRA Setting 99 to 99 OFF ON Function Adjusts the LCD color Turns ON OFF the marker and zebra display in the LCD monitor REC FUNCTION Display Setting the Picture cache function OO5OREC FUNCTION TOP OFF XCHG CACHE OFF ONT REC Item CACHE INTVAL REC DISC EXCHG CACHE CLIP CONT REC 4 6 OFF Setting OFF CACHE A INT M INT OFF ON OFF ON Function Sets the CACHE REC function OFF Not used CACHE CACHE REC Auto interval REC M INT Manual interval REC Turns ON OFF the function that even if you run out of free disc capacity while recording you can continue recording The unit s internal memory is not unlimited so the video and audio may be interrupted if it takes too long to exchange the disc Turns ON OFF the clip continuous rec function PDW 700 V1 E When CACHE is selected in CACHE INTVAL OO5OREC FUNCTION TOP gt CACHE INTVAL REC CACHE REC TIME 0 25 01 Item Setting Function CACHE REC TIME 0 25 2 45 4 65 6 85 8 105 Sets the recording time of CACHE 18 20 28 30 SEC second When A INT is selected in CACHE INTVAL REC OO50REC FUNCTION TOP gt CACHEYINTVAL REC INT TAKE TOTAL TIME
141. EW 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob If failed The following screen appears Perform optical drive alignment Refer to Section 8 SKEW CHECK START YES NO CHECKING ERROR A warm up screen appears If five minutes has already passed since power ON this screen appears just for a moment SKEW WARMING UP REMAINED 0299 SEC ARE YOU PASS YES NO If the power has been supplied to the unit for over five minutes you can select YES and proceed to the next step even after you turn off the power and then turn it back on 3 Aconfirmation screen appears when 0000 SEC 18 displayed 4 96 PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 17 LENS CLEANING This menu allows you to clean the lens Before cleaning be sure to unload the disc from the unit If the disc remains at the loading slot cleaning will not be finished completely Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK LENS CLEANING 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob LENS CLEANING PLEASE REMOVE DISC COMPLETELY CLEANING START YES NO Check that no disc 15 remaining in the unit 3 Check that no disc 1 remaining and then press the MENU knob The result appears LENS CLEANING FINISHED CLEANING PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 18 SERVO 1 This menu allows you to adjust the offset and gain of the signal circuit
142. G GAM TABLE STD 1 to 6 When HG is selected in GAMMA TABLE GAMMA TABLE HG GAM TABLE HG 4 HG4609 Item Setting GAM TABLE HG 1 to 4 4 30 Function Turns ON OFF the gamma correction function Sets the master gamma correction curve for each step Adjusts the master gamma correction curve Adjusts the R gamma correction curve Adjusts the G gamma correction curve Adjusts the B gamma correction curve Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector Selects the gamma type STD Standard gamma HG Hyper gamma Selects the standard gamma type 1 Corresponds to SD camcorder X 4 5 gain X 3 5 gain Corresponds to SMPTE 240M Corresponds to ITU R709 X 5 0 gain O1 W rn Function Selects the hyper gamma type 1 325 100 2 46096 100 3 325 109 4 46096 109 BLACK GAMMA Display Adjusting black gamma POS5OBLACK GAMMA gt BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAM RANGE MASTER BLK GAMMA R BLACK GAMMA G BLACK GAMMA B BLACK GAMMA TEST OUT SELECT Item Setting BLACK GAMMA OFF ON BLACK GAM RANGE LOW L MID H MID HIGH MASTER BLK GAMMA 99 to 99 R BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 G BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 B BLACK GAMMA 99 to 99 TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD KNEE Display Adjusting knee POGOKNEE gt KNEE KNEE KNEE KNEE KNEE WHITE WHITE Item Setting KNEE OFF ON KNEE POINT 50 to 109 0 0 1 step KNEE SLOPE 99 to 99 KNEE SATURATION OFF
143. HOLE 2 3 4 NH The following describes four procedures Moving DOWN Position to EJECT Position Moving DOWN Position to STBY Position Moving STBY Position to EJECT Position Moving STBY Position to DOWN Position PDW 700 V1 E Moving DOWN Position to EJECT Position 1 The item selection screen appears 2 Press the MENU knob LOADER MOVE TO EJECT POS MOVE TO STBY POS POSITION DOWN REC INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR DOWN SENSOR HOLE 2 3 4 A confirmation screen appears 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob LOADER MOVE TO EJECT POS CHECK START YES NO The result appears The loader moves to the EJECT position to eject the cartridge LOADER Appears just for a moment POSITION EJECT REC INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE If failed The following screen appears LOADER CHECKING ERROR POSITION DOWN REC INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR DOWN SENSOR HOLE 2 3 4 Moving DOWN Position to STBY Position EN The item selection screen appears 2 Select MOVE TO STBY POS by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob LOADER MOVE TO EJECT POS MOVE TO STBY POS POSITION DOWN INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR DOWN SENSOR HOLE 2 3 4 A confirmation screen appears 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob LOADER MOVE TO STBY POS CHECK START YES NO The result appe
144. IME PRE LIGHTING NUMBER OF FRAME TRIGGER INTERVAL DISC EXCHG CACHE CLIP CONT REC ASSIGN SW lt 1 gt ASSIGN SW lt 2 gt ASSIGN SW lt 3 gt ASSIGN SW lt 4 gt ASSIGN SW lt RET gt COLOR TEMP SW ZOOM SPEED RETURN VIDEO ETHERNET USB i LINK FAM REC AUDIO OUT TEST OUT SAVE OFF 0 28 5MIN 5SEC OFF j M OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF RET T5600 20 OFF DSABL DSABL ON ALL PRST Initial value is 2 when SYSTEM LINE is 720 REC FORMAT is HD422 HD420 4 106 SCN x LENS STD Power OFF SVC X X X x when R G B It is set to 01010000000 OFF when INT M INT is selected PDW 700 V1 OPERATION Menu 2 5 No Page 08 VFDISP 1 09 VF DISP 2 10 VFDISP3 11 Tl LED 12 MARKER 1 PDW 700 V1
145. IT DTL WHT LIMIT DTL BLK LIMIT DTL V BLK LMT V DTL CREATION R G H V CONTROL MODE V 09 SD DETAIL SD DETAIL OFF SD DETAIL LEVEL 0 SD CRISPENING SD DTL WHT LIMIT SD DTL BLK LIMIT SD LEVEL DEPEND ON SD LV DEPEND LVL 0 SD DTL FREQUENCY 0 SD DTL H V RATIO 0 SD CROSS COLOR 0 Initial value is 105 0 when COUNTRY is set to PAL AREA 60 1000 0 0 OO OJOJO OJOJ 0 0 0 0 6010 100010 000000 KEK LK EK LK LK LK LK EK KL KK OUO OS OO Oe 5 HO LO ROO OX HEX TO BEY EO 00010401 019 4 112 PDW 700 V1 E PAINT Menu 3 4 No Page 10 SKIN DETAIL 11 MTX LINEAR 12 MTXMULTI 13 V MODULATION 14 SATURATION 15 NOISE SUPPRESS PDW 700 V1 E Setup Item SKIN DETAIL ALL SKIN DETECT SKIN AREA IND SKIN DTL SELECT SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL LVL SKIN DTL SAT SKIN DTL HUE SKIN DTL WIDTH MATRIX MATRIX USER MATRIX PRESET MATRIX PRST SEL MATRIX USER R G MATRIX USER R B MATRIX USER G R MATRIX USER G B MATRIX USER MATRIX USER MATRIX MATRIX MUL
146. JUST 2 ADJUST Setup Item TEST OUT SELECT CLK OUT SELECT HDCK NTSC AREA HDCK PAL AREA SDCK R CCD GAIN G CCD GAIN B CCD GAIN R TEST SAW GAIN G TEST SAW GAIN B TEST SAW GAIN TEST SAW TEST OUT SELECT 50 G VSUB VSUB R VSUB OFST P G VSUB OFST P B VSUB OFST P CCD H DRIVER AD CLOCK PHASE TEST OUT SELECT CCD REGI B CCD REGI H DCP REGI B DCP REGI DCP REGI PULSE TEST OUT SELECT F SET VBS OFF VBS Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value VBS Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value Factory adjustment value OFF VBS ALL PRST X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A X A SCN X X REF xxl gt X X LENS STD Power OFF SVC X XX X O X Y when Q R G B Initial value Y when R G B Y when R G B Initial value Y when R G B PDW 700 V1 E SERVICE Menu 3 4 No Pag
147. K HDO1 HD SD SDI Input Board is required for SD SDI HD SDI signal input 4 Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the DIGITAL EXTENDER is switched ON OFF POWER SAVE Display Setting the POWER SAVE function OO7OPOWER SAVE gt ETHERNET USB i LINK FAM AUDIO OUT TEST OUT SAVE Item Setting ETHERNET USB DSABL ENABL i LINK FAM DSABL ENABL REC AUDIO OUT EE SAVE TEST OUT SAVE OFF ON The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting PDW 700 V1 E Function Enables or disables the network connector and USB connector Enables or disables the i LINK connector FAM function Puts the AUDIO OUT connector in EE or SAVE mode Switches the TEST OUT connector power saving function on and off ON No signals are output if a cable is not connected OFF Signals are always output regardless of whether a cable is connected 4 9 VF DISP 1 Display Setting the Viewfinder screen displays O080VF DISP1 VF DISP VF DISP MODE U U U U U U J J 05052 0202 0000 00 COD UU UUUUUU Item Setting Function VF DISP OFF ON Turns ON OFF the Viewfinder display VF DISP MODE 1 2 3 Sets the display mode DISP EXTENDER OFF ON Displays the extender DISP FILTER OFF ON ND filter type DISP WHITE OFF ON Displays the white balance memory DISP GAIN OFF ON Displays the gain setup value DISP SHUTTER OFF ON Displays the shutter soeed and ECS mode indicator DISP AUDIO OFF ON
148. K OUT SEL to HDCK N The signal of the following specification is output from the TEST OUT connector Specification 37 087 912 70 Hz When the signal 1s outside the specification perform the following adjustment Change the setting value of HDCK NTSC AREA so that the signal meets within the specification When the specification is met press the MENU knob and fix the value 2 HDCK P adjustment Set CLK OUT SEL to HDCK P The signal of the following specification is output from the TEST OUT connector Specification 37 125 000 70 Hz When the signal is outside the specification perform the following adjustment Change the setting value of HDCK PAL AREA so that the signal meets within the specification When the specification is met press the MENU knob and fix the value 3 SDCK adjustment Set CLK OUT SEL to SDCK The signal of the following specification is output from the TEST OUT connector Specification 27 000 000 50 Hz When the signal is outside the specification perform the following adjustment Change the setting value of SDCK so that the signal meets within the specification When the specification is met press the MENU knob and fix the value 4 Completing adjustment After adjusting through 3 set CLK OUT SEL to OFF 9 2 2 Modulator Balance Adjustment Preparation Put the unit into the SERVICE mode Refer to 4 1 2 How to Display the SERVICE WHITE BAL switch inside panel
149. Kassera anvant batteri enligt gallande foreskrifter VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin Havita kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT This Professional Disc Camcorder is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Laser Diode Properties Wavelength 400 to 410 nm Emission duration Continuous Laser output power 135 mW of pulse 65 mW max of CW Standard IEC60825 1 2001 GEFAHR Bei ge ffnetem Laufwerk und besch digter oder deaktivierter Verriegelung tritt ein unsichtbarer Laserstrahl aus Direkter Kontakt mit dem Laserstrahl ist unbedingt zu vermeiden This label is located insidethe outside panel For U S A of the unit CAUTION Laser radiation when open and interlock defeated DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM For EUROPE CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER DE CLASSE 2 EN CAS D OUVERTURE ET DE DESACTIVATION DES VERROUS NE PAS REGARDER LE FAISCEAU VORSICHT KLASSE 2 LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GE FFNET UND SPERREN AUSSER FUNKTION NICHT IN DEN STRAHL SEHEN ADVARSEL LASERSTRALING AF KLASSE 2 VED ABNING OG OMGAELSE AF LASEANORDNINGER STIR IKKE IND LYSSTRALEN ADVARSEL LASERSTRALING KLASSE 2 NAR D
150. L Item Setting DISPLAY MODE ALL F ID DATE MODEL MEM 1 to 5 Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item PDW 700 V1 E Function Switches the attributes when displaying a file stored ina Memory Stick For a file stored in the main unit the file ID is displayed when ALL F ID DATE is selected When MODEL is selected the format when the file was saved is displayed Select the target read file from which data is read or select the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored When the file does not exist the message NO FILE is displayed When saving the data in a new file select NEW FILE 4 59 File selection display When reading file from Memory Stick when saving file to a Memory Stick POO SCENE RECALL ESC DISPLAY MODE ALL OL 1 2 O OO 3 C C O 4 5 gx uM zo O O O O O OO O00 01306 m SCENE RECALL Item Setting MEMORY STICK ACCESS Display only DISPLAY MODE ALL F ID DATE MODEL 001 to 005 Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item 5FILE LOAD Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item 5FILE SAVE Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item 4 60 OOOOO TU OOOOO POO SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE 1 ae a 2 0100100000 3 LILDIDIEIEIEIDIEIE 4 5
151. L BLOCK FOCUS ACTUATOR A confirmation screen appears Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob FOCUS ACTUATOR CHECK START YES NO Check that the 2 axis actuator moves several times f the actuator does not move or its movement is not smooth the harness may be connected improperly or the optical block may be defective The result appears FOCUS ACTUATOR CHECKING If failed The following screen appears FOCUS ACTUATOR CHECKING ERROR 4 93 4 10 12 TRACKING ACTUATOR 4 10 13 SA ACTUATOR This menu allows you to check the tracking of the 2 axis This menu allows you to check the SA actuator motor actuator Menu hierarchy Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK CHECK OPTICAL BLOCK OPTICAL BLOCK TRACKING ACTUATOR 1 confirmation screen appears 2 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob TRACKING ACTUATOR CHECK START YES NO Check that the 2 axis actuator moves several times If the actuator does not move or its movement is not smooth the harness may be connected improperly or the optical block may be defective The result appears TRACKING ACTUATOR CHECKING If failed The following screen appears TRACKING ACTUATOR CHECKING ERROR 4 94 SA ACTUATOR A confirmation screen appears Select YES
152. LOG 003 0 ERROR XX XXX ERROR XX XXX ERROR XX XXX ERROR XX XXX ERROR XX XXX ERROR XX XXX ERROR XX XXX x MMMM MM TT TT T OO mm Mmm mMm mMm TT TT ITI lt C00 O0O00000 Selected log No total number of logs 4 Press the MENU knob to display the detailed menu DISPLAY ERROR LOG ERROR 003 0027 DATE MM DD HH MM SS 00 00 00 00 x2 2008 MM DD HH MM SS x3 x1 Date when the error has occurred 2 TC value when the error has occurred 3 Current data and time 4 104 Clearing the Error Log Normally do not clear the error log The error log is useful when trying to fix problems that have occurred The error log can contain important information for solving these problems Procedure 1 Execute SERVICE SUPPORT from the page of VDR MAINTENANCE of the SERVICE menu SERVICE SUPPORT gt DISPLAY ERR LOG CLEAR ERR LOG EXEC EXEC 2 Turn the MENU knob to select CLEAR ERR LOG and press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to select YES or NO and press the MENU knob CLEAR ERROR LOG CLEAR ALL DATA YES Do not clear the log NO The screen returns to the SERVICE SUPPORT menu Clear the log YES The screen changes to the following screen and returns to the SERVICE SUPPORT menu after two seconds CLEAR ERROR LOG EXECUTING PDW 700
153. M IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the ROM version of the IC1000 on the DCP 44 Displays the SY 355 board s IC900 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the DVP 45 board s IC1900 version stored in the ROM IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 Displays the DVP 45 board s IC200 version stored in the ROM IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 1 Can be upgraded with the firmware package file from MENU 2 Displayed only when OPERATION MENU POWER SAVE i LINK FAM is set to ENABL 4 66 PDW 700 V1 E ROM VERSION 3 Display Displaying the ROM version gt DO5OROM VERSION TOP DSPO X XX DSP 2 X PRXA Item Setting DSPO Display DSP2 Display Display Can be upgraded with the firmware package file from MENU Function only Displays the DVP 45 board s IC800 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board only Displays the DVP 45 board s IC801 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board only Displays the DVP 45 board s IC900 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board DEV STATUS Display Checking the communication function of each device 2DOGODEV D A EEPROM FRAM FAN LSI SCI PDW 700 V1 E STATUS EEPROM CN OK DCP OK DR OK FRAM AT Display Function I O Status display of MS FP CN DCP VF
154. M TEST CHECKING ERROR 4 91 4 10 9 OUT LIM TEST 4 10 10 SPINDLE MOTOR AUTO TEST This menu allows you to move the optical block assembly This menu allows you to check spindle motor operations to the outer limit position of the disc Menu hierarchy Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK CHECK SPINDLE MOTOR SLIDER OUT LIM TEST 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Press the MENU knob 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK the MENU knob SPINDLE MOTOR AUTO TEST OUT LIM TEST CHECK START YES A confirmation screen appears NO 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob The result appears AUTO TEST Check visually that the optical block assembly moves to the outer limit position CHECK START YES NO OUT LIM TEST CHECKING OK A screen to insert a cartridge appears AUTO TEST failed INSERT DISC The following screen appears OUT LIM TEST CHECKING ERROR 4 Insert a cartridge The result appears AUTO TEST CHECKING 4 92 PDW 700 V1 If failed The following screen appears PDW 700 V1 E AUTO TEST CHECKING ERROR 4 10 11 FOCUS ACTUATOR This menu allows you to check the focus of the 2 axis actuator Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK OPTICA
155. MBit SRAM 1C3056 and 1 MBit FRAM IC308 2 A D input of the CPU The A D port equipped to the CPU is connected to the following signal lines and monitored CC position ND position temperature IRIS position of a camera lens ZOOM position and mic volume level 3 Internal communication The serial communication includes intercommunication with the BleConSh IC on the DCP 44 board the writing controls to the character generator IC and intercommunication with the disc The parallel communication is equipped with the 8 bit data line the total 11 bit address line A0 A7 A14 A16 control line clock XRD XWR OE DIR CS and QWERTY ZXCV TG In addition the intercommunication is performed with EEPROM on the DCP 44 board the DAC and I O port IC for the video signal and the I O port IC on the FP 157 board with the I2C line that is installed directly to the CPU 4 Memory stick circuit The memory stick controller IC IC610 is driven at 16 MHZ and the two way communication and the clock signal are directly connected from the connector CN602 to the memory stick connector of the MS 86 board via the coaxial harness This is compatible with the Memory Stick PRO DUO 5 External communication The 2 channel serial communication driver CXD9093R IC411 is equipped and performs external communication with the remote control unit RM B150 B750 6 ROM jig connector CN601 The connector CN101 that can be connected to the jig fo
156. MENU knob to move to the SERVICE SUPPORT screen Function Deletes the RPN data registered at ABB APR or AUTO CONCEAL Deletes the RPN data registered at ABB APR SLS or AUTO CONCEAL2 Returns all RPN data to the state of factory shipment Data registered manually are also deleted Executes the AUTO RPN correction The Black Level adjustment is not executed Executes the AUTO RPN correction For SLS ON Black Level adjustment is not executed The execution time for this function is about 30 minutes More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low Function Adjustment of the AUDIO A D Error Correction value Refer to 4 11 AUDIO A D Error Correction for details Adjustment of the AUDIO D A Error Correction value Refer to 4 12 AUDIO D A Error Correction for details Adjustment of the AUDIO LEVEL Volume inside panel Error Correction value Refer to 4 13 AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation for details Adjustment of the Battery END Detecting Voltage Refer to 4 14 Adjusting Battery End Detection Voltage for details For the description of DRIVE MAINTE screen see below Displaying the VDR system error log and setting clear Refer to 4 15 SERVICE SUPPORT Menu for details PDW 700 V1 E DRIVE MAINTE Screen Menu CHECK ADJUST ERROR LOGGER OTHERS PDW 700 V1 E Item DEVICE LOADER SLIDER SPINDLE MOTOR OPTICAL BLOCK LENS CLEANING SERV
157. Meter Software Version Disc menu Disc Properties Thumbnails Maintenance menu Network Account Software Update License Registration Connecting to XDCAM Website Tools Equipment Required Personal computer referred to as PC hereafter Network cable crossover or straight through Setting the Camcorder Change the ETHERNET USB of power save item in OPERATION menu to ENABL refer to Operation manual Set the network item in MAINTENANCE menu refer to Operation manual Procedure 1 Connect the camcorder to the host PC using one of the following ways Refer to Connection Diagram Directly connect the camcorder to the host PC Connect the camcorder to the host PC through a network device such as a hub 2 Start the web browser of the host PC Enter http 192 168 1 10 in the Address bar The underlined part is the IP address of the unit Use Internet Explorer for the web browser of the host PC Other web browsers may not function correctly 3 Enter admin for User name and pdw 700 for Password and then click User name and User password can be changed on the Account page 4 The XDCAM top page appears Click a menu you want to browse on the left frame PDW 700 V1 E 2 1 Connection Diagram Direct connection of a camcorder single to the host PC D Network Cable Network connector Connection of the camcorder to the host PC through the other
158. N xX gt x LENS X X STD Power OFF X SVC Initial value Dependson X the GAIN switch setting Initial value X Y when R G B PDW 700 V1 E Section 5 File System 5 1 Structure of File System The PDW 700 can save data modifications made in the setup menu as files in the main unit itself and in a memory stick The file system consists of the USER FILE ALL FILE SCENE FILE REFERENCE FILE and LENS FILE For details of each file refer to 4 1 Setup Menus USER FILE The USER file contains the customized USER menu items and its setups Up to 100 files can be saved in a memory stick When this file is saved in a memory stick the USER menu can be set instantly to the users preferred setup by reading the USER file data from the memory stick ALL FILE The ALL file contains the setups of all menus Up to 100 files can be saved in a memory stick By saving the ALL file in a memory stick after adjusting the first camera the user can instantly set the same adjust ment setup as the first camera to the second and subsequent cameras by reading the ALL file data from the memory stick SCENE FILE The SCENE file contains the setup value of the paint items adjusted in accordance with the shooting scene Up to 5 SCENE files can be set in the built in memor
159. N 3005 board Flexible cad wire 8 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of PSW2 x5 CN1 removal 9 CN5 Harness DDOUTLGT CN 3005 board 8 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 35 7 7 17 DR 606 Board Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the DCP 44 board Refer to Section 7 7 2 Remove the DVP 45 board Refer to Section 7 7 3 Remove the fan motor rear Refer to Section 7 4 oe 9 dues Remove the four screws B2 6 X 5 and remove the separator center Separator center 6 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN100 7 Disconnect the flexible card wires from the four connectors CN101 CN102 CN857 CN858 5 Remove the six screws B2 X 3 and remove the DR 606 board assembly DR 606 board assembly 7 36 9 Remove the four screws PSW2 X 4 and remove the Note When the DR 606 board is removed from the heat sink if the radiation sheet is affixed to the IC peel of the radiation sheet from the IC carefully so as not to damage the radiation sheet PSW2 x 4 DR 606 board PSW2 x 4 Heat sink 10 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 7 18 RE 246 Board 8 Remove the screw and three claws and remove the exhaust duct a 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the inside panel R
160. N cursor vertical Jumps the cursor to the position in which the RPN data is registered PREV Jumps to the RPN data preceding the current position CURR Current display NEXT Jumps to the RPN data after the current position Registers the RPN data of the present cursor position Deletes the RPN data of the present cursor position 4 77 PRN MANAGE 150RPN MANAGE CONC APR gt CONC2 APR RPN ALL P ONC ONC R E E L AUTO C AUTO N N Item CONC APR RESET CONC2 APR RESET RPN ALL PRESET AUTO CONCEAL AUTO CONCEAL2 VDR MAINTENANCE A AL2 RESET HESET ESET Setting Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item S160VDR MAINTENANCE AUDIO A D ADJUST gt AUDIO D A ADJUST AU SIDE VOL ADJ POWER A D ADJUST DRIVE MAINTE SERVICE SUPPORT Item AUDIO A D ADJUST AUDIO D A ADJUST AU SIDE VOL ADJ POWER A D ADJUST DRIVE MAINTE SERVICE SUPPORT 4 78 EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC Setting Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to move to the DRIVE MAINTE screen Press the
161. NG LED control and alarm tone control The WARNING information is supplied from the ITRON CPU that is used to turn on and off the WARNING LED on the FP 157 board The 1 KHz square wave generated from the PWM genera tor circuit inside the FP_CPU alarm tone is used as the alarm tone 7 Wireless Receiver Control Optional function This communication circuit can control both analog and digital wireless receivers Analog wireless receivers use the conventional method of synchronous serial communication 200 Bps Interval time 80 ms Digital wireless receivers use 38 KBps asynchronous serial communication to handle large amounts of communication data 1 705 TC74HC4052 CH 1 3 IC706 NJM 2172 b nt With a built in wireless receiver when CPU is in the POWER ON state the receiver type is determined and information such as the transmission RF sensitivity is load ed This data 1s transmitted to Camera CPU via ITRON CPU and can be viewed on the viewfinder 8 Software download function FP CPU has internal flash memory so the software can be overwritten Load the software in the memory stick into the camera microcomputer and transmit the data through ITRON CPU in the SY 335 board to the FP CPU where it is written 9 Power voltage measurement circuit batteries other than the info battery Power voltage measurement circuit IC839 outputs two types of DC voltage from DA output of the FP CPU and switches vol
162. NLOCK phase adjustment HD GL SD H PHASE 99 to 99 GENLOCK phase adjustment SD REFERENCE Display only Displays the type of genlocked reference signal This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23 9P ND COMP Display ND OFFSET compensation M20OND COMP OFFSET ADJU SE OFF S CLEAR ND OFFSET EXEC Item Setting Function ND OFFSET ADJUST OFF ON Turns ON OFF the ND OFFSET adjustment mode CLEAR ND OFFSET Press the MENU knob to Returns the ND OFFSET value to the production execute this menu item adjustment value 4 52 PDW 700 V1 E AUTO SHADING Display Automatic SHADING adjustment M210AUTO SHADING gt AUTO BLK SHADING EXEC RESET BLK SHD EXEC TEST OUT SELECT VBS OdB MASTER GAIN TMP Item Setting Function AUTO BLK SHADING Executes the auto black shading function RESET BLK SHD Clears black shading compensation values TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT and the VBS SDI OUT connector Invalid when the BARS signal is selected The Y signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT SEL display of the OPERATION menu and SD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT The output signal returns to the Y signal without fail at power on MASTER GAIN TMP 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 Temporarily sets the master gain value 24 30 36 42 dB A
163. Network device 1 Network Cable Ep D D JN b EN To Network Network connector N Hub etc A 7 o S 5 96 NN REN TAD 2 2 PDW 700 V1 E 2 2 Status Menu 2 2 1 Device Information The settings of the camcorder can be checked in the Device Information page of the Status menu Sony Microsoft Internet Explorer Prov mR RTV BALANSA YMD AIL O O Pw kom 00 5 VAs ax P ELAD d http 192168 1 10 indexcei ges Ye Bookmarks S Check Autolink QA v Send tov Google 8 Be Settines v SONY XDCAM HD Product Information Status 3Jevice intormatic Model Hours Meter Serial No Software Version Disc System Information Disc Properties Thumbnails System Line 1080 System Frequency 59 94i Maintenance Network Video Format HD420 1080 HQ Audio Format 4ch 16bit Account Software Update Other Information License Registration Option Composite Input HD SD SDI Input ce E 2nerensUt Item Setting Product Information Model Name Display only Serial No Display only System Information System Line Display only System Frequency Display only Video Format Display only Audio Format Display only Other Information Option Display only PDW 700 V1 E amp 4v Fo Function Displays the model n
164. O 1 SKEW SERVO 2 OTHER ADJUST VERSION SEHIAL NO CLEAR MEDIA LOG MEMORY SUPPORT Sub item TEMPERATURE SENSOR DEW SENSOR FAN MOTOR ACCELERATION SENSOR AUTO TEST IN LIM TEST OUT LIM TEST AUTO TEST FOCUS ACTUATOR TRACKING ACTUATOR SA ACTUATOR LASER ND FILTER TAN ADJUST RAD ADJUST ACCELERATION OFFSET UPLOAD TO EEPROM Description Checks the temperature sensor on the drive block Checks the dew sensor on the optical block assembly Checks the fan motor connected to the drive block Checks the acceleration sensor Checks the loader performance Checks the slider performance and the limit sensor Moves the slider to the IN LIMIT position Move the slider to the OUT LIMIT position Checks the spindle motor performance Checks the focus directions of the two shafts Checks the tracking directions of the two shafts Checks the SA actuator Checks the laser Checks the ND filter Performs Pick up lens cleaning Servo 1 system MTX BLOCK PI FE BLOCK FE AGC auto adjustment Adjust the skew Servo 2 system SKEW OFFSET TE CE BLOCK SV LOOP GAIN auto adjustment Adjusts the offset of the acceleration sensor Records the error occurred in the drive Displays the version of the drive block Displays the serial number of the drive block Clears the acquired media information Uploads the data backed up in the DR 606 board back to the EEPROM 1 4 on the SE 857 board 4 79 S17
165. ON KNEE SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 WHITE CLIP OFF ON WHITE CLIP LEVEL 90 0 to 109 0 0 1 step Function Turns ON OFF the black gamma correction function Sets the range in which the black gamma correction is effective LOW Oto 3 6 L MID 0 to 7 2 56 H MID 0 to 14 4 HIGH 0 to 28 8 Adjusts the master black gamma correction curve All of the R G and B black gamma are adjusted Adjusts the R black gamma correction curve Adjusts the G black gamma correction curve Adjusts the B black gamma correction curve Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector Function Turns ON OFF the knee correction function Adjusts the master knee point level during the manual knee adjustment Adjusts the master knee slope level during the manual knee adjustment Turns ON OFF the knee saturation function Adjusts the knee saturation level Turns ON OFF the white clip function used during the video signal adjustment Note The video level that is higher than 109 is not output even if this setting is set to OFF Set the master white clip level Default setting value is 108 0 when COUNTRY is set to NTSC J AREA NTSC AREA 105 0 when COUNTRY is set to PAL AREA PDW 700 V1 E 4 31 DETAIL 1 Display Adjusting 1 DETAIL PO7ODETAIL 1 gt DETAIL APERTURE DETAIL LEVEL APERTURE LEVEL DTL RATIO CRISPENING LEVEL DEPEND LEVEL DEPEND LVL DETAIL FREQUENCY
166. Other RESIP 5 11 3 4 Special Heins tO Save 5 12 5 4 1 UNTEN 25884354 5 12 5 4 2 Master Gali 5 13 5 4 3 SS GTVT TT 5 13 6 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 Periodic Check Replacement Parts List 6 1 0 2 XE BIG 6 2 6 2 1 General Information Use of Cleaning ioi eT E 6 2 6 2 2 Cleaning Loader Assembly 6 2 6 2 3 Cleaning Spindle Motor 6 3 6 2 4 Cleaning Pickup 6 3 6 3 Cares after Using under Special Environment 6 4 0 4 Digital Hours Meter umeros rrr REO RR rv ra Rau EUR GE Red 6 5 6 4 1 Display Method and Reset Methods 6 5 6 5 Recommended Replacement Parts 6 6 6 6 Precautions for the Battery Connector 6 8 6 7 Precaution on Hanging Bracket of Handle 6 8 PDW 700 V1 E 7 Replacement of Parts 7 1 Optical Drive Assembly 7 1 7 1 1 Removing Reinstalling Loader Assembly 7 1 7 1 2 Removing Reinstalling Drive Sub Assembly 7 5 7 1 3 Replacing Cleaner Assembly 7 7 7 1 4 Replacing Loading Motor Assembly 7 8 7 1 5 Replacing Optical Block
167. PDW 700 V1 E 3 Perform the following adjustments Black set adjustment After BLACK BALANCE is displayed press and hold the AUTO W B BAL switch toward BLACK until BLACK SET is displayed again Perform AUTO CONCEAL Perform AUTO CONCEAL2 4 Call back the contents of the previously saved menu settings from the memory stick ALL FILE SER VICE FILE For details refer to 5 3 2 ALL FILE 5 Calling the ALL FILE saved in memory stick ALL FILE and 5 3 5 SERVICE FILE 2 Calling the SERVICE FILE saved in memory stick SERVICE FILE LOAD 7 8 3 CN 3005 Board After replacing the CN 3005 board or after replacing EEPROM IC2 on the CN 3005 board perform the procedure in the following order Service Action after the board replacement After replacing the CN 3005 board mount the EEPROM IC2 from the old board to the new board Service Action after the EEPROM If you have replaced this with a new IC due to its defect data should be saved Contact your local Sony Sales Office Service Center for details 7 8 4 DCP 44 Board Perform the following procedure when replacing the DCP 44 board 1 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version Only when the board 18 replaced Refer to 1 11 2 Firmware Update Using the USB Memory for details 2 Perform the following adjustment VCO CONT frequency adjustment Refer to Section 9 2 7 39 7 8 5 SY 355 Board After replacing the SY 355 board u
168. PERATION menu PAINT menu MAINTENANCE menu FILE menu DIAGNOSIS menu and SERVICE menu The setup menus are displayed on the viewfinder of this unit 4 1 1 Basic Operations of Setup Menus Switch description STATUS ON SEL OFF switch MENU ON OFF switch MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch MENU knob MENU ON OFF switch Use this switch to display the setup menu When the lid is closed the switch is set to the OFF position Displays the setup menu OFF Exits the setup menu MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch Use this switch to cancel the setup of the items that are selected by the setup menu or return to the initial setup when the MENU ON OFF switch is in the ON position CANCEL PRST Cancels the executed setup or returns to the initial PRST setup Returns to the menu hierarchy one level higher ESCAPE STATUS ON SEL OFF switch Use this switch to show or to clear the setup displays in order to confirm various settings and statuses when the MENU ON OFF switch is in the OFF position ON SEL Shows the various settings and status check displays for about 10 seconds Each press of this switch turns over the display page OFF Clears the display that is selected by ON SEL PDW 700 V1 E MENU knob When rotated Moves to the other pages or items or changes the setup value When pressed Enters the page set mode or the setup value
169. PR Display Detect compensation function M220APR gt APR APR SLS APR PRESET Item Setting Function APR Executes the defect compensation function APR SLS Suppresses white flecks in SLS Slow Speed Shutter mode by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function The execution time for this function is about 30 minutes More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low APR PRESET Deletes white flecks data that was added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59 9P and SCAN MODE is set to 23 9P PDW 700 V1 E 4 53 NETWORK Display Setting on NETWORK M230NETWORK gt DHCP e DISABLE IP ADRESS 102168 1 10 SUBNET MASK 2552959299 0 DEF GATEWAY LINK SPEED DUPLEX DNS1 DNS2 UPnP NET CFG RESET Item Setting Function ENABL DISABLE Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of the IP address from a DHCP server IP ADDRESS 192168 1 10 Sets the IP address SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 Sets the subnet mask DEF GATEWAY 0 0 00 Sets the default gateway LINK SPEED AUTO 10Mbps 100Mbps Sets the communications speed DUPLEX AUTO FULL HALF Sets the duplex mode AUTO Automatically sets full duplex or half duplex FULL Full duplex communication HALF Half duplex communication DNS1 0 0 0 0 Sets the DNS address 1 Required in order t
170. PRESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item CUSTOMIZE RESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF ON LOAD OUT OF USER OFF ON BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF ON USER LOAD WHITE OFF ON PDW 700 V1 E Function Saves the data that is set by the USER menu in the PRESET layer and uses it as the standard setup Returns the USER menu setup to the default setting when shipped from the factory Returns the items that are edited by the MENU CUSTOMIZE menu to the original setting Turns ON OFF the function to read out the data from Memory Stick that are set on the MENU CUSTOMIZE menu during execution of USER FILE LOAD Turns ON OFF the function to read out the data from Memory Stick that are not contained in the present USER menu during execution of USER FILE LOAD Turns ON OFF the function not to save the USER FILE page and the subsequent pages of the USER menu in Memory Stick during execution of USER FILE SAVE ON Not to save Turns ON OFF the function to read out the white balance data from Memory Stick that are saved in USER FILE during execution of USER FILE LOAD 4 57 ALL FILE Display Operating the ALL file FOSOALL FILE TOP gt ALL FILE LOAD ALL FIL PID 3 EXEC Item Setting ALL FILE LOAD Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display ALL FILE SAVE F ID 16 characters alphanumeric numbers
171. R855 DET 8 GND 9 WRR CLK 10 CS 11 WRRDI 12 WRRDO 13 LRCK 14 DATA 1 2 15 3 4 i LINK 6 pin No Signal 1 VP 2 VG 3 NTPB 4 TPB 5 NTPA 6 TPA 1 22 OUT OUT I O IN OUT OUT IN OUT IN IN 2 4 EXT VIEW Specifications GND for AUDIO IN WIRELESS RECEIVER AUDIO CH1 IN WIRELESS RECEIVER AUDIO CH2 IN 64 FS WRR SERIAL CLOCK WRR SELECT WRR SERIAL IN WRR SERIAL OUT FS AUDIO DATA 1 2 IN AUDIO DATA 3 4 IN 135 EXT VIEW Specifications IN BUS POWER GND I O STROBE I O STROBE B I O DATA DATA e a a a 1 4 1 4 4 1 O O 01 O 20 pin Female Signal SDA VF G TALLY VF VIDEO VF VIDEO GND VF VIDEO Pb VF VIDEO Pr R TALLY UP UNREG GND UNREG 1 N e 5 4 eo s 9 14 13 SI 5 ke e 18 EXT VIEW Specifications I O TTL level No connection No connection OUT TTL level No connection No connection No connection OUT ON 5V OFF GND No connection No connection No connection OUT 1 0 V p p Zo 75Q GND for VIDEO OUT 0 35 V p p Zo 75 OUT 0 35 V p p Zo 75 No connection OUT ON 5V OFF GND No connection GND for UNREG OUT 11Vto17V PDW 700 V1 E REMOTE 8 pin Female MAINTENANCE OLD
172. SD AUTO Item Setting Function ZEBRA OFF ON Turns ON OFF all the zebra display ZEBRA SELECT 1 2 BOTH Selects the zebra pattern type ZEBRA1 DET LVL 20 to 107 Sets the ZEBRA1 display level center value ZEBRA1 APT LVL 1 to 20 Sets the ZEBRA1 aperture level center value ZEBRA2 DET LVL 52 to 109 Sets the ZEBRA2 display level lower limit value VF DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the amount of details of the VF picture Details of the main line video output remain unchanged VF ASPECT SD AUTO 16 9 Specifies whether to set the viewfinder screen and LCD monitor aspect ratio automatically or to set it to 16 9 When 16 9 is selected then the screen is always displayed as a 16 9 screen before being cut out to 4 3 even when ASPECT RATIO SD is set to 4 3 1 When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA switch turns the display on or off using this item When you use the viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch the most recent operation of the ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective 2 Displayed only when REC FORMAT is set to IMX50 40 30 or DAVCAM PDW 700 V1 E 4 15 AUTO IRIS Display Setting AUTO IRIS O160AUTO IRIS OVERRIDE SPEED HIGH LIGHT gt 00000 2222220 r DI Item Setting Function IRIS OVERRIDE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the AUTO IRIS OVERRIDE function When set to ON the reference value of the AUTO IRIS can be changed by the MENU knob 9 steps 1
173. Semp 4 1 4 1 1 Basic Operations of Setup Menus 4 4 1 2 How to Display the SERVICE Menu 4 4 2 TOP Menu 4 2 24 USER 4 3 4 4 OPERATION Menu 4 4 2 5 PAINT MENU 4 27 4 6 MAINTENANCE Menu 4 38 Bain FILE JV 4 56 4 8 DIAGNOSIS Menu 4 65 4 9 SERVICE Menu oria bar nit Ferro Coda 4 69 4 10 Drive Maintenance 4 85 4 10 1 Basic Operation on Drive Maintenance c 4 85 4 10 2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR 4 85 4 I0 5 DEW SENSOR 4 86 4 10 4 MOTOR 4 86 4 10 5 ACCELERATION SENSOR 4 87 4 10 60 LOADER bns ato dons 4 88 4 10 7 SLIDER AUTO TEST 4 91 4 10 8 IN LIM TEST 4 91 4 10 9 OUT LIM TEST 54 nire 4 92 4 10 10 SPINDLE MOTOR AUTO TEST 4 92 4 10 11 FOCUS ACTUATOR 4 93 4 10 12 TRACKING ACTUATOR 4 94 4 10 13 SA ACTUATOR eer 4 94 4 10 14 LASER 52er ptt perte neta hn hnetnotes 4 95 4 10 15 ND FILTER
174. T Copy the data in the PRESET layer of the USER menu items to the USER layer Registering the setups of the USER menu as the default values STORE USER PRESET When executing STORE USER PRESET on the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 2 F02 all the USER menu items are stored as the default values Executing STORE USER PRESET Copy the data in the PRESET layer of the USER menu items to the USER layer Initializing all the USER menu setups to the factory default values CCLEAR USER PRESET When executing CLEAR USR PRESET on the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 2 lt 02 gt all the items in the USER menu are initialized to the factory default values Executing CLEAR USER PRESET Copy the data in the SERVICE layer of the USER menu items to the USER and PRESET layers After USER PRESET STORE USER PRESET or CLEAR USER PRESET 1 performed the MENU display for the analog data shows 0 PDW 700 V1 E 5 9 4 Saving the setups of the USER menu in the memory stick USER FILE SAVE When executing USER FILE SAVE on the USER FILE page under FILE menu page 1 F01 all the USER menu items are saved as USER FILE in the memory stick Structure USER layer gt Memory stick PRESET layer SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing USER FILE SAVE Save the data of the USER layer of the USER menu items in the memory stick The contents of USER CUSTOMIZE MENU and the WHITE BALANCE data are also saved in th
175. TE lt A gt WARM COOL A WARM COOL BAL lt A gt OFFSET WHITE lt B gt WARM COOL lt B gt WARM COOL BAL lt B gt Setting OFF ON Displays reference color temperature 99 to 99 OFF ON Displays reference color temperature 99 to 99 Function Turns ON OFF the setting to be added to the white balance of A channel Sets the offset for the white balance of channel A using the color temperature Used for the above WARM COOL fine adjustment A CH Turns ON OFF the setting to be added to the white balance of B channel Sets the offset for the white balance of channel B using the color temperature Used for the above WARM COOL fine adjustment B CH SHT ENABLE Display Setting the shutter mode speed that can be selected by the SHUTTER switch etc O220SHT gt SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER FORMAT 50i 50P Q220SHT gt SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER st o p 0 OOOUOI OOo OOOOUOiOo OO FORMAT 25P PDW 700 V1 E O220SHT gt SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER Sek Nn OO0O001IO O220SHT gt SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER SHUTTER o et p XT FORMAT 29 97P
176. TI MATRIX AREA IND G B R B G MATRIX COLOR DET PRESET MTX MULTI MTX MULTI AXIS MTX MULTI HUE MTX MULTI SAT VMOD MASTER VMOD R VMOD G VMOD B VMOD TEST OUT SELECT LOW KEY SAT L KEY SAT LEVEL L KEY SAT RANGE Y BLACK GAMMA Y BLK GAM LEVEL Y BLK GAM RANGE NOISE SUPPRESS F SET OFF EXEC OFF ON 39 OFF OFF OFF O OFF EXEC EXEC VBS OFF HIGH OFF HIGH ON ALL PRST 0 10 0 01010 1 0 1 0 010101010 0 0 Dn O SCN 01010100 101010 01 10 0 1 010101010100 0100 E HR Oe S 010 LENS STD Power OFF SVC X xleeee xix x OO OO OE OO Or E IO Se Ie O QOO OI OTHO OO Initial value Initial value Initial value Initial value Y when R G B OIX X 101010 0 01010 1010 0101010 10 010 010 0 0 10 010 0 01010 4 113 PAINT Menu 4 4 No 16 4 114 Page SCENE FILE Setup Item 1 112 3 4 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F ID F SET STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD
177. U FP IC921 FP 157 board detects interruption in communication with key control CPU System control CPU detects System control CPU detects flash memory 1C505 IC506 SY 355 board error System control CPU detects an error in hours meter area EEPROM IC200 SY 355 board System control CPU detects an error in adjustment data area EEPROM IC300 SY 355 board System control CPU detects an error in hours meter area FROM IC507 SY 355 board System control CPU detects interruption in communication with optical drive DR 606 board System control CPU detects interruption in communication with camera control CPU IC209 AT 177 board System control CPU detects System control CPU detects interruption in communication with IC for driving color LCD IC1 PD 118 board System control CPU detects System control CPU detects software option s installation key error Key control CPU FP IC721 FP 157 board detects interruption in communication with system control CPU Key control CPU detects Key control CPU FP 921 157 board detects EEPROM IC913 FP 157 board error Key control CPU FP 1 921 157 board detects color LCD EEPROM IC3 PD 118 board error Key control CPU FP IC921 FP 157 board detects IC202 CNB 25 board error Key control CPU FP IC921 FP 157 board detects interruption in communication with color EEPROM IC1 PD 118 board error Key control detects Key cont
178. VICE PAGE WHITE SHADING ITEM TEST OUT SELECT gt VBS 9 2 6 Black Set Adjustment Fixtures and Equipment HD waveform monitor Preparation Connect an HD waveform monitor of the HD SDI to the HDSDI OUT connector e Lens IRIS CLOSE AUTO W B BAL switch front panel BLK Perform the automatic black balance adjustment Adjustment Procedure 1 Onthe menu adjust as follows MENU PAINT PAGE PAINT ITEM MASTER BLACK Spec A 3 1 IRE NTSC 20 7 mV PAL PDW 700 V1 E 9 2 7 Flare Adjustment Fixtures and Equipment SD waveform monitor Grayscale chart 16 9 Preparation Connect an SD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector OUTPUT DCC switch inside panel gt On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK FLARE ITEM TEST OUT SELECT VBS Shoot a grayscale chart in the full underscanned monitor frame Adjustment Procedure 1 Lens IRIS Open the lens iris by one step from the reference setting A Spec A 100 2 IRE NTSC 700 14 mV PAL 2 the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK FLARE ITEM GFLARE 0 3 Select center portion by using the waveform monitor mil EE AN E iml PDW 700 V1 E On the menu adjust as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK FLARE ITEM RFLARE Spec Minimize the carrier leakage at portion C R ch On the menu adjust as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK FLARE IT
179. VIS ICA00 of the DVP 45 board Signal pre processing such as the filtering and scaling is performed in this system Playback system The playback digital video data is loaded from LVIS IC400 and sent to the DCP 44 board via the MB board as the component parallel digital video signal The component parallel digital video signal sent to the DCP 44 board is distributed to each path of HD SD SDI VF COLOR LCD and down conversion and encoding to the composite video signal are performed according to the setting 2 Video compression signal processing system Recording system The recording digital video signal that has undergone signal processing on the DVP 45 board is sent to MPEG2 VIDEO Codec TORINO IC1000 1200 1400 and compressed to the MPEG 2 VIDEO format The compressed digital video data is sent to PIER G4 IC1900 and written to PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 The recording digital video signal is encoded to MPEG4 VIDEO format in LVIS 1 400 at the same time and generated as the Proxy video data The generated Proxy video data is sent to PIER G4 IC1900 and written to PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 The recording digital data via i LINK network is sent to PIER G4 1 1900 via the PCI bus and written to PIER_SDRAM 1 1901 to IC1904 While recording on a disc the data in PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 is sent to the DR 606 board via the ATA interface Playback system The playback video data and the Pr
180. VSUB OFST P CCD H DRIVER AD CLOCK PHASE TEST OUT SELECT Setting 9 0 V to 18 0 V 0 1 V step 9 0 V to 18 0 V 0 1 V step 9 0 V to 18 0 V 0 1 V step 5 0 V to 45 0 V 0 1 V step 5 0 V to 45 0 V 0 1 V step 5 0 V to 45 0 V 0 1 V step 5 2 V 5 4 V 5 6 V 5 8 V 6 0 V 6 2 V 2 1 0 1 2 VBS Y R G B LCD x1 The default value varies depending on the set 2 The setting that enters the Camcorder in the progressive reading Function Adjusts the sensitivity of the R channel Adjusts the sensitivity of the G channel Adjusts the sensitivity of the B channel Adjusts the GAIN of the R channel test saw Adjusts the GAIN of the G channel test saw Adjusts the GAIN of the B channel test saw Turns ON OFF the test saw function Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector Function Sets the V substrate voltage of the R channel Sets the V substrate voltage of the G channel Sets the V substrate voltage of the B channel Adjusts the offset for the V substrate voltage of the R channel during the progressive reading Adjusts the offset for the V substrate voltage of the G channel during the progressive reading Adjusts the offset for the V substrate voltage of the B channel during the progressive reading Sets the drive voltage of the CCD H DRIVE Sets the phase frequency of AD Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector When the SYSTEM LINE is 1080 a
181. Voltage Before starting adjustment refer to 9 1 Preparation Devices and tools For more details refer to 1 10 2 Measuring Equipment Rated voltage power source one that can output at least 10 A Digital voltmeter Blank disc Adjustment Procedure L 2 Supply a 12 V voltage to the DC IN connector Insert a blank disc for recording into the unit press the REC START button and begin recording Execute POWER A D ADJUST from the page of VDR MAINTENANCE of the SERVICE menu POWER A D ADJUST ADJUST START YES Turn the MENU knob to select YES and press the MENU knob POWER A D ADJUST ADJUST COMPLETE ADJ DATA 0 02 IV After adjustment finishes press down on the MENU Note switch Note If the message ADJUST ERROR appears in the adjustment result menu recheck whether a 12 V voltage is supplied to the DC IN connector and repeat the adjustment from step 3 PDW 700 V1 E 4 103 4 15 SERVICE SUPPORT Menu Displays the error log for all errors except for the ones that occur in the optical drive block Procedure 1 Execute SERVICE SUPPORT from the VDR MAIN TENANCE page of the SERVICE menu SERVICE SUPPORT gt DISPLAY ERR LOG CLEAR ERR LOG 2 Turn the MENU knob to select DISPLAY ERR LOG and press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the arrow so that it points to the error code that you want to view in more detail DISPLAY ERR
182. WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or LINE Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device When WRR DELAY COMP is set to ON sets the amount of audio delay for the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT AUTO Automatically adjusts the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio received from the wireless receiver is zero 0 0 ms to 8 0 ms Sets the amount of anticipated cases in several wireless systems are being used over a device such as an audio mixer 2 A setting for this item is required when the DWR SO1D Slot In Digital Wireless Receiver is installed 4 44 PDW 700 V1 E TIMECODE Display Setting on TIME CODE M100T gt TC OUT gt TC OUT DF NDF EXT LK UBIT EXT LK DF NDF LTC UBIT 1 UBIT VITC UBIT LIC UBIT WATCH AUT VITC UBIT WATCH AUT UBIT GROU VITC INS VITC INS PAL AREA Item Setting Function TC OUT AUTO GENE Sets the time code signal output AUTO Outputs the time code generator during recording and outputs the time code reader during playback GENE Outputs the time code generator during recording and playback DF NDF
183. X1 X A X X X X Initial value WRR DELAY COMP ON X X X TX1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 AUDIO PEAK 1 2 3 4 INPUT LEVEL 1 2 3 4 ATT LEVEL OdB TX1 2 3 4 LCF FREQ 200Hz 1 2 3 4 SYSTEM AUTO A X X X X Initial value DELAY 10 TIMECODE TC OUT AUTO X X X X DF NDF DF X X X X EXT LK DF NDF INT x X X X EXT LK UBIT INT X X X X Q LTC UBIT FIX X X X X VITC UBIT SD FIX X X X Q WATCH AUTO ADJ ON X X X X Q UBIT GROUP ID 000 X X VITC INS LINE 1 16H X X X X VITC INS LINE 2 18H X X X X 1 Initial value is 19H when COUNTRY is set to PAL AREA 2 Initial value is 21H when COUNTRY is set to PAL AREA 4 116 PDW 700 V1 E MAINTENANCE Menu 3 4 No Page Setup 11 ESSENCE MARK RET SHOT MARK 1 12 CAM CONFIG 1 13 CONFIG 2 14 CAM CONFIG 15 PRESET WHT 16 WHITE FILTER 17 DCC ADJUST PDW 700 V1 E RET SHOT MARK 2 INDEX PIC POS FIND MODE REC TALLY BLINK REC START BEEP SUB LCD MODE SEL SUB LCD TIMER HDSDI REMOTE I F PROAV DISPLAY MIXED RECORDING SINGLE CLIP MODE PB POSITION TEST SAW SELECT COLOR BAR SELECT USER amp ALL ONLY RM COMMON MEMORY RM REC START SHT DISP MODE AF MARKER SOURCE RM F NO DISPLAY FAN CONTROL FOCUS MAG SW ALAC COLOR TEMP lt P gt C TEMP BAL lt P gt GAIN lt gt lt
184. Y layer Td Executing REFERENCE LOAD Call the REFERENCE FILE stored in the memory stick to the data on the PRESET layer of the REFERENCE FILE items Some of the menu items are displayed as the setup data for the newly called REFERENCE reference value E g DETAIL LEVEL Displ lue of PAINT el isplay value o NT menu 10 1 Gume vae REFERENCE value 20 REFERENCE value saved in the memory stick 10 Execute REFERENCE LOAD Display value of the PAINT menu 40 Output value 30 No difference in the output values before REFERENCE value 10 and after execution PDW 700 V1 E 5 3 4 Other FILE SCENE FILE and LENS FILE There is no hierarchical layer structure for the data of SCENE FILE and LENS FILE The USER layer and the memory area of each file handle all the data ed OPERA MAINTE Data Structure USER TION PAINT NANCE FILE SERVICE esee J p lt gt SCENE FILE LENS FILE Memory stick FILE 1 items items LENS FILE 1 FILE 2 Memory stick Internal memory SCENE FILE 1 LENS FILE 100 SCENE FILE 100 FILE 16 FILE 32 Refer to 4 16 Setup Menu List for the items of SCENE FILE LENS FILE and STANDARD PDW 700 V1 E 5 9 5 3 5 SERVICE FILE When the system enters the service mode most of the items in all the menus belong to the SERVICE layer If changes are made in the data the changed data will be saved as the data belonging
185. acement timing Check for deformation and deterioration abraded or damaged or lost from time to time Replace it as necessary It can become nebulous intransparent and whitened with elapse of time Then it will not meet the required characteristics Replace it as needed Check for deformation and deterioration abraded or damaged or lost from time to time Replace it as necessary Replace every 5 years Check for deformation and deterioration abraded or damaged or lost from time to time Replace it as necessary Replace every about 3 years or check for deformation and deterioration abraded or damaged or lost from time to time Replace it as necessary When the part is replaced apply the instant adhesive Loctite 408 or equivalent to the whole area of the flange from the back side with care not to ooze out to cosmetic surface PDW 700V1 E 6 7 6 6 Precautions for the Battery Connector The battery connector in this unit 15 consumable parts Replace ever about 5 years If the terminal of connector is deformed or bends due to vibrations or shock or if the surface of the terminal corrodes due to long term outside use or other similar use the unit may malfunction Replace the battery connector immediately if the terminal is deformed or bends or if the surface color changes Refer to Section 1 7 10 6 7 Precaution on Hanging Bracket of Handle If the Suspension Collar of the Hanging Bracket is deteriorate
186. aces 12 characters alphanumeric characters symbols and spaces 12 characters alphanumeric characters symbols and spaces 12 characters alphanumeric characters symbols and spaces Function Setting SHOT 10 1 Setting SHOT ID 2 Setting SHOT ID 3 Setting SHOT 10 4 SHOT DISP Display Selecting the shot data to be superimposed on color bar O180SHOT DISP gt SHOT SHOT Turns ON OFF whether to superimpose and record Turns ON OFF whether to superimpose and record Turns ON OFF whether to superimpose and record the model name of the unit Item Setting Function SHOT DATE OFF ON the date SHOT TIME OFF ON the time SHOT MODEL NAME OFF ON SHOT SERIAL NO OFF ON SHOT ID SEL SHOT 16 9 CHARA SHOT BLINK CHARA PDW 700 V1 E OFF ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 OFF ON OFF ON Turns ON OFF whether to superimpose and record the serial number of the unit Displays the shot ID number selected in the SHOT ID page Turns ON OFF whether to superimpose and record 16 9 when the aspect ratio 16 9 is selected Turns ON OFF whether to superimpose and record the blinking SET STATUS Display Selecting the status check screen display O190SET STATUS gt STATUS ABNORMAL STATUS SYSTEM STATUS FUNCTION STATUS AUDIO Item Setting STATUS ABNORMAL OFF ON STATUS SYSTEM OFF ON STATUS FUNCTION OFF ON STATUS AUDIO OFF ON Function Turns ON OFF the ABNORMAL lt gt screen display Turns ON OFF the
187. ack assembly onto a new optical block assembly with screw OP stopper Tightening torque 10 10 0 01 Nem 1 0 0 1 kgf cm f the OP stopper rubber is deformed or deteriorated replace it with a new one OP rack assembly Be careful so that the OP stopper rubber Screw M1 7 does not come out of the both ends portion A of the OP rack assembly 5 Pass the main shaft through the new optical block assembly 7 10 PDW 700 V1 E Reinstallation 1 Align the upper and lower holes of the OP rack assembly while pressing the both ends of Parallel pin the OP rack assembly and insert the parallel Optical block assembly pin into the holes K2 6 x 8 2 Move the OP position sensor insert the guide into the sub shaft and install the optical block Laser part assembly and the main shaft Zz lt Main shaft Install these parts so that the gear of the OP Kt S Ss rack assembly is properly engaged with the gear of the No 3 gear assembly The laser part of the optical block assembly is precisely positioned Do not hit the laser part against the sub shaft or the chassis when installing the optical block assembly 3 Press the connector of the optical block assembly to move the optical block assembly to the spindle motor s OP position 4 Install the main shaft with the two flat head dad screws Tightening torque 20 10 0 01 Nem 2 0 0 1 kgf cm OP position sensor
188. al to the SD signal while maintaining the aspect ratio 16 9 LETTR LETTER BOX Converting the 16 9 HD video signal to the 4 3 SD video signal while maintaining the original aspect ratio of 16 9 Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom of the screen LETTR can be selected only when the LETTER BOX is set to ENABLE on the SELECT FUNCTION page CROP Edge crop Converting the HD video signal to the SD signal by extracting the 4 3 image portion from the HD video signal 4 3 The setting whether or not to add the wide screen information recorded on the disc to the output signal THROU Outputs the video signal played back from the disc without adding the wide screen information AUTO Outputs the video signal by adding the wide screen information when the wide information is detected from the disc during playback When the SYSTEM LINE is 1080 and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY is 23 9P the menu does not appear and the mode is fixed to SQEZE SUPERIMPOSE Display Setting the information output OOSOSUPERIMPOSE TOP SDI OUT 2 amp TEST gt SUPER VFD SP SUPER MENU SUPER TC S gt R lt TEST OUT VB SUPER MARKE Item SUPER VFDISP SUPER MENU SUPER TC SUPER MARKER PDW 700 V1 E Setting OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Function Turns ON OFF the output of text Superimposed information from the SDI OUT 2 connector Turns ON OFF the marker display output from the T
189. ame Displays the serial No Displays the signal standard Displays the signal standard Displays the video recording format Displays the audio recording format Displays the installed option 2 3 2 2 2 Hours Meter The hours meter of the camcorder can be displayed on the Hours Meter page of the Status menu The function is the same as that of the HOURS METER of the DIAGNOSIS menu on the camcorder For How to reset the hours meter contact your local Sony Sales Office Service Center Sony XDCAM Microsoft Internet Explorer mA 7711000 RED RTV BALAN 9 0 ay ar O O 26 Pe yon 2 5 5 Wh 34 FELAD http 192168 1 10 indexcei Ese v Google Gr v Go Q 2 Bookmarks 57 Check AutoLink n v Send to Q Settings v XDCAM HD Status Hours Meter Device Information Operation Hours Laser 0 Software Version Operation Hours Disc Seek Hours D Decades isc Properties Spindle Hours r Thumbnails q d Loading Count r Maintenance Network B Account m Software Update License Registration Setting Function Operation Hours Display only Displays the total operation hours 0 Display only Displays the output count of laser on optical block assembly Operation Hours r Display only Displays the total operation hours Unit hour Resettable Seek 0 Display only Displays the t
190. and MAINTENANCE are initialized to the factory default value Data Structure USER layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing REFERENCE CLEAR Copy the data stored in the SERVICE layer of the REFERENCE FILE items to the USER and PRESET layers 1 As the users will use the values set in the service mode as the factory default value be sure to handle the setup values with care in the service mode PDW 700 V1 E 5 7 3 Saving the REFERENCE FILE in the memory stick REFERENCE SAVE When executing REFERENCE SAVE on the REFERENCE page under the FILE menu page 5 lt 05 gt the data of the PRESET layer of the REFERENCE FILE items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT and MAINTENANCE are saved as REFERENCE FILE in the memory stick OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION ETUR NANCE USER layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer Memory stick FACTORY layer Td Executing REFERENCE SAVE Save the data of the PRESET layer of the REFERENCE FILE items in the memory stick Calling the REFERENCE FILE saved in the memory stick REFERENCE LOAD When executing REFERENCE LOAD on the REFERENCE page on the FILE menu page 5 F05 the REFERENCE FILE are called to the PRESET layer of the REFERENCE FILE item correspond ing items among OPERATION PAINT and MAINTENANCE OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION is NANCE USER layer PRESET layer Memory stick SERVICE layer FACTOR
191. ars The loader moves to the STBY position LOADER Appears just for a moment POSITION STBY INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE If failed The following screen appears LOADER CHECKING ERROR POSITION DOWN REC INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR DOWN SENSOR HOLE 2 3 4 PDW 700 V1 E 4 89 Moving STBY Position to EJECT Position 1 The item selection screen appears 2 Press the MENU knob LOADER MOVE TO EJECT POS MOVE TO DOWN POS POSITIONSSTBY INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE A confirmation screen appears 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob LOADER MOVE TO EJECT POS CHECK START YES NO The result appears The loader moves to the EJECT position to eject the cartridge LOADER POSITION EJECT REC INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE If failed The following screen appears LOADER CHECKING ERROR POSITION STBY REC INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE 4 90 Appears just for a moment Moving STBY Position to DOWN Position 3 The item selection screen appears Select MOVE TO DOWN POS by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob LOADER MOVE TO EJECT POS MOVE TO DOWN POS POSITION STBY INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE A confirmation screen appears Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU k
192. aser current of the optical block assembly is abnormal zero excessive The optical block assembly laser output is stopped due the judgment that no cartridge is inserted The ND filter setting of the optical block assembly cannot be changed Tracking servo of optical block assembly is frequently down O No signal can be detected from the disc required for the focus servo of the optical block assembly No control current is detected in the focus servo of the optical block assembly Excessive control current is detected the focus servo of the optical block assembly O No control current is detected in the tracking servo of the optical block assembly O Excessive control current is detected in the tracking servo of the optical block assembly Optical block assembly cannot move to disc s innermost circumference O Optical block assembly cannot move to disc s outermost circumference SA actuator of optical block assembly cannot move the target position The SA actuator reference position cannot be detected during the startup adjustment of the optical block assembly The SA actuator reference position cannot be detected during the power on initialization of the optical block assembly O Spindle motor does not rotate after the predetermined time has passed or no FG signal is detected Spindle motor cannot be stopped or abnormal FG signal is detected O Spindle motor rotation is detec
193. ata Structure TION oe USER layer PRESET layer Memory stick SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing ALL FILE LOAD Call ALL FILE stored in the memory stick to the USER and PRESET layers of the ALL FILE object items PDW 700 V1 E 5 3 3 REFERENCE FILE The REFERENCE FILE data is the same as the one in the PRESET layer The difference 18 that the items to be handled as REFERENCE FILE in the PRESET layer are limited Refer to 4 16 Setup Menu List for the items of the REFERENCE FILE d OPERA MAINTE Data Structure USER TION PAINT NANCE FILE SERVICE esee L REFERENCE FILE items 1 Saving the REFERENCE FILE in the built in memory of the PDW 700 REFERENCE STORE When executing REFERENCE STORE on the REFERENCE page under the FILE menu page 5 lt 05 gt the REFERENCE FILE items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT and MAINTENANCE are saved as the default values OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION NE NANCE USER layer FACTORY layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer Executing REFERENCE STORE Copy the data stored in the USER layer of the REFERENCE FILE items to the PRESET layer 2 Initializing all the REFERENCE FILE setups to the factory default values REFERENCE CLEAR When executing REFERENCE CLEAR on the REFERENCE page under the FILE menu page 5 lt 05 gt the REFERENCE FILE items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT
194. ay Setting the DCC function M170DCCG ADJUST TOP gt DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC D RANGE 600 POINT O GAIN DELAY TIME PEAK FILTER Item Setting Function DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC FIX Selects the DCC function modes when the DCC switch is ON DCC Automatically makes adjustments according to the knee point and the luminance of the object FIX Executes knee correction by fixing the knee point at 600 DCC D RANGE 400 450 500 550 600 Sets the dynamic range when the DCC switch is set to ON DCC POINT 99 to 99 Sets the minimum knee point when the DCC switch is set to ON DCC GAIN 99 to 99 Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value when the DCC switch is set to ON DCC DELAY TIME 99 to 99 Sets the response speed of DCC Increasing the data slows down the response speed DCC PEAK FILTER 0 to 15 Adjust the response sensitivity to the peak of the DCC detected value 4 50 PDW 700 V1 E AUTO IRIS 2 Display Setting 2 AUTO IRIS M180AUTO gt RIS RIS RIS RIS RIS RIS RIS RIS RIS LIP C Item IRIS WINDOW IRIS WINDOW IND IRIS LEVEL IRIS APL RATIO IRIS VAR WIDTH IRIS VAR HEIGHT IRIS VAR H POS IRIS VAR V POS IRIS SPEED CLIP HIGH LIGHT N O os O TOOOOCiIOOOT TU O Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 VAR OFF ON 99 to 99 99 to 99 20 to 479 20 to 269 460 to 45952 250 to 249 99 to 99 1 The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown
195. ay only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only 1 Using the firmware package file the version can be upgraded 2 Displayed only when OPERATION MENU POWER SAVE i LINK FAM is set to ENABL 2 6 Displays the model name Displays the serial No Displays the firmware package version Displays the 1 200 version stored in the ROM 1 505 16506 on the SY 355 Displays the 1 1300 version stored in the ROM IC1405 1 1406 on the SY 355 board Displays the IC1300 version stored in the ROM IC1405 IC1406 on the SY 355 board Displays the IC600 version stored the ROM IC602 on the DR 606 Displays the DVP 45 board s IC1900 version stored in the ROM IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the SY 355 board s IC900 version stored in the ROM IC505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the DVP 45 board s 1 200 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the DVP 45 board s IC400 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the DVP 45 board s IC800 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 Displays the DVP 45 board s IC801 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the DVP 45 board s IC900 version stored in the ROM 1 505 IC506 on the SY 355 board Displays the DVP
196. b 5 Move the position of the lens mount holder 6 Turn the lens mount counterclockwise and remove the mount cap Note Do not touch the filter while the mount cap is removed 7 Remove the screw M2 X 4 and mount lever 8 Turn the lens mount counterclockwise to remove 9 Remove the four bolts M3 X 8 and four spring washers and remove the CCD unit from the front panel PDW 700 V1 E Lens mount holder Front panel Filter knob Lens mount Mount cap CCD block assembly Front panel S 25 5 mS _ Ag ad wu 2 gt Vs S NA v D 7 25 7 5 2 Reinstalling CCD Unit 1 Attach the new shield finger LM to the front panel Do not directly touch shield finger LM Be careful not to get hurt with the edges when handling them Shield finger LM Confirm that shield finger LM is in position 2 Install the CCD unit to the front panel with four screws and four spring washers When installing the CCD block be careful so that the optical axis does not tilt misaligned due to a play If a picture on the monitor screen tilts loosen the screws of the CCD block and adjust the installation so that the picture becomes horizontal 3 Fully turn the lens mount clockwise to install 4 Turn the lens mount counterclockwise until the screw M2 X 4 hole comes in the range shown in the figure 5 Attach the mount lever and the screw M2 X 4
197. b gt 1 Lens LENS MANU IRIS C CLOSE Menu MENU OPERATION PAGE GAIN SW ITEM GAIN LOW gt 0dB ITEM GAIN MID 6 dB ITEM GAIN HIGH 12 dB MENU OPERATION PAGE OUTPUT 1 ITEM SDIOUT 1 SELECT HDSDI MENU PAINT PAGE SW STATUS ITEM GAMMA ON ITEM KNEE ON ITEM WHITE CLIP gt ON ITEM DETAIL ON 9 1 4 Notes on Adjustment Some adjustments of the Electrical Alignment require menu to be used Put the unit into the SERVICE mode to display the SERVICE menu Refer to 4 9 SERVICE Menu Be sure to turn off the power before extending the plug in board using the extension board Before starting adjustment set the main POWER switch of Camcorder to ON then be sure to allow for about 10 minute warm up time PDW 700 V1 E 9 1 5 Gray Scale Chart and its Maintenance Use of a reflective type gray scale chart with reflectance of 89 9 is recommended for the Gain adjustment If a reflective type gray scale chart is not available use a transparent type gray scale chart with a well maintained pattern box Calibrate illuminance or luminance on the surface of the gray scale chart to the specified value as follows Also calibrate the color temperature to exactly 3200K by adjusting the illumination Information on the reflective gray scale chart 16 9 Availability of reflective type gray scale chart The reflective type gray scale chart 16 9 is commercially available Chart R
198. be set to each BANK 3 different settings of the above SKIN DTL SELECT Sets the center phase of the chroma phase HUE in which the skin detail functions Unit Degrees This item can be set to each BANK 3 different settings of the above SKIN DTL SELECT Sets the width of the chroma phase HUE in which the skin detail functions Unit Degrees This item can be set to each BANK 3 different settings of the above SKIN DTL SELECT PDW 700 V1 E MTX LINEAR Display Setting user set matrix LINEAR gt MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX MATRIX Item MATRIX Setting OFF ON Function Turns ON OFF the linear matrix and user set matrix functions MATRIX USER MATRIX PRESET OFF ON OFF ON Turns ON OFF the user set linear matrix function Turns ON OFF the preset matrix function MATRIX PRST SEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects the preset matrix 1 equivalent to SMPTE 240M 2 equivalent to ITU 709 3 equivalent to SMPTE WIDE 4 equivalent to NTSC 5 equivalent to EBU 6 equivalent to ITU 601 MATRIX USER MATRIX USER R G R B 99 to 99 99 to 99 Sets the R G user set matrix coefficients Sets the R B user set matrix coefficients MATRIX USER G R G B 99 to 99 99 to 99 Sets the G R user set matrix coefficients Sets the G B user set matrix coefficients MATRIX USER B R B G MATRIX USER
199. below VF screen Shaded area IRIS WINDOW frame 2 Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH HEIGHT setting PDW 700 V1 E Function Selects the IRIS WINDOW detection range When VAR is selected the iris window can be set by the IRIS VAR WIDTH HEIGHT H POS V POS as described below Turns ON OFF the function that displays a frame marker for the auto iris detection window Sets the auto iris convergence level Adjusts the mix ratio of the auto iris detection peak value and average value Sets width of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW Sets height of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed Turns ON OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRIS detection level to 10096 when the video signal of higher than 100 is input 4 51 GENLOCK Display Setting GENLOCK input connector M19O0GENLOCK gt GENLOCK GL HD H PHA GL SD H PHA REFERENCE INTERNAL Item Setting Function GENLOCK OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that synchronizes the internal reference signal with the video signal that is connected to the connector GL HD H PHASE 99 to 99 GE
200. bly 2 SE 857 board Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors CN3 CN600 and CN1125 7 Remove the ten screws and remove the SE 857 board and the shield plate 8 Disconnect the dew sensor harness from the connector 9 Disconnect the fan motor from the connector CNI Reinstallation 1 When installing a new SE 857 board fold it several times as shown in the figure to maintain the folded shape Mountain fold three Valley fold three PDW 700 V1 E 7 19 Connect the fan motor harness to the tor Connect the dew sensor harness to the connector CN4 Install the SE 857 board and the shield plate with ten screws in the order of the numbers shown in the figure Tightening torque 10 10 0 01 Nem 1 0 0 1 kgf cm Connect the flexible card wires to the connec tors CN3 CN600 and 125 Note The flexible card wire connected to CN600 has a conductive area on both sides and the tip on the reverse side is insulated Insert the flexible card wire into the connector as far as it will go and then lock it To replace the SE 857 board remove ICA from the old SE 857 board and mount it on a new SE 857 board IC4 retains data including adjustment data and hours meter data Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal Take service action after replacing or repair ing the SE 857 board Ref
201. cations 1 Vp p 1100 Balanced PDW 700 V1 E DC OUT 12 V DIN 4 pin Female LENS 12 pin Female 4 00 O EXT VIEW EXT VIEW No Signal Specifications No Signal Specifications 1 UNREG GND GND for POWER 1 HET SW IN 0 V OFF OPEN 2 No connection 2 VTR TRIG IN ON O V OFF OPEN 3 No connection 3 LENS GND 4 UNREG 12 V OUT 11 to 17 V dc 4 AUTO 5 V OUT 5 MANU 0 V or OPEN 5 IRIS CONT OUT 3 4 V F16 to 6 2 V F2 8 AUDIO OUT XLR 5 pin Male 6 UNREG 12 V OUT 11Vto17V 7 IRIS PSTN IN 34 V F16 to 6 2 V F2 8 8 REMOTE LOCAL OUT AUTO IRHIS 0V MANUAL IRIS 5 V 9 EXTENDER IN 20 0 EX 0 8 1 8 V M Bi a OFF 44 8 V 0 dBu 0 775 V rms 10 ZOOM PSTN IN WIDE 2 V TELE 7V No Signal Specifications 11 LENS RX 1 ANALOG GND 12 LENS TX 2 AUDIO CH 1 X OUT 0 dBm 600 terminated 3 AUDIOCH 1 Y OUT 1 AUDIO 2 00 OUT LIGHT 2 pin Female 5 AUDIOCH 2 Y OUT G 64 EXT VIEW BATT IN 5 pin Male No Signal Specifications 1 LIGHT 12 V OUT 50 W MAX 2 GND EXT VIEW No Signal Specifications 1 IN 2 BATT ID IN 3 BATT REM IN 4 LIGHT CONT OUT 5 IN 11 to 17 V dc PDW 700 V1 E 1 21 WIRELESS RECEIVER IN D sub 15 pin Female 8 1 O i OE E O No Signal 1 GND 2 Audio CH1 IN 3 Audio CH2 IN 4 DC 7 V OUT 5 GND 6 SCLK 7 WR
202. caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 Optical block assembly 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Flexible card wire Refer to Section 1 7 6 Screw 5 Remove the loader assembly 1 7 Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the Optical block connector on the optical block assembly assembly 7 Remove the three screws from the OP position sensor on the SE 858 board 8 Move the OP position sensor and press the die casting part of the optical block assembly until entire OP rack assembly 1 visible 9 Insert the parallel pin into the hole of the OP rack assembly PDW 700 V1 E 10 Remove the two flat head screws from the main shaft Do not turn the two screws that secure the sub shaft Main shaft 11 Move the OP position sensor and remove the optical block assembly and the main shaft OP position sensor Do not turn these screws Cleaning 1 Clean the spindle motor Refer to Section 6 2 3 Replacement 1 Detach the main shaft from the removed optical block assembly and clean the main shaft using a cleaning cloth with cleaning Optical block assembly fluid soaked 2 Clean the sub shaft using a cleaning cloth with cleaning fluid soaked 3 Remove the screw to remove the OP rack assembly and the OP stopper rubber 4 Install the OP stopper rubber and the OP r
203. ce Center PDW 700 V1 E 9 When appears for all of the firmware programs click To Step 4 2 Sony XDCAM Microsoft Internet Explorer Prive RRD RTV SALAN YL O O HAD Ae Oesa LUE PVA 4 http 192 168 1 10 trame_set_t4htm Software Update License Registr auor e Professional Disc 2008 Sany Cornoratian Software Update Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation 11 Turn off the POWER switch and turn on again then the update is completed 2 12 PDW 700 V1 E 2 4 2 Account The user password for the XDCAM website can be changed on the Account page of the Maintenance menu Sony Microsoft Internet Explorer Prov RED HACANA Y M APH E em gt O O Pe Wh bttp 192 168 1 10 index cei Ese vo R amp Bookmarks V Check X AutoLink v n v Sendtow 4 Settings Status User Registration Device Information Hours Meter User Name Disc Status Thumbnails 11 Maintenance Network NE Software Update License Registration Item Setting Function User Registration User Name 31 byte alohanumeric User name and hyphen Password 31 byte alphanumeric New password and hyphen Verify Password 31 alphanumeric New password Re enter the new password for and hyphen verification
204. ce every 6000 Replace every 12000 H Check every 6000 Replace when bristles of brush become sparse or damaged remarkably Replace around the same time as optical block assembly About 5 years Replace every 110 000 times About 5 years Parts Number and Name A 8 820 389 02 KES 330A J1RP A 1374 689 A Seek motor assembly A 1256 291 A Cleaner P100 assembly A 1164 283 A PS 708 board AN 1 528 174 31 Lithium battery CR2032 A 1256 958 B Loader P100 assembly RP 1 820 459 21 Battery connector 6 1 6 2 Cleaning To make the most of the functions fully realize the performance of this unit and to lengthen the life of the unit and cartridge clean the components often 6 2 1 General Information for the Use of Cleaning Cloth 1 Cautions Be sure turn the power off before cleaning Each block in the drive consists of precision parts and is adjusted precisely Be careful not to damage the parts and to apply excessive force during cleaning Do not insert a cartridge before cleaning fluid complete ly evaporates after cleaning 2 Preparation 1 Turn the power off 2 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 2 2 Cleaning Loader Assembly Precautions The loader assembly consists of precision parts Be careful not to damage and give excessive force to the parts Cleaning Procedure Tools Cleaning cloth or cotton swab Cleaning fluid alcohol Procedur
205. ck screen and the clip list playback screen KEEP Resumes playback at the previous stop position TOP Starts playback from the top clip or from the top frame of the top sub clip 1 SDI OUT 1 SELECT SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI 2 The details of the frame frequency groups are shown below Frame frequency 59 94 Hz 50 Hz 23 98 Hz PDW 700 V1 E System frequency 59 94P 59 94i 29 97P 50P 50i 25P 23 98P 4 47 CAM CONFIG 2 Display Setting 2 on camcorder M130CAM CONFIG 2 TOP gt TEST SAW SELECT SA COLOR BAR SELECT ARI USER amp ALL ONLY OF RM COMMON MEMORY OF RM REC START H SHT DISP MODE SE AF MARKER SOURCE ASPEC NO DISPLAY CTRL FAN CONTROL AUTO FOCUS MAG SW MTRY W B F F M C Item Setting Function TEST SAW SELECT REC SAW Selects the test signal COLOR BAR SELECT ARIB 100 75 SMPTE Selects the color bar type Reference The R GAIN and B GAIN value also change accordingly at the same time USER amp ALL ONLY OFF ON Show only USER menu in the top menu RM COMMON MEMORY OFF ON Selects whether or not to share settings for when a remote control unit is connected and when the unit is used alone RM REC START RM CAM PARA When an remote control unit is connected selects which recording start stop buttons are enabled HM Hemote control unit CAM Camcorder PARA Both SHT DISP MODE SEC DEG Selects shutter speed dis
206. communication make up the 3 channel I2C bus 8 bit bus The 8 bit bus controls the serial communication bus SDA SCL of the 3 channel I2C bus controller Parallel bus to I2C bus Controller CPU I O The CPU loads the A D and controls the port terminal Main blocks 1 Audio mode control 2 AUDIO level indication 3 STOP PLAY keys control 4 CTL TC UBIT control 5 Real Time Clock control 6 WARNING LED control and alarm tone control 7 Wireless receiver optional equipment control 8 Software download function 9 Power supply voltage measuring circuit 10 Info Battery communication circuit 11 POWER OFF soft control circuit PDW 700 V1 E 12 FP CPU backup circuit 13 Backup lithium battery voltage measurement circuit 14 Independent operation of FP CPU 15 REAR input control 16 REAR XLR automatic insertion detection circuit control DET 47 board and sensor holder 17 Color LCD monitor drive control and switching rotation detection circuit 18 Nonvolatile memory control 19 Monochrome LCD display circuit with back light Description of each block 1 Audio mode control Audio control is performed by receiving the audio mode information and the menu setup information from the ITORON CPU on the S Y 355 board The switch information of the three positions 15 connected to the AD terminal of the CPU and processed as the AD signal of the three valued data The audio is switched in the I2C bus PCA 955
207. crew and remove the bracket a 4 Remove the screw and disconnect the harness from the connector CN2 then remove the PS 731 board 5 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 4 of removal 7 7 13 AXM 38 Board CN 2948 Board SW 1352 Board and RM 216 Board Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 Remove the connector panel Refer to Section 1 7 8 puce oe e Remove the two screws B2 X 5 and six screws P2 6 X 6 6 Remove the AXM 38 board and SW 1352 board in the direction of arrow SW 1352 board Connector panel 7 34 7 Remove the two screws B2 X 5 and remove the CN 2948 board 8 Remove the two screws P2 6 X 6 and remove the RM 216 board 9 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal 7 7 14 5 86 Board Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the front panel Refer to Section 1 7 5 Remove the DCP 44 board Refer to Section 7 7 2 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN1 on the MS 86 board 6 Remove the two screws B2 6 X 5 and remove the MS 86 bracket 7 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN2 on the MB 1111 board 8 Remove the two screws PSW2 X 5 and remove the MS 86 board j ew S GZ 2 RU Ez di um
208. ction 8 6 8 2 2 Adjustment After Replacing the DR 606 Board After replacing the DR 606 board or after replacing any parts in repair perform the procedure in the following order 1 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version Only when the board 1 replaced Refer to 1 11 2 Firmware Update Using the USB Memory for details 2 Perform adjustment in the following order Servol Automatic Adjustment Refer to Section 8 3 Skew Adjustment Refer to Section 8 4 Servo2 Automatic Adjustment Refer to Section 8 5 ACCELERATION OFFSET Refer to Section 4 10 21 8 2 3 Adjustment After Replacing the SE 857 Board After replacing the SE 857 board or after replacing any parts in repair perform adjustment in the following order UPLOAD TO EEPROM Refer to Section 4 10 26 Note After replacing the SE 857 board mount the EEPROM ICA from the old board to the new board If EEPROM ICA from the old board is not mounted to the new board perform this menu only when C4 is separately replaced ACCELERATION OFFSET Refer to Section 4 10 21 8 3 Servo1 Automatic Adjustment Make this adjustment with the loader assembly detached Fixtures Alignment disc PFD23A RS Weight 50 to 100 g Adjustment Procedure 1 Display the adjustment items referring to Section 8 1 3 2 Select SERVO 1 by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob A confirmation screen appears 3 Select YES by turnin
209. curve in the low luminance part Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW L MID Sets the range of video signal in which the Y black H MID HIGH gamma correction is effective LOW 0 to 3 6 L MID O to 7 2 H MID 0 to 14 4 HIGH to 28 8 4 36 PDW 700 V1 E NOISE SUPPRESS Display Setting the noise suppresser function P15ONOISE SUPPRESS 2NOISE SUPPRESS ON Item Setting Function NOISE SUPPRESS OFF ON Turn ON OFF the noise suppresser function SCENE FILE Display Operating the SCENE file P160SCENE FILE gt H 1 STANDARD 2 STANDARD 3 STANDARD 4 STANDARD 5 STANDARD STANDARD RECALL ENE STORE 5 5 Item Setting Function 1105 STANDARD Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of the camcorder STANDARD Selects whether to clear all current detail adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file SCENE RECALL Calls the SCENE file from the main unit Memory Stick SCENE STORE Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick F ID 16 characters Sets the file ID When the SCENE file is stored the file ID alphanumeric characters is saved symbols and spaces x Refer to 4 7 FILE Menu for the file selection display PDW 700 V1 E 4 37 4 6 MAINTENANCE Menu When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis in the setting column the setup value is the relative value The
210. d abraded or damaged or lost Replace the Suspension Collar 3 654 615 02 If the Hanging Bracket itself is deformed or becomes loose Replace the Handle Sub Assembly 1541 491 Suspension Collar State when the Suspension Collar is lost 6 8 PDW 700 V1 E Section 7 Replacement of Parts This section explains the replacement procedures of periodic replacement parts main mechanical parts and circuit boards 7 1 Optical Drive Assembly 7 1 1 Removing Reinstalling Loader Assembly When a cartridge is already being inserted in the unit be sure to take it out beforehand If you cannot take out the cartridge with normal operation refer to 1 6 How to Take Out a Cartridge Manually The loader assembly require periodic replacement Refer to 6 1 Periodic Check Replacement Parts List for details The optical block assembly in the drive may be damaged by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes Therefore be sure to establish a ground before starting an operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shor
211. d by the AUDIO IN switches on the inside panel Turns ON OFF the function that automatically detects whether the connector is connected to the AUDIO IN connector at the rear Sets the reference input level of the front microphone Select the reference input level when AUDIO IN CH1 of the rear is set to MIC Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it is turned all the way down OFF Almost inaudible SET Faintly audible Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker Has no effect on earphone volume Selects whether to make the rear earphone monaural or stereo 4 41 AUDIO 2 Display Setting 2 on audio 4 O 70 MO7OAUD 10 2 DATA LEN 1 REF LEVEL REF OUT CH12 MODE CH34 AGC MODE AGC SPEC LIMITER MODE OUT LIMITER _NWOOWW Item Setting Function AU DATA LEN IMX 16bit 24bit Sets the record format of audio AU REF LEVEL 20 dB 18 dB 16 dB Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal 12 dB EBUL AU REF OUT EBUL O dB 4 3 dB Sets the output level with respect to the REF level AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO STREO Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on the input level of the analog audio signals to be recorded on CH1 CH2 separately for each channel or in the stereo mode AU CH34 AGC MODE MONO STREO OFF Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on the input level of the analog audio signals to be recorded on CH3 CH4 separately for each channel
212. d menu items that are frequently used in daily opera tion The USER menu contains the following menu items as the default when the unit was shipped from the factory Add or delete the menu items as desired with the use of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu Name of page Name of category OUTPUT 1 OPERATION OUTPUT 2 OPERATION SUPERIMPOSE OPERATION LCD OPERATION REC FUNCTION OPERATION ASSIGNABLE SW OPERATION VF DISP1 OPERATION VF DISP2 OPERATION P LED OPERATION MARKER 1 OPERATION GAIN SW OPERATION VF SETTING OPERATION AUTO IRIS OPERATION SHOT ID OPERATION SHOT DISP OPERATION SET STATUS OPERATION LENS FILE OPERATION USER FILE FILE PDW 700 V1 E 4 3 4 4 OPERATION Menu When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis in the setting column the setup value is the relative value The range of setting in parenthesis can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu OUTPUT 1 Display Setting the Output Signal 00100UTPUT1 gt SDI OUT1 SELECT SDI OUT2 SELECT SDI OUT2 SUPER SELECT SUPER TEST OUT TEST OUT Item Setting SDI OUT 1 SELECT OFF HDSDI SDSDI SDI OUT 2 SELECT OFF HDSDI SDSDI SDI OUT 2 SUPER OFF ON TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD TEST OUT SUPER OFF ON Function Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 1 connector OFF No output signal HDSDI HD SDI signal SDSDI SD SDI signal Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT
213. d too much turn them back sufficiently and turn them clockwise again If measured data is turn the adjustment screw clockwise If measured data is turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise 2 Press the button The result on the tangential OUT side appears TAN ADJUST OUTSIDE ADJUST MEASURE TAGET 0 007 DEG NG ARE YOU NEXT YES Tangential OUT adjustment screw 10 When the result is satisfactory select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob YES cannot be selected when the result is not satisfactory TAN ADJUST OUTSIDE ADJUST MEASURE TAGET 0 007 DEG OK ARE YOU NEXT YES NO 11 The result on the tangential IN side appears 8 4 12 If the adjustment failed in step 11 repeat steps 1 to 2 until satisfactory result is obtained 1 Turn the tangential IN adjustment screw Notes The adjustment screw should be turned clockwise for this adjustment If they are turned too much turn them back sufficiently and turn them clockwise again f measured data is turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise f measured data is turn the adjustment screw clockwise 2 Press the button The result on the tangential IN side appears TAN ADJUST INSIDE ADJUST MEASURE TAGET 0 009 DEG NG ARE YOU NEXT YES Tangential IN adjustment screw 13 When the result is satisfactory select YES by turning the MENU knob
214. djustment DSP multiplication value Power voltage Refer to 7 8 6 FP 157 Board calibration value SIDE VOLUME adjustment value SE 857 1 4 EEPROM Adjustment data digital hours meter data Required Refer to 8 2 3 Adjustment After Replacing the SE 857 Board DR 617 1 20 EEPROM Backup data for the CN 2947 board PA board adjustment Replacement not required value in the production factory CCD block specific data PD 118 IC3 EEPROM PD 118 board adjustment value in the production factory Required x1 Hours Meter Operation Hours Back Up Serial No Model ID same as the data saved in EEPROM on the CN 3005 board Network setting same as the data saved in FRAM on the AT 177 board 2 Hours Meter Operation Hours System Information same as the data saved in FRAM on the 177 board GUI relevant data NRT Metadata relevant data Error Log Salvage information 1 48 PDW 700 V1 E 1 11 2 Firmware Update Using the USB Memory When the firmware update is performed all types of firmware are updated There are two methods of upgrading the firmware One is the method by using the USB memory and the other is the method by accessing the XDCAM website This section describes the method by using the USB memory For the method of accessing the XDCAM website refer to 2 4 1 Software Update For the method of upgrading by using the USB memory the USB memory in which the firmware package file of the latest versi
215. e 1 Clean eject levers in the loader assembly using the cleaning cloth or cotton swab with the cleaning fluid soaked Eject levers PDW 700 V1 E 6 2 3 Cleaning Spindle Motor Precautions To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before cleaning the drive assembly Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed The drive assembly consists of precision parts Be careful not to damage and give excessive force to the parts PDW 700V1 E Cleaning Procedure Tools Cleaning cloth or cotton swab Cleaning fluid alcohol Procedure 1 Remove dust and dirt attached to the turntable of the spindle motor and the cartridge guide supports using the cleaning cloth or cotton swabs with the cleaning fluid soaked After the cleaning ensure that fibers of the cleaning cloth or cotton swab are not attached on the spindle motor Turntable Cartridge guide support 6 2 4 Cleaning Pickup Lens Error codes 02 020 may be displayed due to smudged optical pickup lens Refer
216. e holes di Ww Su Nus 3 Install the No 3 gear assembly onto the base plate Install the No 3 gear assembly so that the gear of the No 3 gear assembly is properly engaged with the gear of the OP rack assem bly and with the No 2 gear 4 Attach two stopper washers to the two shafts of the base plate 5 Pullout the two parallel pins 6 Press the die casting part or the connector of the optical block assembly and check the following The optical block assembly moves smooth ly The OP rack assembly and the No 3 gear assembly are not disengaged 7 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 13 7 1 7 Replacing Seek Motor Assembly The seek motor assembly requires periodic replacement Refer to 6 1 Periodic Check Replacement Parts List for details To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Re
217. e memory stick Calling the USER file saved in the memory stick USER FILE LOAD When executing USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 1 lt 01 gt the USER FILE saved in the memory stick are called to the USER layer When the same USER FILE is loaded to two units the same settings are reflected to the both units but if the data in the PRESET layer are different the MENU display shows different values Data Structure USER USER layer PRESET layer Memory stick SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing USER FILE LOAD Call the USER FILE saved in the memory stick to the data in the USER layer of the USER menu items There are LOAD OPTION setups such as the one to choose whether or not to load the contents of USER CUSTOMIZE MENU when loading the data from the memory stick LOAD CUSTOM DATA Setup to choose whether or not to call the data to customize the menu LOAD OUT OF USER Setup to choose whether or not to have the data saved in the memory stick call the items that do not exist in the current customized USER menu BEFORE FILE PAGE Setup to choose whether or not to call the USER FILE data saved in the memory stick to the setup data contained in the pages after the USER FILE page when the USER menu contains the USER FILE page of FILE menu USER LOAD WHITE Setup to choose whether or not to call the WHITE BALANCE data saved in the USER FILE PDW 700 V1 E 5 3 2
218. e Setup Item F SET ALL PRST SCN REF LENS STD Power OFF SVC 10 FBC ADJUST FBC ADJUST MODE OFF X A X X X X Initial value FBC OFFSET 0 X A X X X X Q G FBC OFFSET 0 X A X X X X Q B FBC OFFSET 0 X A X X X X Q TEST OUT SELECT VBS Q Q X A X X Y when R G B 11 LCD ADJUST LCD VCO ADJUST EXEC LCD DC 0 X A X X X X Q LCD BLACK LIMIT 0 X A X X X X LCD PS BRIGHT 0 X A X X X X Q LCD BRIGHT 0 X A X X X X Q LCD BRIGHT R 0 X A X X X X Q LCD BRIGHT B 0 X A X X X X LCD CONTRAST 0 X A X X X X Q 12 FLARE FLARE 0 X A X X X X Q G FLARE 0 X A X X X X Q B FLARE 0 X A X X X X FLARE ON A X TEST OUT SELECT VBS X A X Y when R G B 13 GAMMA DETAIL R GAMMA 0 X A X X X X G GAMMA 0 X A X X X X Q B GAMMA 0 X A X X X X DETAIL LEVEL 0 X A X X X X Q 14 MANUAL RPN TEST OUT SELECT VBS X A X Ywhen R G B RPN CURSOR OFF X A X X X X Initial value SUPER MENU ON Q Q X X X X Q RPN WIDTH 1 X A X X X X X CURSOR H POS 960 X A X X X X X CURSOR V POS 540 X A X X X X X CURSOR JUMP CURR X A X X X X X RECORD RPN EXEC DELETE 15 RPN MANAGE CONC APR RESET EXEC CONC2 APR RESET EXEC RPN ALL PRESET EXEC AUTO CONCEAL EXEC AUTO CONCEAL2 EXEC 16 VDR AUDIO A D ADJUST EXEC AUDIO D A ADJUST EXEC AU SIDE VOL ADJ EXEC POWER A D ADJUST EXEC
219. e V SAW correction The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL Adjusts the V PARA correction The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL Turns ON OFF all of the black shading menu items of R G B H V and SAW PARA corrections Adjusts the master black level All of the R G and B master black levels are adjusted Temporarily adjusts the master gain value PDW 700 V1 E SHADING S050SHADING AUTO WHT SHADING RESET WHT SHD m AUTO BLK SHADI NG RESET BLK SHD 2D BLACK SHADING TEST OUT SELECT lt MASTER GAIN TMP Item Setting AUTO WHT SHADING Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item RESET WHT SHD Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item AUTO BLK SHADING Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item RESET BLK SHD Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item 2D BLACK SHADING OFF ON TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD MASTER GAIN TMP 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB VCO ADJUST S060VCO ADJUST TEST OUT SELECT CLK OUT SELECT NTSC AREA HDCK HDCK PAL AREA SDCK Item Setting TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD CLK OUT SELECT OFF HDCK N HDCK P SDCK HDCK NTSC AREA 99 99 HDCK PAL AREA 99 to 99 SDCK 99 to 99 PDW 700 V1 E Function Starts to the auto white shading adjustment Returns the
220. e damaged by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes Therefore be sure to establish a ground before starting an operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed board is easily cut Be very careful not to fold them Removal 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Disconnect the flexible board DR SE857 from the connector CN600 on the SE 857 board 7 Disconnect the flexible board DR SE858 from the connector CN600 on the SE 858 board 8 Disconnect the flexible board DR OP from the connector on the optical block assembly 9 Remove the four step screws and draw out the drive sub assembly in the direction of the arrow and then of the arrow PDW 700 V1 E Step screws Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if
221. e selection display of the USER FILE display For details refer to the corresponding item of the USER FILE display 4 58 PDW 700 V1 E SCENE FILE Display Operating the SCENE file 4 5 FILE STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD TANDARD ENE RECALL ENE STORE ID STANDARD Item Setting 1to5 STANDARD STANDARD SCENE RECALL Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display SCENE STORE Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display F ID 16 characters alphanumeric characters symbols and space Function Selects the file when reading the SCENE file from the unit Selects whether to return the SCENE file setup to the standard setting or not to return to When pressing the MENU knob during the display the standard setting is canceled and returns to the original setting Read the SCENE file from a Memory Stick For the description of the file selection display see below Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick For the description of the file selection display see below Sets the file ID When the SCENE file is stored the file ID is saved File selection display When calling a file from the inside of the unit when saving a file to the inside of the unit PO1OSCENE RECALL ESC RECALL OK YES NO DISPLAY MODE ALL SCENE SCENE2 FILE SCENE4 SCENES 5FILE LOAD gt MEM1 5 SCENE RECAL
222. e the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the front panel Refer to Section 1 7 5 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 Remove the connector panel Refer to Section 1 7 8 Remove the rear panel Refer to Section 1 7 9 Remove the DCP 44 board Refer to Section 7 7 2 Remove the DVP 45 board Refer to Section 7 7 3 Remove the fan motor rear Refer to Section 7 4 Remove the MS 86 board Refer to Section 7 7 14 Remove the RE 246 board Refer to Section 7 7 18 12 Remove the four screws and remove the separator Remove the RX 101 board Refer to Section 7 7 19 center Separator center Remove the screw and remove the MA bracket Disconnect the MA 162 board from the connector CN115 on the MB 1111 board Remove the two screws and remove the separator front CN1115 MB 1111 board Separator front PSW2 x 5 MA 162 board MA bracket 7 38 17 Disconnect the flexible card wires from the three connectors CN109 CN111 113 18 Disconnect the harnesses from the five connectors CN110 CN112 CN114 CN117 CN123 ZA 2 KE Flexible 2 1 flat cable Flexible card wire CN112 CN123 CN114 card wire 19 Remove the five screws and remove the MB 1111 board in the direction of arrow 20 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 19 of remo
223. ecord shot mark 1 by using RET button HET SHOT MARK 2 OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that record shot mark 2 by using RET button INDEX PIC POS 0 SEC to 10 SEC Sets the function that display thumbnail image when recording time FIND MODE R ST CLIP Selects an operation mode when the NEXT PREV button is pressed R ST Moves to the essence mark of the next or previous REC START CLIP Moves to the top of the next clip when the NEXT button is pressed and moves to the top of the current clip when the PREV button is pressed Moves to the top of the previous clip when the PREV button is pressed at the top of the clip 4 46 PDW 700 V1 E CONFIG 1 Display Setting 1 on camcorder 12 CONFIG 1 gt REC TALLY BLINK REC START BEEP SUB LCD MODE SEL SUB LCD TIMER REMOTE SPLAY Item TALLY BLINK HEC START BEEP I F D RECORDING E CLIP MODE SITION Setting OFF ON OFF ON Function Turns ON OFF the tally blinking at the event of BATTERY BEFORE END DISC BEFORE END Turns ON OFF the beep sound at REC START STOP SUB LCD MODEL SEL TIMER OFF CONT Sets the time counter display on the LCD after the power supply is turned off SUB LCD TIMER 1H 3H 8H TIMER Display is terminated after the elapse of time which is specified in the item SUB LCD TIMER below OFF displayed CONT Displayed Specifies the time to terminate the display of time counter after the power
224. ed The items are indicated by the symbols Symbols Can be saved The menu display value remains as it is even after saving Can be saved The menu display value becomes 0 when it is saved Cannot be saved Dxoo Saved with the factory default setting regardless of the current setting If the setting value is changed in the Service mode the setting value in the Service mode returns to the default value when the power is turned off Virtually invalid because the operation is prohibited e Can be saved only when executed from Remote The items that have the crossing mark X cannot be saved in their ALL and PRESET columns can be the target of the USER file and USER PRESET if the items are located in the USER menu However the items that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory at power OFF are excluded from the target PDW 700 V1 E 4 105 1 1 5 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 SUPERIMPOSE LCD REC FUNCTION ASSIGNABLE SW POWER SAVE Setup SDI OUT 1 SELECT SDI OUT 2 SELECT SDI OUT 2 SUPER TEST OUT SELECT TEST OUT SUPER LIVE amp PLAY DOWN CON MODE WIDE ID SUPER VFDISP SUPER MENU SUPER TC SUPER MARKER LCD COLOR F SET OFF OFF OFF VBS OFF OFF CROP THROU ON OFF OFF 0 LCD MARKER amp ZEBRA ON CACHE INTVAL REC CACHE REC TIME TAKE TOTAL TIME REC T
225. ed for the unit These are because of parts common ality and improvement Parts list has the present standardized repair parts 3 Stock of Parts Parts marked with at SP Supply Code column of the spare parts list may not be stocked Therefore the delivery date will be delayed 4 Harness Harnesses with no part number are not registered as spare parts 1 12 11 Unleaded Solder Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with a lead free mark LF indicating the solder contains no lead Caution Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size E LEAD FREE MARK Be sure to use the unleaded solder for the printed circuit board printed with the lead free mark The unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 higher than the ordinary solder therefore it is recom mended to use the soldering iron having a temperature regulator The ordinary soldering iron can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time The printed pattern copper foil may peel away if the heated tip 1 applied for too long so be careful 1 55 Section 2 XDCAM Web Site 2 1 XDCAM Web Site Overview Operations such as confirming the settings of the camcorder and upgrading the firmware can be performed via the network connector The XDCAM website consists of the following menus Status menu e Device Information e Hours
226. efer to Section 1 7 3 Handle the film of the exhaust duct with care since 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 it may be damaged 1f strong force is applied or a sharp 4 Remove the connector panel Refer to Section 7 7 8 object touches it 5 Remove the rear panel Refer to Section 7 7 9 6 Remove the two screws B2 6 X 5 then remove the 9 Remove the two screws and remove the exhaust duct bracket and bracket b 7 Disconnect the RE 246 board from the connector CN113 on the MB 1111 board Exhaust 10 Remove the screw B2 6 X 5 and remove the WRR RE 246 board case in the direction of arrow 11 Disconnect the flexible flat cable from the connector 8 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of CN2 removal 12 Remove the two screws B2 X 5 an remove the RX 101 board 7 7 19 RX 101 Board Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the connector cover Refer to Section 1 7 7 Remove the connector panel Refer to Section 1 7 8 Remove the rear panel Refer to Section 1 7 9 Remove the PS 731 board Refer to Section 7 7 12 Remove the RE 246 board Refer to Section 7 7 18 Ne Cushion RX 101 board 13 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 12 of removal PDW 700 V1 E 7 37 7 7 20 MB 1111 Board a oe p 14 15 16 Remov
227. eflective type gray scale chart GS HD of Murakami Color Research Lab Inc or equivalent Available from Murakami Color Research Lab Inc Notes on handling Do not touch the chart surface with bare hands Do not rub or stain the chart surface Do not expose or use the chart under direct sunlight for a long time Do not leave or store the chart in a place that is very humid or contains toxic gas Do not place anything on top of the chart surface When a chart is stored for a long time without using it open the case and leave the chart to dry for 30 minutes or hour once or twice every month Guideline of replacing the chart when used as the reference chart The reflective characteristics of the reflective type gray scale chart can easily deteriorate over time As a guideline the chart should be replaced every 2 years but the replace ment interval depends on the storage conditions of the chart PDW 700 V1 E Setting In case of using reflective type chart Measuring equipment Luxmeter Minolta T 10 or equiva lent pre calibrated 1 Turnon the light source that illuminates the chart and allow it to warm up for about 30 minutes 2 Fixaluxmeter in front of the reflective type chart Obtain an illuminance of 2000 Ix uniformly over the entire surface of the chart by adjusting the position and angle of the illuminations Note Place the light source at the same height and direc
228. em 5 3 0 1 kgf cm M3 screw 80 X 107 0 01 Nem 8 0 0 1 kgf cm PDW 700 V1 E 1 12 3 Stop Washer Never re use the pre used stop washers When attaching the part be sure to use the new stop washer Stop washer Sony part number 3 559 408 11 How to remove stop washer 1 Remove the stop washer using a pair of small nippers Or tweezers Be careful not to drop the stop washer in the unit Be careful not to bring the tool into contact with the other parts especially the drum How to install stop washer When attaching it is recommended to use the following tool Refer to 1 10 1 Service Tools for details Stop washer fastening tool Stop washer fastening tool 1 Putthe stop washer to the top thin part of the stop washer fastening tool 2 Stand the thin top of the tool on the top of the shaft in an upright position 3 Press thick part of the tool downward and attach the stop washer to the shaft Stop washer fastening tool Stop washer l 7 Stop washer C 1 53 1 12 4 Description of CCD Block Number All of the CCD units have their unique ID numbers This number is called the CCD block number indicating the type of the CCD block and serial number The label indicating the CCD block number is attached inside of each CCD unit Example ABC xxxxx Serial number of the CCD unit Type of the CCD block Applicable Model Serial No Type of the CCD Block PDW 700 10001 and Higher MYA
229. en displayed when is being adjusted AUDIO A D ADJUST ADJUSTING e Screen displayed when is finished and CH2 is being adjusted AUDIO A D ADJUST PDW 700 V1 E If TIME OVER ERR is indicated on the adjustment screen check the menu setting switch setting and others and re execute the adjustment If INPUT OVER ERR is indicated on the adjustment screen check the signal level since the input signal level may be too high If INPUT UNDER ERR is indicated on the adjustment screen check the signal level since the input signal level may be too low If NO INPUT ERR is indicated on the adjustment screen check the input signal since the signal may not be input correctly 4 101 4 12 AUDIO D A Error Correction Before starting adjustment refer to 9 1 Preparation Fixtures and Equipment For more details refer to 1 10 2 Measuring Equipment Audio level meter Adjustment Procedure L Execute AUDIO D A ADJUST of the VDR MAINTE NANCE page of the SERVICE menu AUDIO D A ADJUST ADJUST START YES Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob Turn the AUDIO LEVEL knob of CHI so that the output level of becomes 0 dBu 0 05 dB Turn the AUDIO LEVEL knob of CH2 so that the output level of CH2 becomes 0 dBu 0 05 dB AUDIO D A ADJUST COMPLETE ADJUSTING Select YES turning the MENU knob and press
230. en the software key is found normally the message INSTALL OK YES NO appears Select YES to start installation gt DO7 OPTION INSTALL e HD SD SDI COMPOSITE SD REC amp 24P REC amp When the Install key 18 installed normally the message Valid after power off 1 displayed Turn OFF the power according to the message After the equipment reboots select the OPTION page of the DIAGNOSIS menu and confirm that the symbol at the top of registered option name is changed from a dash to a circle symbol 1 51 1 12 Other Overview 1 12 1 Notes on Handling Optical Block Assembly To prevent the damage due to the electrostatic charge be sure to put the following grounding while handling the optical block assembly KES 330A Grounding for the human body Be sure to put on an antistatic band for grounding with impedance lower than 105 Q whose other end is grounded Because static electricity charged on clothes is not drained away be careful not to touch your clothes to the optical block assembly Grounding for the work table Be sure to place the optical block assembly on an antistatic mat with impedance lower than 10 recommended or a copper sheet for grounding Antistatic band Optical block assembly Antistatic mat 1 52 Precautions The optical block assembly is a precise unit Be careful not to subject it to shocks by dropping or rough han dling Do
231. er to Section 7 8 8 7 20 Obverse side Conduction Screws 9 M1 7 Shield plate 5 gt p 17 pira o lt gt Reverse side Insulation Conduction Screw M1 7 IC4 SE 857 board PDW 700 V1 E 7 2 3 SE 858 Board To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded Flexible board is easily cut Be very careful not to fold them Removal 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN2 7 Disconnect
232. eration Manual CNB 25 board Ref No Name Function Factory setting D6 Overvoltage protection Lights when the overvoltage protection starts to operate when the indicator input voltage of EXT DC or BATT reaches approx 19 5 V or more This shuts down the unit D7 Low voltage protection Lights when the operation of the low voltage protection circuit of indicator CNB 25 board is repeated several times due to some error This shuts down the unit D8 Shut Down signal from Lights when the Shut Down signal is sent from the RE 246 board HE 246 due to a load error of the RE 246 board This shuts down the unit When the unit is shut down under the condition above this level the overvoltage protection for the entire unit may start In this case the indicator does not light PDW 700 V1 E 1 27 157 Ref No Bit D842 D843 0844 0845 0846 51 52 510 S20 5460 501 5700 5701 5702 703 5830 S831 S832 1 28 5702 5703 18701 S501 15460 700 WARNING THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP TEST ACCESS CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 AUTO1 ON H OFF L AUTO2 ON H OFF L MONITOR CH1 2 CH3 4 NC NC NC ASSIGN2 CCC SW ASSIGN1 MONITOR CH L MIX CH R CPU RESET BRIGHT THUMBNAIL ESSENCE MARK 842 5844 0844 5839 836 5933
233. erface The CPU exchanges data with the USB controller IC1500 via the PCI bus interface In addition the CPU exchanges the data with the CPU of the system control via the PCI PCI Bridge IC500 S Y 355 board on the same bus PCI BRIDGE 1 900 The functions of PCI BRIDGE are data relay of the PCI bus and the I F function to the OSD display controller on the LVIS ICA400 DV P 45 board PDW 700 V1 E lt USB HOST Controller 1 1500 USB HOST Controller exchanged data with the USB devices such as the flash memory using the interface compatible with the USB 2 0 lt Ether interface gt Ether interface controls the Ether PHY IC1 CN 2946 board and connects to the network via it FP 157 board The FP 157 board has the FP_CPU IC921 as the sub microprocessor and the hardware consists of the synchro nous and asynchronous serial communication 2 commu nication bus and the 8 bit bus The main function is controlling the audio system Main functions Synchronous serial communication The functions of synchronous serial communication are the color LCD monitor setting monochrome LCD display audio D A setting analog wireless communica tion and the ITORON communication Asynchronous serial communication Digital wireless communication 2C bus The rear connector detection such as PLAY STOP key Info BATTERY communication Real Time Clock communication Serial EEPROM Memory communi cation and I O control
234. et to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 100 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 120 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 125 2 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 250 2 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 500 2 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 1000 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit SHUTTER 1 2000 OFF ON When set to ON this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit 1 This does not appear when FORMAT is set to 59 9P and SCAN MODE is set to 23 9P 2 Displayed items are different by setting in FORMAT display 4 20 PDW 700 V1 E LENS FILE Display Operating the LENS file O230LENS FILE gt LENS FILE 5 1 9 Selects the LENS file Displays the file ID of the LENS file that is selected by the above LENS FILE SELECT Displays the serial number of the LENS Displays the LENS specific ID LENS INFORMATION S No i L ID L Item Setting Function LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 F ID Display only S No Display only L ID Display only L MF Display only Displays the name of the LENS manufacturer FORMAT Display Setting the video format When 1080 is
235. f the DISPLAY switch on the sen user Pou Nance PE eee USER layer e 2 Select SERVICE from the TOP menu and press the SERVICE layer MENU knob FacToRY tayer 111 2 Perform the following adjustments VCO CONT frequency adjustment VA gain adjustment ALL FILE SAVE Black shading adjustment 1 Insert a memory stick 2 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to the ON position White shading adjustment Black set adjustment 3 Let the ALL FILE page of the FILE menu appear on After BLACK BALANCE 1s displayed press and the screen and press the MENU knob hold the AUTO W B BAL switch toward BLACK 2FO3OALL FILE TOP until PERS SET is displayed again ALL FILE LOAD EXEC LL FILE SAVE EXEC Perform RPN ALL PRESET 0000000000000000 EXEC Perform AUTO CONCEAL EXEC Perform AUTO CONCEAL2 EXEC OFF OFF 3 Restore the DIP switch on the AT 177 board to exit the service mode Refer to section 4 9 4 Select F ID and set the file ID 4 Turn on power of the camera 5 Select ALL FILE SAVE and execute it by pressing the 5 Perform ALL FILE LOAD and load the saved ALL MENU knob FILE 6 When the cursor is moved to the file selection display select the destination file where the file is going to be saved and press the MENU knob When saving a new file select NEW FILE PDW 700 V1 E 7 27 7 7 Removing Installing Boards 7 7 1 CN 294
236. fect in the EEPROM ICA SE 857 board is thought CLEAR MEDIA LOG EXECUTING FAILED 8 7 After Adjustment 1 Turn off the power 2 Reinstalled the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 2 PDW 700 V1 E Section 9 Electrical Alignment 9 1 Preparation 9 1 1 Fixtures and Equipment Fixtures Pattern box PTB 500 Part No J 6029 140 B Grayscale chart Commercially available on the market Reflective type 16 9 White window chart Equipment Oscilloscope Tektronix TDS3054 or equivalent 150 MHz or more HD waveform monitor LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP LV5152DA or equivalent SD waveform monitor Tektronix 1755A or equivalent Frequency counter Advantest TR5821AK or equivalent Color monitor Sony HDM 20E1U 14E1U 14E5U or equivalent Signal generator Tektronix SG 5010 TG 2000 or equivalent AC adapter Sony AC DNIO Luminance meter Konica Minolta LS 110 or equivalent Luxmeter Konica Minolta T 10 or equivalent 9 1 2 Connection PDW Om AC adapter AC DN10 PTB 500 HD vector monitor HD SDI Color monitor SD vector Composite PDW 700 V1 E 9 1 9 1 3 Switch Setting before Adjustment Before performing adjustment set switches and menu as follows Inside panel GAIN switch L 0 dB OUTPUT DCC switch CAM OFF WHITE BAL switch PRST Front panel SHUTTER switch OFF Filter kno
237. fer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Remove the drive sub assembly Refer to Section 7 1 2 7 Reverse the drive sub assembly Note Do not to put the drive sub assembly reversed on anywhere If it is put this may cause damage to the spindle motor or the optical block assembly 8 Remove the No 2 gear and the No 3 gear assembly Refer to Section 7 1 6 9 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN2 10 Remove the two screws and remove the seek motor assembly 8 Screws 1 7 11 Secure new seek motor assembly with two SCrews Tightening torque 10 10 0 01 Nem 1 0 0 1 kgf cm 12 Clamp the harness to the two hooks and connect it to the connector CN2 13 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 7 14 PDW 700 V1 E 7 1 8 Replacing Spindle Motor To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic
238. firmation screen appears 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob ARE YOU SURE YES NO A warm up screen appears If five minutes has already passed since power ON this screen appears only for a moment 4 confirmation screen appears when 0000 SEC is SKEW WARMING UP REMAINED 0299 SEC displayed PDW 700 V1 E SET PFD SKEW rec E DISC 23A RS 7 Set the alignment disc by referring to steps 4 to 6 in Section 8 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob The skew adjustment selection screen appears Select TAN ADJUST by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob DRIVE MAINTENANCE ADJUST A confirmation screen appears Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob TAN ADJUST ADJUST START YES NO The result appears and a confirmation screen appears TAN ADJUST INITIALIZING OK ARE YOU SURE YES NO In case of error The defect in the alignment disc is thought TAN ADJUST CHECK DISK RAD ERROR 8 3 8 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob The result on the tangential OUT side appears 9 Ifthe adjustment failed in step 8 repeat steps 1 to 2 until satisfactory result is obtained 1 Turn the tangential OUT adjustment screw The adjustment screw should be turned clockwise for this adjustment If they are turne
239. g as it is pressed ALT Toggles between ON and OFF each time it is pressed Turns OFF automatically after 5 seconds have passed since ON 1 Displayed only when AF DISPLAY is set to ON on SERVICE MENU 2 The setting of this item is retained even after the power is turned off 4 48 PDW 700 V1 E CAM CONFIG 3 Display Setting 3 on camcorder 14 CONFIG 3 gt ALAC AUTO Item Setting Function ALAC OFF AUTO Sets the operation of the lens aberration correction function OFF Turns OFF the function forcibly even when the lens that supports the aberration correction function is mounted AUTO Turns ON the function when the lens that supports the aberration correction function is mounted PRESET WHT Display WHITE BAL switch The function to adjust the white balance gain that is assigned to PRST 1 5 WHT gt COLOR TEMP lt P gt 3200 C TEMP BAL lt P gt 0 GAIN lt gt GAIN lt P gt AWB ENABLE lt P gt Item Setting Function COLOR TEMP lt P gt Displays the color Sets the white balance preset temperature Reference The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at Guideline the same time C TEMP BAL lt P gt 99 to 99 Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum color cannot be obtained by the above COLOR TEMP Reference The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time R GAIN lt P gt 99 to 99 Uses this
240. g the MENU knob and press the MENU knob ADJUST START YES NO A confirmation screen appears SERVO 1 LIGNMENT DISC A RS ADJUST START YES NO 4 Select YES by turning the MENU knob 5 Open the shutter of the cartridge of the alignment disc using the following procedure Be sure to close it after the adjustment Note Opening the shutter of the cartridge by hand is limited to the optical drive alignment Do not open it for any other purpose or touch the disc in the cartridge How to Open Open the shutter a little in the direction of the arrow while pressing the claw Then move the gear by hand until the shutter is completely opened 8 2 How to Close Move the gear in the direction of the arrow until the shutter 1s closed and the claw snaps 6 Setthe cartridge with its shutter opened so that its guide holes are aligned with the two guide shafts of the unit 7 Putthe weight on the cartridge Cartridge Guide shafts 8 Press the MENU knob The result appears SERVO 1 ADJUSTING COMPLETED PDW 700 V1 E 8 4 Skew Adjustment Make this adjustment with the loader assembly detached Fixtures Alignment disc PFD23A RS Flat blade screwdriver Locking compound Weight 50 to 100 g 8 4 1 Tangential Skew Adjustment 1 Display the adjustment item referring to Section 8 1 3 2 Select SKEW by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob A con
241. haracters symbols and spaces When the LENS FILE STORE is executed the file ID is saved SOURCE Display only Displays the memory number of the LENS file from which the data is read LENS NO OFFSET Press the MENU knob to Returns the LENS file setting to the standard setting execute this menu item LENS AUTO RECALL OFF ON S No Turns ON OFF the auto recall function when a serial lens is attached S No Display only Displays the serial number of the lens when the serial lens is attached when LENS AUTO RECALL is set to S No L ID Display only Displays the unique ID of the lens when a serial lens is attached L MF Display only Displays the manufacturer name of the lens when a serial lens is attached When a lens other than a serial lens is attached Unknown is displayed When the LENS FILE STORE is executed the stored memory number is displayed When the LENS NO OFFSET is executed the message NO OFFSET 1 displayed File selection display When calling a file from the inside of the unit when saving a file to the inside of the unit LENS RECALL ESC LENS STORE ESC DISPLAY MODE DISPLAY MODE 1 1 10 2 2 4 ETJEIETEJETE 3 3 3 4 3 4 5 5 CIEJEIEIETEJI F ILE LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE File selection display When reading a file from a Memory Stick when saving a file to a Memory Stick
242. he SERVICE menu if Resetting the data changed the SERVICE mode SERVICE RESET When executing SERVICE RESET on the MENU SET page under the SERVICE menu page 1 501 the setups changed in the SERVICE mode are initialized to the factory default value d OPERA MAINTE Data Girict re TION PAINT NANCE FILE SERVICE USER layer mi PRESET layer SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Executing SERVICE RESET Copy the data in the FACTORY layer to the SERVICE layer Initializing all the setup data to the factory default values FACTORY PRESET When executing FACTORY RESET on the MENU SET page under SERVICE menu page 1 lt S01 gt all the changed setups except for the DIAGNOSIS menu are initialized to the default value USER layer a PRESET layer La senvic layer a Ta cacronv ayer A a Executing FACTORY PRESET Copy the data stored in the FACTORY layer to the SERVICE PRESET and USER layers PDW 700 V1 E 5 4 Special Items to Save 5 4 1 White Gain Using the ALL FILE Executing item ALL FILE SAVE FILE menu ALL FILE page ALL FILE LOAD FILE menu ALL FILE page STORE ALL PRESET FILE menu ALL page CLEAR ALL PRESET FILE menu ALL FILE page ALL PRESET FILE menu ALL FILE page Using the REFERENCE FILE Executing item REFERENCE STORE FILE menu REFERENCE page REFERENCE CLEAR FILE menu REFERENCE page Using the SCENE FILE Executing
243. hen you want to adjust the color B GAIN lt B gt 99 to 99 temperature by changing the GAIN lt Uses this item when you want to adjust the color temperature by changing the B GAIN lt B ch gt 4 28 PDW 700 V1 E BLACK FLARE Display Adjusting black flare POSOBLACK FLARE gt MASTER BLACK O 0 0 O 0 O O N O Item Setting Function MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the master black level All of the R G and B black levels are adjusted R BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the R black level B BLACK 99 to 99 Adjusts the B black level MASTER FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the master flare compensation level All of the R G and B flare compensation levels are adjusted R FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the R flare compensation level G FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the G flare compensation level B FLARE 99 to 99 Adjusts the B flare compensation level FLARE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the flare compensation function TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector PDW 700 V1 E 4 29 GAMMA Display Adjusting gamma 4 gt GAMMA STEP GAMMA MASTER GAMMA R GAMMA G GAMMA B GAMMA TEST OUT SELECT GAMMA TABLE GAM TABLE STD Item Setting GAMMA OFF ON STEP GAMMA 0 35 to 0 90 0 05 step MASTER GAMMA 99 to 99 R GAMMA 99 to 99 G GAMMA 99 to 99 B GAMMA 99 to 99 TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD GAMMA TABLE STD H
244. hether the LSI corresponding to the LSI DCP2 on the DEV STATUS page on the installed DCP board is PROCYON V or not If cross mark X is indicated the DCP board on which ZXCV is mounted is installed TG VERSION Display only Indicating the ROM Version number of IC8 TG 260 board The board name to be displayed is the name of the board that is actually installed SERVICE FILE S250SEHVICE FILE TOP SVC FILE LOAD EXEC gt SVC FILE SAVE d EXEC F 1D OOOOOO0000000000 Item Setting Function SVC FILE LOAD Press the MENU knob Loads the SERVICE file from the main unit or a memory stick to execute this menu item SVC FILE SAVE Press the MENU knob Saves the SERVICE file in the main unit or a memory stick to execute this menu item F ID 16 characters Sets the file ID alphanumeric characters When the SVC FILE SAVE is executed this ID is saved symbols and spaces 4 84 PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 Drive Maintenance Used for the maintenance of the optical drive Use an external monitor for the following items 4 10 5 ACCELERATION SENSOR 4 10 21 ACCELERATION OFFSET The alignment disc PFD23A RS is required for the following item 4 10 16 SKEW 4 10 1 Basic Operation on Drive Maintenance Menus Enter the drive maintenance menu from the SERVICE menu Refer to 4 9 SERVICE Menu If a cartridge is remaining inside it 15 ejected automatically 1 Select the S16 VDR MAINTENANCE on the SERVICE
245. ht signal higher than the knee point Sets the both detail black and white limiters Limits the white peak of the detail signal Limits the black peak of the detail signal Limits the black peak of the V detail signal Selects the source signal of the V detail signal Selects an operation mode of DETAIL H V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page H V Increase decrease volume for H and V moves in the opposite manner V Controls V DTL PDW 700 V1 E SD DETAIL Display Adjusting DETAIL of SD 90SD DETAIL DETAIL DETAIL LEV CRISPENING DTL WHT L E DTL FREQUE DTL RA CROSS COLO Item SD DETAIL SD DETAIL LEVEL SD CRISPENING SD DTL WHT LIMIT SD DTL BLK LIMIT SD LEVEL DEPEND SD LV DEPEND LVL SD DTL FREQUENCY SD DTL H V RATIO SD CROSS COLOR PDW 700 V1 E Setting OFF ON 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 OFF ON 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 Function Turns ON OFF the SD detail correction function Sets the overall SD detail signal level Sets the SD crispening level Limits the white peak of the SD detail signal Limits the black peak of the SD detail signal Turns ON OFF the level depend function This function decreases the amount of detail signal when the video signal amplitude is small Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressed by the level depend Sets the frequency thickness of the H SD detail signal Sets the SD V detail sig
246. igital audio signal four channels input from the AES EBU INPUT connector undergoes level conversion in the AXM 38 board and 18 input into CAVA 1 200 of the DVP 45 board After the signal 15 decoded in CAVA IC200 it is synchronized and converted to the same sampling rated as the recorded video signal with the sampling rate converter IC700 IC703 Digital audio signals eight channels that include input HD SDI signal when the option is attached are decoded with the DCP 44 board Then the signals are converted into serial digital audio signals and entered into CAVA IC200 of the DVP 45 board via the MB 1111 board CAVA IC200 selects the above entered digital audio signal and sends it as the recorded audio data to AUDIO REC DSP IC800 Playback system The playback digital audio signal that underwent playback signal processing in AUDIO PB DSP 1 801 is entered into CAVA IC200 then separated and converted into the serial digital audio signals for analog output systems and digital output systems The analog output system serial digital audio signal is sent to the AUDIO D A converter in the FP 157 board via the MB 1111 board After it is converted into an analog audio signal the signal is output to the AUDIO OUT connector headphone and monitor speaker The digital output system serial digital audio signal is sent to the DCP 44 board via the MB 1111 board The signal 1 combined with the video signal in the DCP 44 board a
247. ion 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Remove the drive sub assembly Refer to Section 7 1 2 7 Reverse the drive sub assembly Do not to put the drive sub assembly reversed on anywhere If it is put this may cause damage to the spindle motor or the optical block assembly Parallel pin Stopper washer No 3 gear 8 Align the position of the upper and the lower holes of the No 3 gear and insert the parallel 2 2 9 Move the optical block assembly to the Parallel pin position shown in the figure while pressing the die casting part of the optical block assembly 10 Align the upper and lower holes of the OP rack assembly while pressing the both ends of the OP rack assembly and insert the parallel pin into the holes 11 Remove the stopper washer and remove the No 3 gear assembly 12 Remove the stopper washer and remove the No 2 gear N QN 0 Qu SN N C Stopper washer 7 12 PDW 700 V1 E Reinstallation 1 Install the No 2 gear onto the base plate shaft 2 Align the upper and lower holes of the No 3 Stopper washer gear assembly while turning the No 3 gear No 3 gear assembly and insert the parallel pin into th
248. irmation message to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item 16 characters alphanumeric numbers symbols and space OFF ON Function Saves the REFERENCE file in the main unit Returns the setting of the REFERENCE file to the standard setting Reads the REFERENCE file from a Memory Stick Saves the REFERENCE file in a Memory Stick Sets the file ID When REFERENCE STORE of REFERENCE SAVE is executed this ID is saved Turns ON OFF the function to read out the white balance data that are saved in SCENE file during execution of SCENE FILE RECALL 4 61 LENS FILE 1 Display Setting 1 the LENS file FOGOLENS FILE 1 gt LENS FILE RECALL EXEC LENS FILE STORE EXEC LENS NO OFFSET EXEC LENS AUTO RECALL S No S No unknown L ID unknown L MF unknown Item Setting Function LENS FILE RECALL Press the MENU knob to Calls the LENS file from the main unit or read the LENS file from a move to the file selection display Memory Stick For the description of the file selection display see below LENS FILE STORE Press the MENU knob to Save the LENS file to the main unit or Memory Stick move to the file selection display For the description of the file selection display see below F ID 16 characters alphanumeric Sets the file ID c
249. is output by selecting the CH 1 2 or CH3 4 in the MONITOR 4 8 regulator circuit This is the voltage regulator for AUDIO using on the 38 board 1 2 10 LCD System PD 118 board The PD 118 board consists of the color LCD panel drive circuit and the power supply circuit for LCD backlight is the color LCD panel drive IC that contains of the built in video signal RGB driver the timing generator and the VCO also contains the serial interface circuit and electronic potentiometers that are used to establish the various setups in accordance with the commands from the microprocessor IC921 of the FP 157 board The RGB video signals that are input to pin 37 through pin 39 receive contrast adjustment and brightness adjustment Then they pass through the output signal polarity inversion circuit and are output from IC pin 20 through pin 22 The factory adjustment data is stored in the IC3 EEPROM The respective timing signals for driving the LCD panel are generated from the sync signals that are input to pin 41 and pin 42 The operations such as turning off the backlight and inverting the video signal left to right or up to down are performed in accordance with the control signals supplied from the microprocessor IC921 of the FP 157 board 1 2 11 Others CN 3005 board The VF power supply light power supply light switch signal and the EEPROM circuit that stores the rely and system information of
250. isible on the screen Adjusts them with the GAIN set in 12 dB TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Select the video signal to be output from the TEST OUT connector S H DC B R ch 1 99 to 99 Adjusts the sample and hold DC level of the R channel S H DC B Gch 1 99 to 99 Adjusts the sample and hold DC level of the G channel S H DC B B ch 1 99 to 99 Adjusts the sample and hold DC level of the B channel If this adjustment is not made for optimum result the troubles may occur such as thin vertical bars during the high gain mode or poor accuracy of white spot compensation PDW 700 V1 E 4 83 BOARD INFO S240BOARD INFO TOP SD REC amp DVP 24P REC amp PB DCPxx xx PROCYON V xx TG VERSION 1 400 Item Setting Function SD REC amp PB DVP Display only Displaying the diagnosis whether the installed DVP board supports the SD HEC amp PB Option or not If cross mark X is indicated the DVP board that does not support the SD REC amp PB Option is installed In such case the SD REC amp PB Option functions are disabled 24P REC amp PB DCPxx xx Display only Displaying the diagnosis whether the installed DCP board supports the 24P REC amp PB Option or not If cross mark X is indicated the DCP board that does not support the 24P REC amp PB Option is installed In such case the 24P REC amp PB Option functions are disabled PROCYON V DCPxx xx Display only Displaying the diagnosis w
251. l function s If registered functions are valid after reboot 24 REC amp PB Click the Execute button to register e Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation jn ies 2 PDW 700 V1 2 15 4 The page that tells completion of registration appears 3 Sony Microsoft Internet Explorer DER Zr MA RED RTV BACANA Y M ANIH O O HAO yo oea DAS PELAO amp nttp 192 168 1 10 indexcei 5 Google C wGo 6 vy Bookmarksy 59 Check AutoLink Send tos A settings XDCAM HD SONY Status License Registration Device Information Registration finished successfully Please reboot the machine to activate optional function s e Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation nsenenaUt Btyubsayb 5 Turn the POWER switch OFF once and back ON Functions of the registered software option are enabled 6 Confirm that the software option can be operated from the Device Information page of the Status menu 2 16 PDW 700 V1 E Section 3 Error Messages 3 1 Error Messages Overview This PDW 700 has a self diagnosis function to check internal errors When the PDW 700 detects an error its error code and description are displayed on the following display units Viewfinder display error code only Color LCD display When an error occurs its error code information is recorded in the error logger maintena
252. lder in the direction of the arrow until it will stop 2 Connect the harness to the connector CN709 on the SE 857 board 3 Insert the upper part of the loader assembly underneath the portion of the base plate assembly and align the four positioning pins of the base plate assembly with the four holes of the loader assembly as shown in Fig 1 4 Reinstall the loader assembly in the base plate assembly and fix it using the two screws with drop safe stoppers Note Confirm that the LD spacer is correctly installed in the positioning pin A at two locations 5 Connect the flexible card wire to the connec tor CN1 on the SW 1125G board 6 Reinstall the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 PDW 700 V1 E Tension spring Cartridge holder CL spring Cleaner assembly Loader Fig 1 Base plate assembly Leader Hole assembly assembly Hole Pin B Pin A Base plate assembly LD spacer CN1 SW 1125G board Flexible card A wire 1 fr 7 T 0 Note the corner block Note When reinstall the corner block replace an adhesive sheet with a new one Adhesive sheet 3 870 265 01 Reinstall the laser caution sheet Corner block Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 Reinstall the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 2 Adhesive sheet PDW 700 V1 E 7 1 2 Removing Reinstalling Drive Sub Assembly The optical block assembly in the drive may b
253. lect the DIAGNOSIS menu 200 CONTENTS page e While pressing the MENU knob and the ASSIGN switch simultaneously set the MENU ON OFF switch from OFF to ON However if the switch S402 2 AT 177 board is set to ON or if the switch S400 AT 177 board is OFF this method 1 disabled 4 69 MENU SET SO1OMENU SET RE ROTATION REV gt RE SPEED DIRECT VALUE SERVICE RESET FACTORY PRESET Item Setting RE ROTATION REV OFF ON HE SPEED 1 2 3 DIRECT VALUE OFF DEC HEX SERVICE RESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item FACTORY PRESET SP FUNC SO20SP FUNC 3GAIN DISP MODE KNEE 2ND POINT Item Setting GAIN DISP MODE dB ISO KNEE 2ND POINT OFF ON 4 70 Function Turns ON OFF the function to invert the rotating direction of the MENU knob Sets the response speed of the MENU knob 1 slow 3 fast OFF The set value is displayed after conversion in the range of 99 to 99 It returns to OFF when the main power is turned on DEC The set value is displayed after being converted into a decimal number The variable range differs depending on the item HEX The set value is displayed after being converted into a hexadecimal number The variable range differs depending on the item Resets the data in the SERVICE hierarchy Refer to 5 2 Data Structure for details of the hierarchical structure Returns all of the settings to the default setting when
254. ltage detection During normal operation when L PWR SW ON signal is turned to L 04 5 6 and 7 or Q11 12 15 and 16 are turned and the battery or EXT DC IN 12 V is supplied to respective circuit The H POWERW HOLD signal is sent from the FP 157 board after the main power of this unit is turned on Therefore the power is kept on even if the L PWR SW ON L signal is set to OFF H In order to turn off the main power of this unit the L PWR SW must be turned off H and the H POWERW HOLD signal must be opened and set to L When the FP 157 board detects that the POWER switch 1s turned OFF it sets the POWERW HOLD signal to L to turn off the power after a disc operation is completed if the equipment is in the midst of operating a disc Battery EXT DC selector The EXT DC voltage is detected and either battery or EXT DC is selected with priority given to the EXT DC The IC5 performs the control and Q4 Q5 Q6 and Q7 are turned on when a battery 18 selected and Q11 Q12 015 and Q16 are turned on when the EXT DC is selected In this IC5 a step up circuit Vcc 8 5 V that drives the N CH MOS FET gate is employed Protection from Excess Input Voltage VOLTAGE DETECT IC18 monitors the input 12 V If the voltage exceeds approximately 18 V the output of the IC18 1 is set to This is input to to start the protection from the excess voltage and turn on the 12 V output SHUT DOWN Since this func
255. ly switches the high speed feedback clamp and the normal feedback clamp For adjusting R G B FBC OFFSET Adjusts the DC offset for the high speed feedback clamp Adjusts the DC offset for the high speed feedback clamp Adjusts the DC offset for the high speed feedback clamp Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector 4 75 LCD ADJUST S110LCD ADJUST VCO ADJUST Item LCD VCO ADJUST LCD COM DC LCD BLACK LIMIT LCD PS BRIGHT LCD BRIGHT LCD BRIGHT R LCD BRIGHT B LCD CONTRAST FLARE 120FLARE R FLARE gt G FLARE B FLARE FLARE TEST OUT SELECT Item R FLARE G FLARE B FLARE FLARE TEST OUT SELECT 4 76 O 0 O 0 0 O 0 Setting Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item 99 to 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 Setting 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 OFF ON VBS Y R G B LCD Function Adjusts the free run frequency of the color LCD VCO Adjusts the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of the color LCD Adjusts the limiter level on the black side of the color LCD Adjusts the amplitude of the output signal of the color LCD PSIG Adjusts the color LCD brightness displayed in normal position Adjusts the black balance of the picture displayed in normal position Adjusts the R output signal BRIGHT with reference to the G output signal Adjusts the black balance of the picture displayed in reverse position Adjusts the
256. m the automatic black balance adjustment ITEM GAMMA ON 2 Onthe menu set as follows ITEM DETAIL MENU MAINTENANCE PAGE WHITE SETTING ITEM COLOR TEMP P 3200 ITEM C TEMP BAL lt P gt 0 MENU PAINT PAGE SW STATUS ITEM GAMMA OFF ITEM DETAIL gt OFF 3 Select the center portion by using the waveform monitor PDW 700 V1 E 9 5 9 2 4 Black Shading Adjustment Fixtures and Equipment HD waveform monitor Preparation Connect an HD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector Lens IRIS CLOSE Waveform monitor setting LUM mode VOLT FULL SCALE range 0 5 Adjustment Procedure Perform either step 1 or step 2 for the black shading adjustment 1 Auto black shading adjustment 1 On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE SHADING ITEM AUTO BLK SHADING gt EXEC 2 Push the MENU knob 3 When adjustment ends successfully the message COMPLETE appears The auto adjustment takes about 30 seconds 2 Manual black shading adjustment When performing fine adjustment after executing the black shading auto adjustment or when performing manual adjustment without executing the auto adjust ment proceed as follows 1 On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK SHADING ITEM SHADING CH SEL G ITEM TEST OUT SELECT G Note The HD signal is output when TEST OUT SELECT is set to a signal other than VBS 2 On the menu perform the G channel adjustmen
257. magnet If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If a magnetic substance comes close to these parts their characteristics may be changed 8 1 2 Fixtures Alignment disc PFD23A RS Torque driver for 3 kg Bit for torque driver M2 Hlat blade screwdriver Locking compound Weight 50 to 100 g 8 1 3 Preparations Before Adjustment Turn off the power Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 Turn on the power Display the service menu Refer to Section 4 9 Select VDR MAINTENANCE by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob 7 Select DRIVE MAINTENANCE by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob 8 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob 9 Select ADJUST by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob The ADJUST screen appears DRIVE MAINTENANCE ADJUST SERVO 1 KEW SERVO 2 Eh a Ye OTHER ADJUST PDW 700 V1 E 8 2 Procedures After Replacing the Optical Block Assembly and the Board 8 2 1 Adjustment After Replacing the Optical Block Assembly After replacing the optical block assembly perform adjustment in the following order Servol Automatic Adjustment Refer to Section 8 3 Skew Adjustment Refer to Section 8 4 Servo2 Automatic Adjustment Refer to Section 8 5 Clearing Media Log Refer to Se
258. manually x Refer to the Operation Manual SY 355 board 3 m 200 301 51201 ds amp amp 6565 6 6 errre e Each LED is used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process e 200 S300 1200 1201 and 1301 are used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process They are all set to off when shipped from the factory PDW 700 V1 E Factory setting 1 33 1 6 How to Take Out a Cartridge Manually 1 6 1 Taking Out a Cartridge at Power off 1 Open the cover in the direction of the arrow A 2 Push the lock lever in the direction of the arrow B with Flat blade screwdriver a screwdriver The cartridge lid assembly is opened in Gs the direction of the arrow C 3 Rotate the gear counterclockwise with a crosshead screwdriver to eject the cartridge If a cartridge cannot be taken out turn the gear X gt Cross head LSS RWE A screwdriver wise again NAS AD m Turn the gear slowly and gently Be careful not to clockwise until it will go and then turn it counterclock force the gear past their stopping points Be sure not to touch or forcibly take out the cartridge S until it is completely ejected Even when the cartridge cannot be ejected with this procedure do not rotate the gear with an excessive force This error may be caused by a problem in the loader assembly In this case refer to Section 1 6 2 1 6 2 When You Cannot
259. menu 2 Select DRIVE MAINTE by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob S160VDR MAINTENANCE TOP AUDIO A D ADJUST AUDIO D A ADJUST AU SIDE VOL ADJ POWER A D ADJUST gt DRIVE MAINTE SERVICE SUPPORT 3 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob DRIVE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE START gt YES NO The drive maintenance menu 15 displayed DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK ADJUST ERROR LOGGER OTHERS PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR This menu allows you to check the temperature sensor on the optical drive Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK DEVICE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 A confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK START YES NO The current temperature appears TEMPERATURE SENSOR 36 0 DEG 4 85 4 10 3 DEW SENSOR This menu allows you to check the dew sensor on the optical drive Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK DEVICE DEW SENSOR 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob DEW SENSOR CHECK START YES NO The result appears DEW SENSOR DRY 4 86 4 10 4 FAN MOTOR This menu allows you to check the fan motor connected to the optical drive Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK DEVICE
260. meric characters Setting the country code ORGANIZATION 4 characters alphanumeric characters Setting the organization code USER CODE 4 characters alphanumeric characters Setting the user code TIME ZONE 00 to 3F Setting TIME ZONE time difference PDW 700 V1 E 4 23 CLIP TITLE Display Setting whether to create the clip title When the title is selected and set to DSABL When the title is selected and set to ENABL O270CL1P TITLE TOP O270CLIP TITLE gt TITLE eDSABL gt TITLE Item Setting Function TITLE DSABL ENABL DSABL Not automatically created ENABL Sets the clip title to be automatically created when recording SELECT PREFIX Select from maximum of 20 titles or enter a prefix CLEAR NUMERIC Sets the start number of the title name LOAD PREFIX DATA Loads the from the memory stick to the unit PREFIX TITLE up to 10 characters Enters a title prefix NUMERIC 00001 to 99999 Sets the initial value of the clip title serial FILE NAMING Display Assigns the user defined names to clips and clip lists O280FILE NAMING gt NAMING FORM AUTO NAMING Item Setting Function NAMING FORM Assigns user defined names to clips and clip lists AUTO NAMING C k k kk TITLE PLAN Assigns clip name on this unit when the NAMING FORM item is set to FREE Assigns clip names in the default naming format TITLE Assigns the name that is given when the title is set to ENABL in the CLIP TITL
261. mitted to ITRON ITRON CPU calculates the remaining battery charge and creates remaining charge display data and transmits the data to Camera CPU and FP CPU FP CPU displays the remaining charge display data on the monochrome LCD The remaining charge display data can be checked at the same time in the status menu for the color LCD 11 Power off software control circuit FP CPU detects the POWER SW OFF information When power can be turned on the Power OFF command is sent from ITRON CPU and FP CPU controls the power OFF circuit on the CNB 25 board 12 FP CPU backup circuit Even when power is turned off for FP CPU the data 18 saved for the internal RAM and Real Time Clock RX 8025NB through backup on a coin battery By saving the system data FP CPU can be started up quickly when the power is turned on 1 927 1 928 l2C BUS 1 916 BATTERY 9564 SW INFO_ BATT Ad _SDA F El Em SDA 8 bit p7 CPU BUS Battery ID Register INFO_ TE DO SCL 914 Voltage measurement Battery 10838 ID Data Voltage measurement FET SW a CNB 25 board 8 Battery in DC in IC839 Voltage measurement UNREG 12 V IC7 Voltage Front measurement Microphone Volume SW 1425 13 Backup lithium battery voltage measurement circuit FP_CPU performs voltage measurement on the backup lithium battery When recharging is detected the reduced voltage information is send
262. nal level only Sets the SD cross color reduction level When NTSC J AREA or NTSC AREA is selected on the FORMAT 4 33 SKIN DETAIL Display Controlling DETAIL of specific color such as skin tone 100SKIN DETAIL DETAIL ALL DETECT AREA IND DTL SELECT DETAIL DETAIL LVL DTL SAT DTL HUE DTL WIDTH ZZZZZZ ZZZ P SK SK SK SK SK SK SK SK SK Item Setting SKIN DETAIL ALL OFF ON SKIN DETECT Moves to color detection page SKIN AREA IND OFF ON SKIN DTL SELECT 1 2 3 SKIN DETAIL OFF ON SKIN DETAIL LVL 99 to 99 SKIN DTL SAT 99 to 99 SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 359 4 34 Function Turns ON OFF the skin detail function Automatic color detection function Move the cursor to the desired object color and press the MENU knob Then the SKIN DTL SAT and the SKIN DTL HUE will be set automatically Turns ON OFF the zebra display to the target area Selects the skin detail BANK When BANK is switched the lower 5 lines of display are switched at the same time Turns ON OFF skin detail CH1 2 3 individually The ON OFF settings can be set for each selection of SKIN DTL SELECT above three settings Sets the skin detail signal level Increasing this value increases the skin detail signal amplitude This item can be set to each BANK 3 different settings of the above SKIN DTL SELECT Sets the range of Saturation of chroma signal in which the skin detail signal is effective This item can
263. nce logger of the main unit and also in the error logger drive logger of the drive unit For details of the error logger refer to 4 15 SERVICE SUPPORT Menu for the error logger of the main unit and to 4 10 22 ERROR LOGGER for the error logger of the drive unit Refer to respective error tables for display contents on the viewfinder display and for recording non recording in the error loggers HD422 50 ErrorXX Xx x DISP SEL When CHAR is selected DISP SEL When STATUS is selected HD422 50 TCG 01 23 45 15 SEC PDW 700 V1 E 3 2 Error Code List 3 2 1 Main Code and Sub Code Main Code An error code is provided in combination of 2 digit main code and 3 digit sub code code Sub code For details of sub codes refer to respective error tables Main code Main error description OX Optical drive control errors device errors 02 Optical devices LD LCD 03 Optical drive two axis FCS TRK 04 Optical drive seeking 06 Optical drive SA actuator 08 Optical drive spindle 20 Loader assembly errors 3X Optical drive sensor system errors 5X Read data errors 6X Startup errors 91 Interface errors between CPU and peripheral devices 92 Synchronization system errors 95 Video audio signal processing device errors If multiple errors occur simultaneously The highest priority error is displayed When a higher priority error is cleared the following priority error code is displayed
264. nd output as the HD SD SDI audio signal 2 Digital signal processing system Recording system The recording audio data from CAVA IC200 undergoes signal processing such as recording level control muting process and MIX SW AP in AUDIO REC DSP 1 800 and then it is sent to PIER G4 IC1900 as recording digital audio data 1 12 The recording digital audio data is sent to AUDIO Low Resolution DSP IC900 through CAVA IC200 Proxy audio data is generated in compressed A Low format and the data is sent to PIER G4 IC1900 The above recording digital audio data and recording compressed Proxy audio data are written PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 The recording digital data from the 1 LINK network is sent to PIER G4 IC1900 via the PCI bus and written to the PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 While recording to a disc the data in PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 is sent to the DR 606 board via the ATA interface Playback system The audio data and the Proxy audio data are sent to PIER G4 IC1900 via the ATA interface and written to the PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 The playback digital audio data in PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 is sent from PIER G4 IC1900 to AUDIO PB DSP IC801 After performing signal processing such as limiter playback level control and mute processing the signal is input to CAVA IC200 The audio data and Proxy audio data in PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 is provided to 1 LINK network via the
265. nd Install key in this order by using the text editor of a PC to create the text file pdw instkey Ist Example of entries in the text file pdw instkey Ist PDW 700 10000 0123456789abcdef PDW 700 10001 1234567890bcdefa PDW 700 10002 2345678901 cdefab Each item model name serial number and Install key should be delimited by comma Each character string should be terminated by the line break code 2 Savethe created file in the root directory of the USB memory Register the Install key by the procedure below 1 Connect the USB memory to the USB slot of the Camcorder 2 Set the VDR switch on the inside panel to 5 PDW 700 V1 E After waiting for approx 30 seconds open the OP TION page of the DIAGNOSIS menu While the arrow pointer is pointing to the D07 OPTION press and hold the MENU knob Then the message SEARCHING INSTALL KEY is displayed for approx 10 seconds and the search for the soft key is started in the USB memory device gt 007 SEARCHING If the name of the required software option 18 not displayed on the OPTION page the firmware of the unit may not support the option or the DVP board or the DCP board may not support the option In such a case check the Package Version on the ROM VER SION 1 page of the DIAGNOSIS menu or on the BOARD INFO page of the SERVICE menu CBKZ MDO1 Package Version 1 21 or higher CBKZ FC02 Package Version 1 50 or higher Wh
266. nd SYSTEM FREQUENCY is 29 9 25 or 23 9P at the same time or when the slow shutter function is set to ON e When the SYSTEM LINE is 720 and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY is 59 9P and at the same time SCAN MODE is 23 9 For example the V substrate voltage of the R channel in 1080 29 9P becomes the sum of R VSUB setup value and the R VSUB OFST P setup value 4 74 PDW 700 V1 E ADJUST ADJUST CCD REGI gt CCD REGI DCP REGI B DCP REGI DCP REGI PULSE TEST OUT SELECT Item R CCD REGI B CCD REGI R DCP REGI B DCP REGI DCP REGI PULSE TEST OUT SELECT FBC ADJUST Setting 0 100 to 0 1 0 002 step 0 100 to 0 1 0 002 step 0 100 to 0 1 0 002 step 0 100 to 0 1 0 002 step OFF ON VBS Y R G B LCD S100FBC ADJUST FBC ADJUST MODE OFFSET gt G FBC OFFSET B FBC OFFSET TEST OUT SELECT Item FBC ADJUST MODE FBC OFFSET FBC OFFSET B FBC OFFSET TEST OUT SELECT PDW 700 V1 E Setting OFF ON 99 to 99 99 to 99 99 to 99 VBS Y R G B LCD Function Adjusts the registry H direction of CCD Adjusts the registry H direction of CCD Adjusts the registry H direction of the DCP circuit Adjusts the registry H direction of the DCP circuit Turns ON OFF the pulse for the adjustment of the registry H direction of the DCP circuit Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector Function Periodical
267. ness from the connector CN103 on the MB 1111 board 5 Remove the two screws and disconnect the harness through the bottom hole of the fan fitting holder 6 Remove the fan assembly from the fan fitting holder 7 the four corners of the cushion outward to remove the fan motor Note The cushion FAN is made of rubber and soft enough to remove the fan motor easily 8 Attach the fan cushion to the new fan motor The arrow 4 on the fan motor must be pointing in the same direction as that on the cushion FAN 9 Insert the fan assembly into the fan fitting holder until it stops Notes e Be sure that the arrow 4 on the cushion FAN points toward the rear panel and that the fan harness comes to the bottom When reinstalling be sure that the cushion FAN is not flipped over or sagged 10 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal 7 24 CN3 n MB 1111 board Fan fitting holder Fan motor Cushion FAN Fan motor Fan harness Place the fan harness Fan fitting holder PDW 700 V1 E 7 5 Removing Reinstalling CCD Unit Tool L wrench across flat 1 5 mm L wrench across flat 1 5 mm 7 5 1 Removing CCD Unit 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the inside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 3 3 Remove the front panel Refer to Section 1 7 5 4 Loosen the filter knob setscrew and remove the filter kno
268. nnot be changed during the service mode WHITE SAW PARA OFF ON Turns ON OFF the white shading SAW PARA compensation When TEST is set the channels switch in relation with TEST OUT SELECT 4 38 BLACK SHADING Display Adjusting black shading 2 SHADING gt BLK SHAD CH SEL 9 oe OUT SELECT lt UJ uoz OOOOO O R R R B M M O Item Setting Function BLK SHAD CH SEL R G B TEST Selects the channel of black shading correction TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector R BLK H SAW 99 to 99 Adjusts the H SAW black shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL R BLK H PARA 99 to 99 Adjusts the H PARA black shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL R BLK V SAW 99 to 99 Adjusts the V SAW black shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL BLK V PARA 99 to 99 Adjusts the V PARA black shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL BLACK SAW PARA OFF ON Turns ON OFF the black shading SAW PARA compensation MASTER BLACK 99 to
269. nob LOADER MOVE TO DOWN POS CHECK START YES NO The result appears The loader moves to the DOWN position LOADER Appears just for a moment POSITION DOWN INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR DOWN SENSOR HOLE 2 3 If failed The following screen appears LOADER CHECKING ERROR POSITION STBY REC INHI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 7 SLIDER AUTO TEST This menu allows you to check optical block assembly operations and the limit sensor Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK SLIDER AUTO TEST 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob AUTO TEST CHECK START YES NO The result appears AUTO TEST CHECKING If failed The following screen appears AUTO TEST CHECKING ERROR PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 8 IN LIM TEST This menu allows you to move the optical block assembly to the inner limit position of the disc Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK SLIDER IN LIM TEST 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob IN LIM TEST CHECK START YES NO The result appears Check visually that the optical block assembly moves to the inner limit position IN LIM TEST CHECKING OK If failed The following screen appears IN LI
270. not touch the objective lens Hold the slide base die casting part when handling the optical block assembly Do not touch the circuit on the print board with your hand or a substance directly otherwise the circuit may be damaged The performance of the actuator may be affected if a magnetic material is located nearby since the actuator has a strong magnetic field Keep magnetic substance away from the actuator if the magnetic force makes a metallic material such as a screwdriver reflection block and so on hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged Do not allow foreign materials to enter through gap in the cover of the actuator Keep away a screwdriver Actuator Hold the shaded portions Ez PDW 700 V1 E 1 12 2 Standard Torque for Screws When tightening a screw be sure to use the specified torque driver and tightening torque When a tightening torque is specified in each removal reinstallation replacement or adjustment procedure in this manual be sure to use it When no tightening torque is specified use the following standard tightening torques Fixtures Bit for torque driver for M1 4 M1 7 Bit for torque driver for M2 Bit for torque driver for M3 Torque driver for 3 kg Torque driver for 6 kg Torque driver for 10 kg M1 7 screw 19 X 10 0 01 Nem 1 9 0 1 kgf cm 2 screw 20 X 107 0 01 Nem 2 0 0 1 kgf cm 2 6 screw 53 X 10 0 01 N
271. ntinuously VOLT The voltage VOLT is displayed continuously 2 Displayed only when CBKZ MD01 SD Record and Playback Software is installed VF DISP 3 Display Setting the VF displays O100VF DISP3 gt LOW LIGHT LOW LIGHT LEVEL VF BATT WARNING ABSOLUTE VALUE Item Setting Function LOW LIGHT OFF ON Turns ON OFF the on screen warning that the average level of the video has dropped beneath a set level LOW LIGHT LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the LOW LIGHT threshold value VF BATT WARNING 10 20 Specifies the remaining battery capacity level that starts the flashing warning in the viewfinder ABSOLUTE VALUE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the mode that displays numeric menu settings as absolute values This makes it possible to display settings that include reference settings stored with STORE ALL PRESET or other functions as absolute values PDW 700 V1 E 4 11 P LED Display Selecting the conditions to turn on the l indicator on VF 0110 LED gt GAIN lt gt SHUTTER lt gt WHT PRESET lt gt ATW RUN lt gt EXTENDER lt gt FILTER lt gt OVERRIDE lt gt Item Setting GAIN lt gt OFF ON SHUTTER lt gt OFF ON WHITE PRESET lt gt OFF ON ATW RUN lt gt OFF ON EXTENDER lt gt OFF ON FILTER lt gt OFF ON OVERRIDE lt gt OFF ON 2 2 Function OFF Does not turn on Turns on when the GAIN value is other than 0 dB OFF Does not turn on Turns on when
272. o 1080 for VF output and the VF DETAIL generation processing digital ECN processing The camera main signal of the SD system is output to IC1000 After performing the multiplex and parallel serial conversion on the character signal audio signal and the ancillary signal in IC1000 the HD signal and SD signal output from IC800 pass through IC C1112 IC1113 and are output to 5011 and SDI2 connectors as the HD SDI and SD SDI signals After another system performs scaling in IC1000 through the SDRAM IC1309 the HD signal output from IC800 passes through the D A converter IC1518 and the video signal is sent to the LCD display The HD signal output from IC600 is sent to the recording system DVP 45 board through multiple character signals in IC1000 After the signal from the RX 105 board on the SDI input option and the SDI signal from the 50 pin I F are selected internally in IC1000 the signals are separated into the video signal audio signal and the ancillary signal then sent to the recording system DVP 45 board The main functions of IC800 are the down conversion HD to SD the conversion 720 to 1080 for VF output and the VF DETAIL generation processing digital ECN processing The camera main output of the SD system is output to IC1000 1 2 2 CCD Block PA 342 PA 342A PA 343 PA 343A PA 344 board The CCD drive pulses that are supplied from the TG 260 board are amplified so that these pulses can drive the CCD imagers directly
273. o ON 4 10 PDW 700 V1 E VF DISP 2 Display Setting the VF displays OO9OVF DISP2 ZOOM COLOR TEMP IN gt DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISP DISE DISP DISP Item Setting Function DISP ZOOM OFF ON Turns ON OFF the zoom position display DISP COLOR TEMP OFF ON Turns ON OFF the color temperature display DISP BATT REMAIN INT VOLT AUTO Selects the mode for the remaining battery or DC IN voltage display DISP DC IN OFF ON Turns ON OFF the display when the power is supplied from the external connector the battery connected to DC IN DISP 16 9 4 3 ID OFF ON Displays the video aspect ratio 16 9 4 3 DISP WRR RF LVL OFF ON Turns ON OFF the wireless receiver RF level display DISP REC FORMAT OFF ON Turns ON OFF the recording format DISP CLIP NO PB OFF ON Turns ON OFF the clip name DISP TIME CODE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the time code display DISP ALAC OFF ON Turns ON OFF the operating status display of ALAC 1 When an Anton Bauer battery system BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is installed the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value 96 according to the setting of this item INT When one of the above batteries is installed the remaining power is shown as a percentage value 96 when there is a change in the value or when the power is low AUTO The remaining power is shown as a percentage value 95 when one of the above batteries is installed Otherwise the voltage VOLT is displayed co
274. o Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Remove the drive sub assembly Refer to Section 7 1 2 7 Remove the two screws and remove the lock release assembly Lock release 8 Disconnect the harness from the connector assembly CN2 on the SW 1385 board SP GY 92 Reinstallation 1 Connect the harness to the connector CN2 on the SW 1385 board 2 Install the lock release assembly with the two assembly screws while hooking the slacked portion of the harness into the recess of the SW 1385 board 3 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps to 6 SW 1385 board Recess Harness 7 16 PDW 700 V1 E 7 1 10 Removing Reinstalling LD Motor Removal 10 Reinstallation l PDW 700 V1 E Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 Remove the drive sub assembly Refer to Section 7 1 2 Remove the lock release assembly
275. o select the connecting device from the host name using the FTP client function DNS2 0 0 0 0 Sets the DNS address 2 Required in order to select the connecting device from the host name using the FTP client function DISABLE ENABLE Enables or disables the Universal Plug amp Play function NET CFG RESET Press the MENU knob to Resets all of the setup items on the NETWORK page execute this menu item The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting 4 54 PDW 700 V1 E CONVERTER Display Setting Upconverter 2400 CONVERTER CON PROCESS DETAIL LEVEL CRISPENING DETAIL LIMIT LV DEPEND LVL DTL FREQUENCY DTL RATIO Item Setting Function UP CON PROCESS FIELD ADPT Selects the conversion source picture when SD is upconverted to HD FIELD Use the field picture ADPT Optimize the ratio of conversion from the frame or field picture UC DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement by the upconverter UC CRISPENING 8 to 7 Sets the amplitude width at which the upconverter does not emphasize low amplitude signals UC DETAIL LIMIT 99 to 99 Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement by the upconverter UC LV DEPENDLVL 8 to 7 Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by the upconverter UC DTL FREQUENCY 3 2M 4 5M 5 0M 4 0M Sets the center frequency and frequency properties of edge enhancement by the upconverter 3 2M 3 2 1 1 MHz 4 5M 4
276. ode steps SET Sets the time code and user bit R RUN Time code steps while recording Reset regenerate expand button Switches the display contents UP LEFT SEI RIGHT DOWN MENU Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory use Factory setting OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 29 KY 623 board Ref No D1 D2 D3 Name FF PLAY REW Function Lights during playback of the disc Factory setting Lights during fast forward playback Lights during fast rewind playback D4 51 52 53 EJECT STOP FF PLAY Blinks during disc ejection Fast forward Stops playback Disc playback 54 55 Fast rewind Moves to the next clip 56 S7 PREV EJECT Ejects the disc Moves to the previous clip Refer to the Operation Manual MB 1111 board Ref No 51 Bit 0 1 Name Normal boot boot Function Starts iTRON CPU mandatorily in normal mode Factory setting OFF OFF Starts iTRON CPU mandatorily in recovery mode 1 30 PDW 700 V1 E 86 Ref No Name Function D1 MEMORY STICK Lights when being accessed Refer to the Operation Manual SW 1125G board 52 51 Ref No Name Function 1 IN SENSE Cartridge presence 52 STBY OFF Cartridge chucking state SW 1352 board 51 52 HT Ref No Name Function 1 CH1 ON OFF Turns ON OFF the 48 V 52 CH2 ON OFF Turns ON OFF the 48 V
277. of the flat cables flexible card wires and boards are different depending on the shape of the connector be careful when connecting the flat cables flexible card wires and boards Disconnecting 1 Turn off the power 2 Slide or lift up the portion A in the direction of the arrow to unlock and pull out the flexible card wire Connecting Do not insert the flexible card wire sideways Confirm that there is no stain or dust on the contact surface of the flexible card wire 1 Slideor lift up the portion A in the direction of the arrow and securely insert the flexible card wire into the deep end of the connector 2 Return the portion A to its original position and lock the connector When connecting the flexible card wire check the connec tor shape and great care should be taken for the direction of the contact surface or isolation surface blue PDW 700 V1 E Contact surface A surface t 2 A Isolation surface Isolation surface A A 2 Isolation surface Isolation surface Isolation surface Contact Contact surface 1 45 1 10 Service Tools Measuring Equipment List 1 10 1 Service Tools The tools and fixtures used in this unit are as follows Part No Q 69 6 6 1 46 4 6026 110 Commercially available J 6026 130 B J 6394 080 A J 6029 140 B J 6323 530 A J 6570 130 A J 6325 110 A J 6325
278. off HDSDI REMOTE I F OFF CHARA G TLY when TIMER was set in the above SUB LCD MODEL SEL hour Selects whether to use the function that enables recording control from this unit PROAV DISPLAY R TLY DSABL ENABL of an external device connected to the SDI OUT 1 2 connectors HDSDI output of this unit Also selects the indication that shows whether the external device is recording OFF not use the remote recording control function CHARA Use the function and indicate by the controlling external device indicator in the viewfinder G TLY Use the function and indicate by the TALLY indicator in the viewfinder R TLY Use the function and indicate by the REC recording red tally indicator in the viewfinder Specifies whether to display the PROAV folder when this unit is accessed by a MIXED RECORDING DSABL ENABL FAM FTP connection DSABL Do not display ENABL Display Turns ON OFF the function that enables recording and saving of the clips having SINGLE CLIP MODE OFF ON the different recording formats to the same disc only when they belong to the same frame frequency Selects the clip for the playback operation PB POSITION KEEP TOP ON Selects only the currently selected clip for the playback operation OFF Selects all clips stored on the disc for the playback operation Specifies the playback start position of the clip or sub clip when switching between the clip playba
279. ol gamma correction knee correction and white clip processing After passing through the selector circuit with which either the camera main video signal or the color bar signal can be selected the selected signal is output from IC IC600 to IC800 The digital VBS signal and the digital Y signal for VF supplied from the camera signal processor IC IC800 are converted into the analog VBS signal and analog VF signal by the D A converter IC1513 IC1524 IC1525 After passing through the circuit with which either the camera analog VBS signal or the VF Y can be selected the selected signal is output to the TEST OUT connector After passing through the circuit with which either the GENLOCK IN connector input or the video signal can be selected the selected signal is output to the VF connector In addition the sync separation circuit and the PLL circuit to synchronize with the external input video of the GEN LOCK IN connector are included The detected average value of the video signal detected in the camera signal processor IC IC600 and peak value are loaded to the AT microprocessor on the AT 177 board through the 8 bit data bus PDW 700 V1 E At the same time various control signals are controlled by the AT 177 board via I O Expander IC3 1 4 IC67 All volumes are controlled electronically and the level adjustment is adjusted from the menu The main functions of IC800 are the down conversion HD to SD the conversion 720 t
280. on is saved is required For the firmware package file please contact your local Sony Sales Office Service Center 1 A general USB memory used for PCs can be used But when the USB memory is connected to the USB connector if the screen shows Unknown USB or the message screen shows USB MEMORY during the update the connected USB memory may have a problem or it may be misrecognized as an unsupported device In such a case connect another USB memory and try again It takes about 20 minutes to complete the update When the USB memory is removed during the update the USB memory may be damaged Make sure not to remove the USB memory during the update Do not turn off the power during the update When a disc is inserted eject it Set the VDR SW in the inside panel to 5 If the update fails while the LAB Y update is in progress picture and character may not be displayed in some cases In such case repeat update by following the procedure described below 1 If a memory stick is inserted remove it and insert a USB memory that contains the package file exten sion pkg in its root directory 2 While pressing the REC START button and the MENU knob at the same time turn ON the power 3 Wait approximately 30 seconds after power on Then the tally changes from the flashing at 4 Hz to the flashing at 1 Hz Flashing indicates that update is in progress It takes approximately 20 minutes
281. or correction 0 to 2 dB started from the terminal 9 Playback error correction 0 to 2 dB started from the terminal 10 INPUT delay amount Performs delay processing to match the VIDEO and AUDIO phases of each CH Description of each part 1 DIGITAL AUTO_AMP Processing Selects the AUTO level from the menu AU AUTO SPEC 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 17 dB 6 dB Linear operation until approx 9 dBFS Approx 6 dBFS at Max Linear operation until approx 12 dBFS Approx 9 dBFS at Max 12 dB Linear operation until approx 15 dBFS Approx 12 dBFS at Max 15 dB Linear operation until approx 18 dBFS Approx 15 dBFS at Max 17 dB Linear operation until approx 20 dBFS Approx 17 dBFS at Max 9 dB 2 DIGITAL In Put LIMITER characteristics only during MANUAL Selects the LIMITER level from the menu AU AUTO SPEC 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 15 dB 17 dB 6 dB Linear operation until approx 9 dBFS Approx 6 dBFS at Max Linear operation until approx 12 dBFS Approx 9 dBFS at Max 12 dB Linear operation until approx 15 dBFS Approx 12 dBFS at Max 15 dB Linear operation until approx 18 dBFS Approx 15 dBFS at Max 17 dB Linear operation until approx 20 dBFS Approx 17 dBFS at Max 9 dB PDW 700 V1 E Features in common of the MIC LINE input Features of the AGC LIM OFF
282. orrection OK PDW 700 V1 E NG under the adjacent conditions Possibility of NG under 7 line restriction Delete registrations of peripheral small RPNs and execute re registration RPN is corrected No Yi 5 Correction OK If an RPN extends over 2 pixels or more change the RPN WIDTH in the range of 2 to 4 and execute re registration RPN is corrected No Correction is not possible Replace the CCD block Yi E 5 Correction OK 9 13 Printed in Japan PDW 700 SY E sony Corporation 2009 6 16 9 968 417 03 2008
283. orrection The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL Adjusts the V SAW correction The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL Adjusts the V PARA correction The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL Turns ON OFF all of the white shading menu items of R G B H V and SAW PARA corrections 4 71 BLACK SHADING SOAOBLACK SHADING BLK SHAD CH SEL gt TEST OUT SELECT R BLACK R R R B SAW PARA M GAIN TMP Item BLK SHAD CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT R BLK H SAW R G B R BLK H PARA R G B R BLK V SAW R G B R BLK V PARA R G B BLACK SAW PARA MASTER BLACK MASTER GAIN TMP 4 72 lt O UJ uoz ooooo Setting R G B TEST VBS Y R G B LCD 99 to 99 799 to 99 799 to 99 799 to 99 OFF ON 799 to 99 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB Function Selects the channel of shading correction Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector Adjusts the H SAW correction The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL Adjusts the H PARA correction The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL Adjusts th
284. otal running hours of seek on optical block assembly Unit hour Resettable Spindle Hours r Display only Displays the total running hours of spindle motor Unit hour Resettable Loading Count r Display only Displays the total loading counts of disc Resettable 1 Not resettable for this unit 2 Increment of the counter depends on recording playback ratio and operating temperature 2 4 PDW 700 V1 E 2 2 3 Software Version The version of the software can be checked in the Software Version page of the Status menu The function is the same as that of the ROM VERSION menu of the DIAGNOSIS menu on the camcorder 3 Sony XDCAM Microsoft Internet Explorer REO RT BACANA YID Q Pe Z aa WHS PELADO http 192168110 indexcei Google G B 33 Bookmarker 9 Check v rodu Model Name Serial No Device Information Hours Mete Software Version PACKAGE License Registratior lt PDW 700 V1 2 5 Item Product Information Software Version Setting Model Name Serial No PACKAGE SY1 SY2K SY2U DRV PIER BRDG CAVA LVIS DSPO DSP2 PRXA TSYS TMBP AT FP LABY FAM FTBL Function Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Display only Displ
285. ower is kept on this may cause electric shock Before replacing IC link not only turn off the POWER switch but also remove the power cable that is connected to the DC IN connector The RE 246 board and SW 1385 board are equipped with IC link Any an excessive current flow due to abnormality inside the equipment the IC link blow If a IC link blows turn off the main power of the equipment once and inspect inside of the equipment and remove the cause of excessive current After that replace the IC link Board Ref No Description Part No RE 246 PS100 IC link 4 A 576 677 21 SW 1385 PS1 IC link 4 A 576 677 21 1 12 7 Circuit Protection Element The AT 177 and CNB 25 boards of this unit are equipped with the positive characteristics thermistor power thermistor as the circuit protection element The positive characteristics thermistor limits the electric current flowing through the circuit as the internal resistance increases when an excessive current flows or when the ambient tempera ture increases If the positive characteristics thermistor works turn off the main power of the unit and inspect the internal circuit of this unit After the cause of the trouble is removed turn on the main power back again The unit works normally It takes about one minute to cool down the positive characteristics thermistor after the main power is turned off Board Ref No Address Part Number Hold Current 177 THP600 Aside A
286. oxy video data are sent to PIER G4 IC1900 via the ATA interface and written to PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 The playback digital video data in PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 1 sent to the MPEG2 VIDEO Codec TORI NO IC1200 IC1400 Decode processing is performed and then the data is sent to LVIS 1 400 The playback Proxy video data in PIER SDRAM IC1901 to IC1904 1 sent from PIER G4 IC1900 to LVIS 1 400 and decode processing is performed The Proxy video data is used as the video signal during the search The playback video data in PIER SDRAM 1 1901 to IC1904 is provided to 1 LINK network via the PCI bus the MXF file data 3 Sync signal system Whether the status is on record or on playback 74 27 MHz clock HD F HD V HD H HD PB F SD F SD V and SD H that are always input from the DCP 44 board are the reference signal Based on these reference clocks the video sync timings and system timings are generated 1 2 4 System Control SY 355 board 1 Disc record playback system control The following functions are realized using the RISC microprocessor hereinafter refer to as CPU IC 200 as the CPU for the system control on the S Y 355 board PCI bus interface CPU is connected to PIER G4 IC1900 DVP 45 board FAM controller on the DVP 45 board and PCI PCI Bridge 1 900 via the PCI bus interface to receive and send data with one another and perform control The PCI bus interface communicates
287. pgrade the firmware Refer to 1 11 2 Firmware Update Using the USB Memory for details 7 8 6 FP 157 Board When replacing the FP 157 board or when replacing EEPROM 1 913 on the FP 157 board perform the procedure in the following order 1 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version Only when the board 1 replaced Refer to 1 11 2 Firmware Update Using the USB Memory for details 2 Perform the following adjustments AUDIO A D Error Correction Refer to Section 4 11 AUDIO D A Error Correction Refer to Section 4 12 Adjusting Battery End Detection Voltage Refer to Section 4 14 After replacing the volume RV I RV2 perform the following adjustment AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation Refer to Section 4 13 7 8 7 DR 606 Board Refer to 8 2 2 Adjustment After Replacing the DR 606 Board 7 8 8 SE 857 Board Refer to 8 2 3 Adjustment After Replacing the SE 857 Board 7 40 PDW 700 V1 E Section 8 Optical Drive Alignment 8 1 Optical Drive Alignment Overview 8 1 1 Precautions Be sure to perform each adjustment in order unless any instructions are provided To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have a powerful
288. play second or degree AF MARKER SOURCE SAFE ASPEC USER When the FUJINON PF lens HA22x7 4BRD HA13x4 5BRD is connected selects which existing marker is enabled to display the AF detection window ASPEC Use ASPECT MARKER as the substitute SAFE Use SAFETY ZONE as the substitute USER Use USER BOX as the substitute It is not displayed in the LCD VBS output RM F NO DISPLAY CTRL RET Selects the method used to display IRIS F values on the MSU 900 or another remote control unit CTRL Display on the basis of control value from the camera normal display method RET Display on the basis of position information from the lens same method as when AUTO IRIS is enabled FAN CONTROL AUTO R MIN MIN Selects the control method of the cooling fan AUTO The cooling fan rotation is automatically controlled R MIN The cooling fan runs at a low speed only during recording The fan stops rotating if the temperature inside the unit does not rise due to the low temperature environment MIN The cooling fan runs at a low speed The fan stops rotating if the temperature inside the unit does not rise due to the low temperature environment Regardless of the setting of this item the cooling fan starts running at a high speed if the internal temperature of the unit rises close to the point where an alarm is issued FOCUS MAG SW MTRY ALT Selects the operation when the FOCUS MAG function is assigned to the ASSIGN switch MTRY Turns ON only as lon
289. r writing the boot program MS 86 board is included 1 4 DCP 44 board The DCP 44 board consists of the block for A D conversion of the analog RGB signal from the PA 342 PA 342A PA 343 PA 343A PA 344 board via the feedback clamp circuit the cam era DSP block that performs the signal processing the dri ver block that sends the analog signal that is D A con vert ed to the outputs and the block to the AT 177 board After passing through the pre filter FL300 to FL302 the analog RGB signal input from the PA 342 PA 342A PA 343 PA 343A PA 344 board is converted to 74 MHz rate 14 bit digital RGB sign al by the A D converter IC107 to IC109 then input into the camera processor IC IC600 The camera signal processor IC IC600 detects the average value and the peak value of the camera video signals that are required for the AUTO operations of the camera such as AUTO black balance AUTO white balance and AUTO iris control The detected average value and peak value are sent to the AT microprocessor on the AT 177 board In addition to the above operations the 25 30 PsF conversion function and the 1080 to 720 conversion function are realized by using the DDR SDRAM IC700 to 704 After passing through white balance white shading and flare correction the camera main video signal performs the Digital GAIN UP then performs the Digital Noise Reduction Then the matrix signal and the detail signal are added to perform pedestal contr
290. r OFF SVC X X X X O O XIXIXIXIXIXIXIXIX OIO X XXXIX Initial value Initial value Y when R G B Dependson X the GAIN switch setting xX X 0101010101010 PDW 700 V1 4 FILE Menu 1 2 No Page 01 USER FILE 02 USER FILE 2 O3 ALL FILE 04 SCENE FILE 05 REFERENCE PDW 700 V1 E Setup Item USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE F ID USER PRESET STORE USR PRESET CLEAR USR PRESET CUSTOMIZE RESET LOAD CUSTOM DATA LOAD OUT OF USER BEFORE FILE PAGE USER LOAD WHITE ALL FILE LOAD ALL FILE SAVE F ID ALL PRESET STORE ALL PRESET CLEAR ALL PRESET 3SEC CLR PRESET NETWORK DATA 1 2 3 4 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE F ID REFERENCE STORE REFERENCE CLEAR REFERENCE LOAD REFERENCE SAVE F ID SCENE WHITE DATA F SET EXEC EXEC Blank EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC OFF OFF OFF OFF EXEC EXEC Blank EXEC EXEC EXEC OFF OFF STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD EXEC EXEC Blank EXEC EXEC EXEC EXEC Blank OFF ALL PRST 10101010 x SCN LENS STD Power OFF Initial value SVC 4 119 FILE Menu 2 2 No 06 07 08 09 4 120 Page L
291. r temperature Guideline 99 to 99 Function Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of your preference WHITE A The displayed value is a guideline Reference The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time When data of the color temperature display is more than 100000 appears Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum R GAIN lt A gt 99 to 99 color cannot be obtained by the above COLOR TEMP lt A ch gt Reference The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time Uses this item when you want to adjust the color temperature by changing the R GAIN lt A ch gt B GAIN lt A gt COLOR TEMP lt B gt 99 to 99 Uses this item when you want to adjust the color temperature by changing the B GAIN lt A ch gt Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of C TEMP BAL lt B gt Displays the color temperature Guideline 99 to 99 your preference The displayed value is a guideline Reference The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time When data of the color temperature display is more than 100000 appears Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum R GAIN lt B gt 99 to 99 color cannot be obtained by the above COLOR TEMP lt ch gt Reference The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time Uses this item w
292. range of setting in parenthesis can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu WHITE SHADING Display Adjusting white shading MO1OWHITE SHADING TOP gt WHT SHAD CH SEL TEST OUT SELECT R WHT H SAW R WHT H PARA R WHT V SAW R WHT V PARA WHITE SAW PARA Item Setting Function WHT SHAD CH SEL R G B TEST Selects the channel of shading correction TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector R WHT H SAW 99 to 99 Adjusts the H SAW white shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL It cannot be changed during the service mode R WHT H PARA 99 to 99 Adjusts the H PARA white shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL It cannot be changed during the service mode R WHT V SAW 99 to 99 Adjusts the V SAW white shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL It cannot be changed during the service mode R WHT V PARA 99 to 99 Adjusts the V PARA white shading correction R G B The R G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH SEL It ca
293. recorded clip Assigns the ON OFF function of auto tracing white balance Assigns the function that displays in the viewfinder the HD Y 1080i signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector Assigns the same function as that of the RET switch on the lens to the switch Assigns the REC START recording start function to the switch Assigns the turbo gain function to the switch Assigns the zebra pattern display function to the switch Assigns the function that mixes a still picture monochrome and camera video color effective for framing shots Assigns the function to switch the White balance to 3200K Assigns the function to switch the White balance to 4300K Assigns the function to switch the White balance to 5600K Assigns the function to switch the White balance to 6300K Assigns the function that switches between electrical CC filters 3200 4300K 5600K 6300K whenever pushing the switch The color temperatures of the electrical filter can be changed by the setting ELECTRICAL CC A to D of the WHITE FILTER page The positions to which the dash marks are set are skipped Alternately color temperatures can be switched in accordance with the settings A B C D from RM MSU RCP when a remote control unit is connected Applies an electrical 5600K filter When using a serial lens assign the ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4 When using a serial lens assign the ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3 and the TELE
294. results in an error the SENSOR Monitor POSTURE check is not carried out ACCELERATION SENSOR CHECKING OK Menu hierarchy SENSOR POSTURE TILTING DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK DEVICE ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob ACCELERATION SENSOR CHECK START YES NO PDW 700 V1 E 4 87 4 10 6 LOADER This menu allows you to check loader operations Check that the loader 18 correctly installed on the optical drive before starting the check Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE CHECK LOADER 1 A confirmation screen appears LOADER INSERT DISC POS T PONT BJECT HEC INHI E HI INHI DOWN SENSOR NOT DOWN SENSOR HOLE 2 Insert a cartridge The result appears The loader moves to the DOWN position LOADER Appears just for a moment POSITION DOWN HEC INHI NOT DOWN SENSOR DOWN SENSOR HOLE 2 3 4 88 SENSOR HOLE e When insert 23 3 GB SL disc such as PFD23A the message SENSOR HOLE 2 3 4 is displayed When insert 50 GB SL disc such as PFD50LA the message SENSOR HOLE 3 4 15 displayed In cases other than above check the corresponding detection sensor because of possibility of failure Detection sensor 4 If failed The following screen appears LOADER CHECKING ERROR POSITION DOWN HEC INHI NOT DOWN SENSOR DOWN SENSOR
295. rol CPU FP IC921 FP 157 board detects Real time Clock IC908 FP 157 board error System control CPU2 IC1300 SY 355 board detects flash memory 1C1405 IC1406 S Y 355 board error Optical drive s system control CPU DRV IC600 DR 606 board detects firmware error Perform the firmware update Refer to Section 1 11 2 Optical drive s system control CPU DRV IC600 DR 606 board detects interruption in communication with SV DSP IC400 DR 606 board Optical drive s system control CPU DRV IC600 DR 606 board detects no reply from SV DSP DRV IC400 DR 606 board during communication with SV DSP PDW 700 V1 E 3 2 8 Error 92 When synchronization system errors are detected the following error codes are displayed System control CPU 1 200 on the SY 355 board Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive Description code code display logger logger 92 101 lt x System control CPU detects REF error 102 X System control CPU detects frame error in input system 3 2 9 Error 95 When interface errors between device ICs are detected the following error codes are displayed System control CPU IC200 on the SY 355 board Optical drive s system control CPU DRV IC600 on the DR 606 board Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive Description code code display logger logger 95 101 lt X Communication error between system control CPU and PCI bridge IC900 SY 355 board is detected 102 lt Communication error between s
296. rvice Overview 1 1 Locations of Main Parts 1 1 1 Locations of the Printed Wiring Boards Main unit PDW 700 V1 E 177 2 38 3 1 37 4 CN 2946 5 CN 2947 6 CN 2948 7 CN 3001 CN 3005 9 CN 3025 CN 3026 9 CNB 25 2 DCP 44 3 DET 45 DET 47 5 DR 606 DR 617 7 DVP 45 ENC 118 FP 157 HP 148 1 HP 149 2 10 235 63 KY 623 LED 444 65 MA 162 MB 1111 67 MS 86 PA 342 342A PA 343 343A PA 344 61 PD 118 82 PS 708 9 PS 731 RE 246 89 RM 216 RX 101 87 SE 924 SW 1249 SW 1352 SW 1385 SW 1391 SW 1425 SW 1426 SY 355 TG 260 1 1 Optical drive 1 SE 709 2 SE 857 3 SE 858 4 SW 1125G 1 2 PDW 700 V1 E 1 1 2 Locations of Mechanical Parts D CCD unit 2 Filter knob LCD Hinge assembly 4 LCD back light 5 Fan motor exhaust 6 Fan motor drive 7 Loader assembly Cleaner assembly 9 Loading motor assembly Drive sub assembly PDW 700 V1 E 7 Optical block assembly 12 Seek motor assembly 3 Spindle motor 1 2 Circuit Description 1 2 1 Camera System AT 177 board The AT 177 board is the microprocessor board that controls the camera block 1 Microprocessor peripherals The CPU 1 209 uses SH2A 557206 and the clock pro vides 32 MHz from an external source that is six multiplica tion in the CPU so that the clock runs on 192 MHz The mem ory is composed of 64 MBit flash memory IC302 1 303 16
297. ry at which the END warning should be issued Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued Displays the type of automatically detected battery 1 The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER 2 The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER 4 40 PDW 700 V1 E BATTERY 2 Display Setting 2 the battery related items MOSOBATTERY 2 TOP gt TAPE DETECTION AUTO lt Other B SEGMENT SEGMENT S
298. s any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone R CH SIDE2 Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob right side on the side panel FRONT Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel 52 be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob right side or the MIC LEVEL knob Two knobs are interlocked each other Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and what is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel SIDE1 Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob left side on the side panel FRONT Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel 51 be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob left side or the MIC LEVEL knob Two knobs are interlocked each other Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and what is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel SIDE2 Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob right side on the side panel FRONT Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel 52 Itcan be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob right side or the MIC LEVEL knob Two knobs are interlocked each other Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3 when AU CH34 AGC MODE is set to OFF FIX Fixed FRONT Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel of the camcorder Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4 when AU CH34 AGC MODE is set to OFF FIX Fi
299. s cursor to RPN ITEM RPN CURSOR gt ON ITEM CURSOR H POS ITEM CURSOR V POS 4 Pushthe MENU knob and save the RPN data corrected value ITEM RECORD RPN EXEC 5 The message OK appears After confirming the RPN is removed push the MENU knob The message COMPLETE appears and the correction is performed To cancel the RPN correction after the correction is completed perform the Cancel without moving the position of the cross cursor ITEM DELETE RPN EXEC 6 To correct another repeat steps 2 to 5 Setting after Adjustment ITEM RPN CURSOR OFF ITEM TEST OUT SELECT VBS 9 2 10 S H DC Adjustment If it is poorly adjusted the RPN correction cannot be optimized or vertical stripes will appear when MASTER GAIN is increased In such case perform this adjustment Fixtures and Equipment HD picture monitor Preparation Connect an TEST OUT connector to the HD Y of HD picture monitor Lens IRIS CLOSE GAIN SW 12 dB WHITE BAL SW PRESET AUTO W B BAL switch Font panel BLK Perform the automatic black balance adjustment Perform the G channel adjustment using the menu until the vertical stripes become least visible on the picture monitor MENU SERVICE PAGE 523 S H DC ITEM S H DC B Gch 1 On the menu adjust as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE 523 S H DC ITEM TEST OUT SELECT B Perform the B channel adjustment using the menu until the vertical
300. s from the terminal semi automatic The internal SG is used as the standard signal and the inside panel for each LEVEL VR is turned and fine tuned 1 2 8 Optical Drive System Recording System Recording data sent from the DVP 45 board through the ATA bus Ultra ATA33 is sent to the Blu ray Disc Controller BDC IC300 on the DR 606 board The BDC performs signal processing to conform to recording format such as ATA interface ECC coding and 17PP Parity Preserve Prohibit RMTR modulation The recording data is converted to multi pulse in the BDC and the multi pulse data is sent through the flexible card wire to the optical block to be written into the disc Playback System Data Playback System The RF signal played back from the disc is sent from the optical block to the Front End Processor FEP 1 200 on the DR 606 board where equalizing and asymmetry correction are performed after the RF signal passes through the AGC After A D conversion by the read clock played back in the PLL the signal is sent to the BDC IC300 In the BDC the signal passes through the adaptive digital filter and Viterbi demodulation 17PP demodula tion and ECC decoding are applied to the signal Then the signal is sent through the ATA bus to the DVP 45 board as played back data Address restoration system The address data restored from the disc is sent from the optical block to the FEP 1 200 on the DR 606 board The analog address data pas
301. s the MENU knob Formats the USB memory to execute this menu item Executable only when ETHERNET USB is set to ENABL 4 26 PDW 700 V1 E 4 5 PAINT Menu When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis in the setting column the setup value is the relative value The range of setting in parenthesis can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu SW STATUS Display Turns ON OFF the PAINT related functions PO1OSW STATUS GAMMA BLACK GAMMA MATRIX KNEE WHITE CLIP DETAIL APERTURE FLARE TEST SAW Item Setting Function GAMMA OFF ON Turns ON OFF the gamma correction function BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns ON OFF the black gamma correction function MATRIX OFF ON Turns ON OFF all of the matrix correction functions KNEE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the knee correction function WHITE CLIP OFF ON Turns ON OFF the white clip correction function signal to improve resolution power APERTURE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the aperture correction function FLARE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the flare correction function TEST SAW OFF ON Turns ON OFF the test signal correction function PDW 700 V1 E 4 27 WHITE Display Setting color temperature at WHITE 2 1 COLOR TEMP Item COLOR TEMP lt gt C TEMP BAL A TOP 9 3200 A 0 lt A gt lt A gt lt B gt lt B gt lt B gt lt B gt Setting Displays the colo
302. ses through the AGC and BPF and is converted to digital data in the FEP The digital data is then sent to the BDC IC300 for address decoding The PLL in the FEP generates a wobble clock WCK Servo System Tri Axis Actuator and SA Actuator The object lens of the optical block is controlled for focus direction track direction and tilt angle by the tri axis actuator The light reflected from the disc is converted to the electrical signal by the optical block The electrical signal is input to the FEP IC200 and the focus error signal and the track error signal are detected The SV DSP IC400 outputs the control data based on the errors to the driver C501 and controls the focus actuator and the track actuator through the driver 1 16 The tilt actuator is controlled for its angle against the disc to be optimum based on the tilt adjustment result for the jitter of the playback signal to be minimum and the output of the angular velocity sensor The SA actuator position is controlled for the spherical aberration to be optimum at the start up adjustment when the disc is inserted The SA actuator for the double layer disc is controlled to the optimum position every time to jump the layer Seek Motor The seek motor controls the position of the optical block so that the track to be recorded or played back is kept within the object lens driving range ND Filter The transmission factor of the ND filter is selectable to reduce the laser
303. stripes become least visible on the picture monitor MENU SERVICE PAGE 523 S H DC ITEM S H DC B Bch 1 Setting after Adjustment On the menu set as follows Adjustment Procedure 1 the menu adjust as follows MENU SERVICE MENU SERVICE PAGE 523 S H DC ITEM S H DC ADJ MODE gt OFF ITEM TEST OUT SELECT gt VBS PAGE 523 S H DC ITEM S H DC ADJ MODE ON ITEM TEST OUT SELECT gt R If this adjustment is poorly performed the vertical stripes appear on the monitor screen Rch Gch Bch 2 Perform the R channel adjustment using the menu until the vertical stripes become least visible on the picture monitor MENU SERVICE PAGE 823 S H DC ITEM S H DC B Rch 1 3 Onthe menu adjust as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE 823 S H DC ITEM TEST OUT SELECT G PDW 700 V1 E 9 2 11 Correction Procedure The correction procedure is shown below Execute M21 APR of the MAINTENANCE MENU RPN is removed RPN exists in the Slow Shutter mode Execute M21 APR SLS of the MAINTENANCE MENU Correction OK Perform section 9 2 10 S H DC Adjustment Printed circuit board may be defective Replace the printed circuit boards of DCP 44 and TG 260 and CHB block one after another to locate the cause of the trouble The S H DC adjustment is executed normally Perform section 9 2 9 RPN Adjustment RPN is corrected C
304. substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded Flexible board is easily cut Be very careful not to fold them 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet PSW2 x 6 Attaching surface Spindle motor and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN3 7 Remove the three screws and remove the spindle motor 8 Clean the attaching surface and the three screw holes of a new spindle motor with a cleaning cloth with cleaning fluid soaked 9 Install the spindle motor with three screws in the order of the numbers shown in the figure 10 Connect the flexible card wire to the connec tor CN3 11 Perform the skew adjustment Refer to Section 8 12 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 PDW 700 V1 E 7 15 7 1 9 Removing Reinstalling Lock Release Assembly Removal 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer t
305. t as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK SHADING ITEM GBLKHSAW ITEM GBLK V SAW ITEM GBLKHPARA ITEM GBLK V PARA Spec Make the waveform of the G channel flat H SAW H PARA S 3 the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK SHADING ITEM SHADING CH SEL gt ITEM TEST OUT SELECT R 4 Adjust the shading for the R channel in the same procedure as G channel adjustment 5 On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK SHADING ITEM SHADING CH SEL gt B ITEM TEST OUT SELECT gt 6 Adjust the shading for the B channel in the same procedure as the G channel adjustment Setting after Adjustment On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE BLACK SHADING ITEM TEST OUT SELECT VBS PDW 700 V1 E 9 2 5 White Shading Adjustment This adjustment could not be correctly performed if the uneven white pattern is used luminance is not correct or lens iris and lens zoom are not in good conditions Fixtures and Equipment HD waveform monitor Full white pattern White window chart Preparation Connect an HD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector Lens IRIS AUTO Waveform monitor setting LUM mode VOLT FULL SCALE range 0 5 Shoot a fully occupied full white pattern in the under scanned monitor frame Adjustment Procedure Perform either step 1 or step 2 for the white shading adjustment 1 Auto white
306. t VIDEO OUT MENU from the VIDEO OUT page in the OPERATION menu The menu appears on the connected monitor ADJUSTING COMPLETED Component cable If failed The following screen appears TEST OUT Outside panel ACCELERATION OFFSET ADJUSTING FAILED Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE ADJUST OTHER ADJUST ACCELERATION OFFSET 1 confirmation screen appears 2 Select YES by turning the MENU knob and press the MENU knob ACCELERATION OFFSET ADJUST START YES NO 4 98 PDW 700 V1 E 4 10 22 ERROR LOGGER This menu allows you to delete registered error logs DRIVE ERROR and DRIVE WARNING are recorded Up to 16 pieces of log data are displayed The following data is overwritten on the existing data from the oldest Menu hierarchy DRIVE MAINTENANCE ERROR LOGGER 1 Displayed the error log list 2 Select a desired error number using the MENU knob ERROR LOGGER 09 22 09 22 09 21 09 21 09 21 09 21 09 21 09721 4 01 0 0 5 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 1000 O10101 Ow OO OO OO CO O OODOWWWWO 09 4 OOOO OUNO 00 00 To change the display to the next screen by turning the MENU knob ERROR LOGGER EAR ERROR LOG 3 Press the MENU knob Detailed information of the selected error appears ERROR LOGGER 01 2007
307. t as listed below for the adjustments Equipment AC adaptor Viewfinder Disc Oscilloscope HD waveform monitor SD waveform monitor Frequency counter Digital voltmeter Color monitor Signal generator Luminance meter Luxmeter Regulated power supply Audio level meter PDW 700 V1 E Model name Sony AC DN10 Sony HDVF 20A Sony professional disc PFD23A RS Tektronix TDS3054 or equivalent 150 MHz or more LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP LV5152DA or equivalent Tektronix 1755 or equivalent Advantest TR5821AK or equivalent Advantest TR6845 or equivalent Sony HDM 20E1U 14E1U 14E5U or equivalent Tektronix SG 5010 TG 2000 or equivalent Konica Minolta LS 110 or equivalent Konica Minolta T 10 or equivalent Output current More than 10 A Tektronix AM700 or Audio Precision System Two Cascade Plus 2722 or equivalent 1 47 1 11 Firmware Software 1 11 1 EEPROM FRAM List Board Ref No Type Saving data Action to be taken name when replacing AT 177 1C308 FRAM All setting values of the menu ABB AWB adjustment data Replacement not required CN 3005 1 2 EEPROM Model name Serial No Model code MAC address Hequired Refer to 7 8 3 CN 3005 Board DCP 44 IC8 EEPROM Backup data of the CN 3005 board DCP board adjustment Replacement not required value in the production factory SY 355 IC300 EEPROM 1 Not required IC507 FRAM x2 Not required FP 157 1 913 EEPROM Audio A D adjustment DSP multiplication value Audio D A Required a
308. tage in the IC839 6 pin to switch between a measurement range of 49 V to 14 V and 12 V to 17 V The voltage measurement is sent to ITRON CPU as the voltage value ITRON calculates the remaining battery charge creates voltage display data and returns the data to FP CPU FP CPU displays the voltage display data on the monochrome LCD The voltage display data can be check ed at the same time in the status menu for the color LCD 1 708 NJM386 Final AMP Front_EARPHONE L 1 704 TC74HC4052 REAR_EARPHONE with SW Final AMP 3 C 700 MONITOR VR FP CPU Head Phone Out Streo Mono Final AMP FP_CPU SP ATT LEVEL 0dB Bj MONITOR SP ATT LEVEL 3dB 9711 701 cpu aner Sw SP ATT LEVEL 64B ALARM SIGNAL FP CPU FP CPU MIN ALARM VOL 5 R761 0707 SP ATT LEVEL 9dB Q718 L wa When ALARM VOL Position 0 96 1 Alarm Level is about 38 dBu Audio Monitor Block 1 8 PDW 700 V1 E 10 Info battery communication circuit This equipment supports batteries with SM Bus specifications The serial communication bus SDA SCL for IC916 Parallel bus to I2C_bus Controller connected to the FP CPU bus passes through C927 and IC928 switching switch and connects to the serial terminal of the info battery The Serial Clock Rate is 88 KHz The battery type remaining time and other information is loaded onto FP CPU and trans
309. tal time 2 8 When the power is turned off and the unit is restarted ma version is updated Note If the firmware could not be updated to new version or if an error 1 displayed upon completion of version update it indicates that the firmware version update has failed Repeat the version update by following step 2 through step 8 again 1 50 PDW 700 V1 E 1 11 3 Software Option Registration Method by Using USB Memory This unit contains the software option that can be activated by registering the software key Install key There are two methods of registering the Install key One 18 the method by using the USB memory and the other is the method by accessing the XDCAM website This section describes the method by using the USB memory For the method by accessing the XDCAM website refer to 2 3 4 License Registration Note x1 A general purpose USB memory used in most comput ers can be used However there can be cases where the message Unknown USB or the message NO USB MEMORY appears when a USB memory is inserted in the USB slot These troubles may be caused by any problem in the USB memory or it may be caused if the USB memory is recognized as an unsupported device Replace the USB memory with another equivalent USB memory and try again First of all the process requires USB memory in which the text file pdw instkey Ist is saved for registration 1 Input the model name serial number a
310. ted during vertical move of loading O Spindle motor rotation is detected during vertical move of unloading The vertical move of loading unloading is also carried out by STBY ON OFF PDW 700 V1 E 3 3 Sub Code Any number of the following is applicable for X in the sub codes below showing an operation status where the error is detected Example Error X27 X27 827 Laser current of optical block assembly is abnormal zero or excessive during horizontal move of unloading Example Error 5X oT P 0292 2102 OA uo e DU UU ee 80 Address cannot be read from the disc in optical block assembly during horizontal move of unloading Operation cannot be identified or no need to be identified During loading During vertical move of loading Disc is not rotating Seeking Reading Writing Standby state During horizontal move of unloading During vertical move of unloading During disc removal During lens cleaning or device checking Not used During startup adjustment of optical block assembly During power on initialization of optical block assembly SA actuator 3 2 3 Error 20 When errors related to loader assembly are detected the following error codes are displayed Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive Description code code display logger logger 20 018 lt An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected 111 lt Horizontal move of loading did
311. tened if they are folded Flexible board is easily cut Be very careful not to fold them PDW 700 V1 E Removal 1 Remove the outside panel assembly Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN1 on the SW 1125G board 6 Fully loosen the two screws fixing the loader assembly and remove it in the direction of the arrow Note These screws have a drop safe so that the screws cannot be removed from the loader assembly 7 Remove the loader assembly in the direction of the arrow and disconnect the harness from the connector CN709 on the SE 857 Notes Be careful not to lose the two LD spacers The spindle motor has an intense powerful magnet Remove the loader assembly being careful not to be attracted by the magnetic force or not to be caught by the edge of the spindle motor 7 2 Adhesive sheet Cover sheet Corner block CN1 SW 1125G board Loader assembly Flexible card wire A 1 WY AN 16 Waan UN SD OF LD spacer PDW 700 V1 E Reinstallation When installing take care so that the torsion spring and CL spring do not come off 1 Rotate the gear A to move the cartridge ho
312. ternal 10 bit A D After being converted into a multiplication value for DSP the signal is sent to ITORN_CPU ITORN_CPU performs operation processing on the Digital_WRR Reference OUT 40dBFS DSP setting the same MIC as specifications I2S Format DSP 40dBFS TMS320DA150GGU120 1 HeadRoom i i 12dB ATT OdB i 16dB ATT 44 18dB ATT 20dB ATT 80B 20dBFS 4dBu 8dBu 10dBu 12dBu AK4382A WireLess 30dBu LINE IN HeadRoom Get 30dBu ee cee AK 5383 input 234 1 X Y terminal 29 L 1 1 HeadRoom Get 40dBu AK 5383 input 33dBu X Y terminal 39dBu AK 4382A 1 Max Output 2 75Vp p combined front and side volumes and sends the results to DSP The D A serial signal for playback passes through the DVP 45 board and MB 1111 board and enters the digital switch IC461 of the FP 157 board In the monitor CH SW 1 amp 2 or CH3 amp 4 is selected and applied to the 24 bit D A converter IC453 The D A converter output passes through the differential LPF ATT balance to unbalance conversion amp IC514 and MB 1111 board It is applied to the final amp IC200 IC201 of the CNB 25 board and output from the 5 pin XLR connector AXM 38 board The audio signal for the monitor passes from IC520 620 output through the monaural mix and stereo switching switch IC703 IC704 Then the signal is applied
313. the flexible card wire from the connector CN600 8 Remove the seven screws and remove the SE 858 board Reinstallation 1 When installing a new SE 858 board fold it several times as shown in the figure to SE 858 board maintain the folded shape Mountain fold three Valley fold three PDW 700 V1 E 7 21 2 Install the SE 858 board with seven screws in the order of the numbers shown in the figure Obverse side Reverse side Tightening torque Conduction Insulation 10 102 0 01 Nem 1 0 0 1 kgf cm 3 Connect the flexible card wire to tor CN600 Conduction The flexible card wire connected to CN600 has a conductive area on both sides and the tip on the reverse side is insulated Insert the flexible card wire into the connector as far as Screws it will go and then lock it 4 Connect the harness to the connector CN2 5 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps to 5 of removal 7 22 PDW 700 V1 E 7 3 Replacing Fan Motor Drive To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver
314. the next periodical replacement should be SEEK RUNNING optical head seek operation time display mode resettable Accumulates the seek operation time of the optical head and displays the value by an hour Resettable By resetting it after replacing a seek motor the value can be used as a reference to when the next replacement should be PDW 700 V1 E FUNCTION LIMIT S220FUNCTION LIMIT TOP gt AF DISPLAY je OFF Item Setting Function AF DISPLAY OFF ON When the FUJINON PF lens HA22x7 4BRD HA13x4 5BRD is used turns ON OFF the function that displays the AF detection window and the in focus indicator on the viewfinder screen Turning ON OFF the AF detection window changing the area and turning ON OFF the in focus display are activated by the switch of the lens side For details refer to the lens specifications In focus indicator display displayed above F value display of lens on VF DISP A Out of former focus Just focus W Out of post focus S H DC S230S H DC S H DC ADJ MODE TEST OUT SELECT S H DC B Rch 1 S H DC B Gch 1 S H DC B Bch 1 Item Setting Function S H DC ADJ MODE OFF ON Turns ON OFF the function that displays the dummy white spots vertical bars for adjustment on the screen The dummy white spots are displayed in the order of R G B starting from the center of screen to the right Adjusts the S H DC B R channel G channel B channel to the point where the dummy white spots are least v
315. they are folded Flexible CN600 SE 858 board Connector Optical block Flexible card wire DR SE858 Flexible card wire DR OP SE 857 board Flexible card wire DR SE857 229 2 V RS 9 V LEY RANA 77 Step screws 7 5 Reinstallation 1 Reinstall the drive sub assembly with the four step screws Tightening torque 53 107 0 01 Nem 5 3 X 0 1 kgf cm 2 Connect the flexible board DR OP to the connector on the optical block assembly 3 Connect the flexible board DR SES58 to the connector CN600 on the SE 858 board Note Place the flexible board DR SE858 in the way that it is routed in between the motor and the chassis 4 Connect the flexible board DR SE857 to the connector CN600 on the SE 857 board 5 Reinstall the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Reinstall the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 7 Reinstall the corner block Refer to Section 7 1 1 8 Reinstall the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 9 Reinstall the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 2 Drive sub assembly Step Screws ly lt SSS N Flexible board DR SE858 CN600 SE 858 board Connector Optical block Wenge Flexible board DR SE858 Flexible board DR OP SE 857 board Flexible board DR SE857 PDW 700 V1 E 7 1 3 Replacing
316. this part 9 spring does not come off from the back side When tightening the screw support the with fingers loader assembly with fingers not to deform it 8 Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 PDW 700 V1 E 7 7 7 1 4 Replacing Loading Motor Assembly To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed Fixtures locking compound 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser caution sheet Refer to Section 1 6 2 step 2 3 Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet Refer to Section 7 1 1 step 3 4 Remove the SW guard assembly Refer to Section 1 7 6 5 Remove the loader assembly Refer to Section 7 1 1 6 Remove the SE 709 board Refer to Section 7 2 1 7 Remove the two screws and remove the motor bracket assembly and the loading motor assembly Note When reassembling apply locking compound to the t
317. tion of the camera that shoots the chart surface Chart Light source Luxmeter Setting Luminance In case of using transparent type chart Measuring equipment Photometer Minolta LS 110 or equivalent pre calibrated 1 Turn on the pattern box and allow it to warm up for about 30 minutes 2 Place the pattern box such that direct light does not fall on the chart surface Alternatively place a cover the inside of which is painted with unglazed black around the entire chart 3 Fix a photometer 1 m in front of the chart in the pattern box 4 Obtain the luminance of 573 6 cd m at the center of the chart by adjusting the BRIGHTNESS control of the pattern box Note Adjusting luminance of 573 6 cd m creates the same illuminance of 2000 Ix on the reflective type gray scale chart with reflection of 89 9 Luminance meter 1 9 2 Adjustment 9 2 1 Confirming VCO CONT Frequency Perform this check only when the DCP 44 board is replaced Before measurement set main POWER switch of Camcorder to ON and be sure to allow for about 10 minute warm up time mages may deteriorate during adjustment Fixtures and Equipment Frequency counter Preparation Connect as follows IN Frequency counter On the menu set as follows MENU SERVICE PAGE VCO ADJUST Adjustment Procedure Adjust the following thee types of VCO e HDCK N HDCK P SDCK 1 HDCK adjustment Set CL
318. tion is a latch operation the main power of the unit needs to be turned off once and back on after PDW 700 V1 E the input power is set to below 18 V Excess current detection The output circuit of the UNREG 12 V has excess current detection resistors R70 R71 and R72 A voltage drop at the resistors is detected by the ICS When the voltage drop at the resistors exceeds 200 mV the 12 V output is turned DOWN Another SHUT DOWN signal is the H SHUT DOWN signal that is supplied from the RE 246 board If any one of the DC DC converter outputs 15 shorted the output 12 V enters the SHUT DOWN state except UN SW 12 V SHUT DOWN Since this function is a latch operation the main power of the unit needs to be turned off once and back on after the cause of the excess current is removed Protection against input power connection of reverse polarity If the input power is connected in reverse polarity FET Q2 1s turned off so that the GND lines of the control system circuits are disconnected Thus the control circuits are protected and supply of 12 V power to the respective circuits is stopped FAN voltage control The Q13 and Q14 are controlled by the FAN CONT signal from the AT 177 board and the PWM wave is converted to the DC voltage according to the DUTY The voltage controls the FAN and reduces the tempera ture increase Audio Circuit This 15 the output circuit for the AUDIO OUT rear connector The signal
319. to Section 3 2 2 If 02 020 is displayed be sure to clean the pickup lens referring to LENS CLEANING Menu Refer to Section 4 10 17 Before cleaning be sure to unload the disc from the unit 6 3 6 3 Cares after Using under Special Environment Checking the followings is recommended when returned from the news gathering at seaside at the dusty locations at hot spring or if the unit is heavily splashed with water or water leaks in the unit in the rough weather or the like Carefully clean off sand and dust that entered the unit with airbrush or the like If salt contained in seawater or sulfur contained in hot spring attaches to the non painted surface of outer cabinet the cabinet may corrode in white If it attaches wipe it off immediately with alcohol If water leaks inside the unit turn off the power and dry the unit with hair dryer and so on Check especially that water does not remain in the CCD block or the power supply block Note If the unit is not taken care of appropriately corrosion may occur inside that may cause fire and electric shock Clean out the contacting surface of connectors Perform the general operational check and confirm that no abnormal sound is heard from inside the unit or the unit operates correctly without any abnormality PDW 700 V1 E 6 4 Digital Hours Meter The hours meter has six types of display mode The operation hours or operation count of the PDW 700 can be accum
320. to the SER VICE layer 1 Saving the setups for the items to be included in the SERVICE FILE in the memory stick SER VICE FILE SAVE When executing SVC FILE SAVE on the SERVICE FILE page under the SERVICE menu page 25 lt S25 gt the data of the SERVICE FILE items corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE and SERVICE belonging to the SERVICE layer are saved as SERVICE FILE in the memory stick d OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION PAINT NANCE FILE SERVICE USER layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Memory stick Executing USER FILE SAVE Save the data in the SERVICE layer of the SERVICE FILE item in the memory stick Calling the SERVICE FILE saved in the memory stick SERVICE FILE LOAD When executing SVC FILE LOAD on the SERVICE FILE page under the SERVICE menu page 25 lt S25 gt the data of the SERVICE FILE corresponding items among OPERATION PAINT MAIN TENANCE FILE and SERVICE stored in the memory stick are called to the SERVICE layer of the SERVICE FILE item ed OPERA MAINTE Data Structure TION PAINT NANCE FILE SERVICE USER layer PRESET layer SERVICE layer FACTORY layer Memory stick Executing SVC FILE LOAD Call the SERVICE FILE stored in the memory stick to the data in the PRESET layer of the SER VICE FILE items 5 10 PDW 700 V1 E 5 3 6 Other RESET This section describes SERVICE RESET and FACTORY PRESET in t
321. tware option using the Install key can be made from the License Registration page of the Maintenance menu Procedure 1 Enter the Install key character string in the Install key field or alternately click the Browse button in the Install key list file field to select the Install key list file Pi REDO RTM BACANA Y I AW O O AAG yo OGLE DHS TEUAG http 1921681 10 index cei Ese v Google G Bookmarksy P Check Autolink QA Sendtov A Settings v Sony Microso ft Internet Explorer DER Y XDCAM Status License Registration Device Informatio 3 Input Install key or input Install key list file and then press Send button Hours Mete Software Ve rsion Install key Install Key list fil Disc nstall Key list file Disc Pro Thumb Professional Disc 2008 Sony Corporation 2 Click Send 3 The software option that is enabled by sending the Install key is displayed To register the software option being displayed click the Execute button Sony Microsoft Internet Explorer RO RTV BACANA YD AIO O AAG yo OGRE OAS PEVAD http 192 168 1 10 indexcei v Bookmarksy W Check W Autolink QA Send tow A Settings v Status License Registration The transmitted Install key enables the use of the following optiona
322. ulated for each mode and displayed on the viewfinder The hours meter can be reset as desired Use the hours meter as a reference for periodic inspection The display can also be checked on the HOURS METER page of the DIAGNOSIS menu Cannot be reset in the DIAGNOSIS menu Display and reset are carried out by using the HOURS METER 2 page in the SERVICE menu Description of HOURS METER 2 page SERVICE menu For the description of the HOURS METER 2 page of the SERVICE menu refer to Section 4 4 9 Service Menu 6 4 1 Display Method and Reset Methods Refer to 4 9 SERVICE Menu for the display of the SERVICE menu Reset Methods 1 Display the SERVICE menu Refer to 4 9 SERVICE Menu TOP MENU is displayed on the viewfinder screen 2 Select SERVICE from the TOP MENU and press the MENU knob Rotate the MENU knob to scroll the screen up to HOURS METER 2 and press the knob 4 Rotate the MENU knob to move the cursor onto RESET METER and press the knob Move to the RESET METER screen 5 Rotate the MENU knob to move the cursor to the desired hours meter 6 Press the MENU knob The accumulated time of the selected hours meter is reset W METER ESC OPERATION HOURS t Resets the power on hours SPINDLE RUN HOURS lt Resets the spindle rotation time LASER PARAMETER t Resets the light output counter value for the optical head LOADING 4 Resets the number of times the disc
323. unction HD SD PHASE Display only Displayed only when LETTER BOX is set to ENABLE or DELAYED when FOCUS is set to ENABLE In these states the phases of HD output and SD output from this unit do not match REF HD Y PHASE Display only Displayed only when FOCUS MAGi is set to ENABLE DELAYED Note In this state the phase of HD Y output from this unit does not match the phase of the GENLOCK IN signal When multiple PDW 700 units are daisy chained via this unit inter system phases do not match PDW 700 V1 E 4 25 MEMORY REC Display Setting the proxy data record function TOP gt MEMORY REC eDSABL Item Setting Function MEMORY REC DSABL ENABL Turns ON OFF the proxy data record function and the copy function from the disc to the USB memory When ENABL is selected in MEMORY REC gt MEMORY REC eENABL COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC COPY ALL CLIPS EXEC ABORT COPY 5 EXEC DEL ALL MEM CLP EXEC FORMAT MEMORY EXEC Item Setting Function COPY CURRENT CLP Press the MENU knob Copies a proxy data clip on the disc to the USB memory to execute this menu item COPY ALL CLIPS Press the MENU knob Copies all of the proxy data clips on the disc to the USB to execute this menu item memory ABORT COPY Press the MENU knob Stops copying to the USB memory to execute this menu item DEL ALL MEM CLP Press the MENU knob Deletes the saved proxy data to execute this menu item FORMAT MEMORY Pres
324. val PDW 700 V1 E 7 8 Service Action After Replacing or Repairing the Board 7 8 1 Optical Block Assembly Refer to 8 2 1 Adjustment After Replacing the Optical Block Assembly 7 8 2 AT 177 Board After replacing the AT 177 board perform the procedure in the following order Note Save the setting of the menu contents in the Memory Stick before performing the actions after replacement ALL File and SERVICE File Refer to step 4 in 5 3 2 ALL FILE and step 1 in 5 3 5 SERVICE FILE for details 1 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version Refer to 1 11 2 Firmware Update Using the USB Memory for details 2 Reset FRAMs 1 308 on the AT 177 board to the factory default settings Reset them using the SERVICE menu Refer to 4 1 1 Basic Operations of Setup Menus for the details of operating menus Refer also to 4 1 2 How to Display the SERVICE Menu as required 1 Open the switch cover with the power of the main unit turned on and turn on the MENU ON OFF switch The menu appears on the viewfinder screen regardless of the ON OFF state of the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder 2 Select SERVICE from the TOP menu and press the MENU knob 3 Scroll the screen to MENU SET by rotating the MENU knob and press the MENU knob 4 Point the cursor on FACTORY PRESET by rotating the MENU knob and press the MENU knob 5 Press the MENU knob and execute FACTORY PRESET
325. video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device VBS or SD SDI HD SDI Selects input signal to be recorded by this equipment among the input signals supplied from external equipment when EXT is selected by REC VIDEO SOURCE When the input signal is SD select the method that determines whether the signal is treated as a wide signal AUTO When wide picture information is detected in the input signal treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up converter operating mode to squeeze mode Record wide picture information when recording SD When wide picture information is not detected set the upconverter operating mode to edge crop mode and do not record wide picture information 16 9 Always treat the signal as a wide signal and set the upconverter operating mode to squeeze mode Record wide picture information when recording SD Selects whether to modify the setup level of input video signals 7 5 Remove the setup Select when signals with 7 5 setup are input 0 0 Do not remove the setup Select when signals without setup are input 1 Displayed only when the CBK HD01 or 5 02 option board is installed 2 Displayed only when COUNTRY is set to NTSC J AREA or NTSC AREA and the CBK SCO2 option board is installed UMID SET Display Setting the UMID O260UMID SET gt COUNTRY CODE ORGANIZATION USER CODE TIME ZONE Item Setting Function COUNTRY CODE 4 characters alphanu
326. with the following devices by relaying through PIER G4 IC1900 DVP 45 board e CAVA 1 200 45 board 1 6 MPEG2 VIDEO CODEC IC1000 1200 1400 DVP 45 board AUDIO REC PB DSP 1 800 801 DVP 45 board AUDIO Low Resolution DSP IC900 DV P 45 board LVIS ICA00 DV P 45 board Optical Drive DR 606 board AT microprocessor AT 177 board FP microprocessor FP 157 board Character generator IC503 DCP 44 board e LTC generator reader PIER G4 IC1900 built in The PCI bus interface is connected to the Linux system on the SY 355 board via the PCI PCI Bridge IC900 S Y 355 board and receives and sends data to the controllers lt Memory controller gt SDRAM SY 355 board 1 201 to 204 control 32 bit x 64M word Flash memory IC505 IC506 S Y 355 board control 32 bit x 16 M word lt Serial interface gt EEPROM control saving the setting data lt External control bus CPU LOCAL bus gt IN port OUT port control RESET signal output on each device loading the switch setting and similar signals CAVA PIER G4 FAM BRIDGE each FPGA configuration FRAM IC507 S Y 355 board control 2 Application device control system Linux This is the system that uses RISC microprocessor hereinafter refer to as CPU IC1300 on the SY 355 board to control the device for the application Linux is used as the OS CPU and peripheral circuit configuration is almost same as that of the system control PCI bus int
327. wo screws 8 Remove the two screws to detach the loading motor assembly Take care so that the worm stopper does not come off 9 Install a new loading motor assembly by reversing steps 1 to 8 Motor bracket assembly Precision Loading motor assembly Worm stopper Motor bracket assembly Precision P2x2 5 PDW 700 V1 E 7 1 5 Replacing Optical Block Assembly The optical block assembly requires periodic replacement Refer to 6 1 Periodic Check Replacement Parts List for details To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes be sure to establish a ground before cleaning the drive assembly Refer to Section 1 12 1 The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits Keep magnetic substance away from these parts If the magnetic force makes a metallic material such as a screwdriver reflection block and so on hit the actuator the objective lens will be damaged If the magnetic substance 18 moved close to these parts their characteristics may be changed Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded Flexible board is easily cut Be very careful not to fold them Fixtures Cleaning liquid Cleaning cloth Parallel pin 2 X 20 1 Removal 1 Remove the outside panel Refer to Section 1 7 1 2 Remove the laser
328. xed FRONT Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel of the camcorder 4 43 WRR SETTING Display Setting on Wireless MO9OWRR SETTING VALID CH SEL CH SELECT DELAY COMP AUDIO PEAK INPUT LEVEL ATT LEVEL LCF FREQ SYSTEM DELAY Item Setting WRR VALID CH SEL ALL CH1 WRR CH SELECT TX1 TX2 WRR DELAY COMP OFF ON 2 1 AUDIO PEAK PEAK 1 2 INPUT LEVEL MIC LINE TX ATT LEVEL 2 LCF FREQ 1 1 2 SYSTEM DELAY AUTO 0 0 ms to 8 0 ms x1 indicates the channel number Function Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless receiver or channel 1 only ALL Enable both channel 1 and 2 CH1 Enable channel 1 only Select this setting to use the wireless receiver as a monaural receiver Specifies the target channel for other items in this menu TX4 Channel 1 TX2 Channel 2 Enables or disables the delay compensation function for wireless audio input OFF Disables the function Enables the function the audio in all EE output is delayed by about 8 ms Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is over the peak Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by
329. xed parts 7 Remove the unfixed parts PDW 700 V1 E SW door Harness CN702 FP 157 board Harnesses CN703 CN700 CN701 PSW2 x 5 FP 157 board Unfixed parts _ 2 gt ase holder Inside panel 1 41 8 Remove the four screws PSW2 X 5 remove the LCD harness cover LCD harness cover 9 Remove the LCD harness through the hole of the harness cover LCD harness 10 Remove the hinge blind plate and helical torsion spring 11 Remove the four screws P2 6 X 6 remove the inside pad L Helical torsion spring Hinge blind plate a an Inside pad L 12 Remove the three screws PSW2 X 5 remove the LCD block LCD block PSW2 x5 1 42 PDW 700 V1 E 1 8 2 LCD Hinge 1 Remove the inside panel Refer to Section 1 7 3 Remove the LCD block Refer to Section 1 8 1 3 Remove the four screws of a M2 X 4 and remove the LCD cover 4 Remove the two screws of 6 M2 4 5 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1 on the PD 118 board and remove the LCD hinge 6 Remove the screw of c M1 7 X 2 5 of the back hinge cover and remove the back hinge cover 7 Turn the hinge and remove the two screws of 9 M1 7 X 2 5 then remove the front hinge cover 8 Disconnect the harness from the connector CN1 on the DET 45 board 9 Remove the screw of a M1 7 X 2 5 and remove the DET 45 board PDW 700 V1 E
330. xis Adjusts the saturation SAT of the multi matrix correction every sixteen axis PDW 700 V1 E 4 35 V MODULATION Display Adjusting Temporary WHITE V SAW SHADING for LENS P130V MODULATION gt V MOD MASTER VMOD VMOD G VMOD VMOD TEST OUT SELECT Item Setting Function V MOD OFF ON Turns ON OFF the V modulation function MASTER VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts amount of the master V modulation correction All of the R G and B V modulation corrections are controlled VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts amount of the R V modulation correction VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts amount of the G V modulation correction VMOD 99 to 99 Adjusts amount of the B V modulation correction TEST OUT SELECT VBS Y R G B LCD Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector SATURATION Display Setting the saturation 14 5 ON gt LOW KEY SAT L KEY SAT LEVEL KEY SAT RANGE BLACK GAMMA BLK GAM LEVEL BLK GAM RANGE Item Setting Function LOW KEY SAT OFF ON Turns ON OFF the low key saturation function L KEY SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the saturation level of low luminance part L KEY SAT RANGE LOW L MID Sets the range of video signal in which the low key H MID HIGH saturation correction is effective LOW 0103 6 L MID O to 7 2 H MID 0 to 14 4 HIGH 0 to 28 8 Y BLACK GAMMA OFF ON Turns ON OFF the Y black gamma correction function Y BLK GAM LEVEL 99 to 99 Adjust the gamma
331. y and up to 100 SCENE files in a memory stick When an operator saves the setup data optimized for a specific scene during rehearsal the operator can establish exactly the same setup for the actual take as in the rehearsal by calling the saved setup data REFERENCE FILE The REFERENCE file contains the setup values that serve as a reference for implementing SCENE FILE STANDARD One file can be saved in the memory stick LENS FILE The LENS file contains setup data that corrects the characteristics unique to each lens flare white shading center marker position white correction values Up to 32 LENS files can be saved in the built in memory and up to 100 files can be saved in a memory stick PDW 700 V1 E 5 2 Data Structure Each menu item can be classified into the categories of USER OPERATION PAINT and MAINTE NANCE In addition to these categories each menu item has different data in the USER layer not the USER menu PRESET layer SERVICE layer not the SERVICE menu and FACTORY layer USER layer Data layer that can be changed by menu operation PRESET layer Data layer to be registered as the standard setup SERVICE layer Data layer that can be changed by a service engineer after entering the Service mode For users this layer is identical to the factory default setup FACTORY layer Data layer that contains factory adjusted values and fixed values 1 Refer to 4 1 2 How to Display the SERVCE Menu for entering the
332. ystem control CPU and FAM IC600 SY 355 board is detected 103 X Communication error between system control CPU and composite decoder IC100 1V 59 board is detected 104 lt X Communication error between system control CPU and MPEG IMX encoder IC 1600 DVP 45 board is detected 107 X Communication error between system control CPU and MPEG HD codec during TORINO IC1000 1C1200 1C1400 DVP 45 board is detected during recording recording 109 c X Communication error between system control CPU and MPEG HD codec during TORINO IC1000 1C1200 1C1400 DVP 45 board is detected during playback playback 108 lt X MPEG HD codec TORINO IC1000 IC1200 IC1400 DVP 45 board has during become abnormal during recording recording 10A lt X MPEG HD codec TORINO IC1000 1 1200 IC1400 DVP 45 board has during become abnormal during playback playback 10C lt X System control CPU detects an error in LVIS IC400 DVP 45 board 10F lt X System control CPU detects PROXY VIDEO block in LVIS 1 400 during DVP 45 board error during recording recording 110 lt X System control CPU detects PROXY VIDEO block in LVIS 1 400 during DVP 45 board error during playback playback 111 lt Communication error between system control CPU and PB DSP IC801 PB DSP DVP 45 board is detected 113 lt X Communication error between system control CPU and REC DSP IC800 HEC DSP DVP 45 board is detected 116 lt

CBK-HD01 - Krypton Film AS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents